Home

MPC5000 Manual

Contents

1. eeeeeeeeeee 29 W Setting the Length ofa Sequenti erns idi set uites Posada dn Eo etes Lol olt citus DL aet ones peau end 29 NH Setting the Time Signature of the Sequence osos de iab Esa ndis EA AS 29 EE il mc 30 m Tap nds ER dan aia 30 BH Changing Tempo of All Sequences At One Time asii ii retener ER pa eee rae aieo b coo a n Ve Ee Ee HER sen odds 30 W About Tempo Chalge i d ut bros te deas ith obtu et Recien quiin a eda checa rtp ates ea topo Me ped Meet us 30 NH Setting the Loop fora Sequencernan ainda ideal cio Ar en Rides Me P UL EE a ite qudd 31 E Extending the Sequence Length Automatically c e vt en te e o e d e i staal tas 31 E Changing the DefaultiseltigS cua a pios 31 NH Chineimne tie Sequence Namen wen cr pdt dero sue on et seal eed at ad cee ep reta tuto 31 E Changing the Default Name for a SequetiCe int co rite de ii tend td P Ra dde codes 32 m Copying aSsSeguUence MNT NEC 32 E Copying a Sequence Parameters Loop Time A Bars eta t ertt ee deci bn da Lex eas EE LORA RN ex Ua Ludus 32 MERE UCM REESE 32 NW Delete A Sequence a ato des Rial 33 B Handling the duration the length of a note at the loop boundary sess enne 33 Track Features da O LEE osos Mibi mee 33 E Selecting a Pro aci mc aE aC me Re RTT eee RTT ne S 33 W Sending MIDI Pro orannC hanes vc ste xs asciende o atari 34 m Track Velocidad OS 34 m A RR ea ahi lacs 34 E Settine
2. 165 W About memory cards scutis d testen Pad odit Sates senna AS tae d sak utto dedu sS AAA deca NAAA Neue 165 crore epe e Rd 165 N Selects the destination llo deed eei ect Diano eos lata oE UM ha 165 NH Creatine a New ROIS secutus le sp Ds vt ad e 165 E Savinea Sample M 166 E Saving a Synthor Sample PrOBEAI iani deter E AE AA ARA AA REA E QU C SL E 166 mE Saving RN 167 E Saving a SequellGe 222 ecneic e a a E aa a aea aAa eaaa a a aaan EEE os aat 167 B Saving All the Sequences and the Songs at the Same Time occcnooooccnncnnnonoonnnnnnnnnonnnnnocnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanannnnnnnnns 168 W Saving Alb ata In MerHoEy oro io ers ean iib a er cime d 168 EH About input Phra CIP E le aix orto b S xo bcs eS udelut ssi i eee baat be ta idan UA eA 169 AE utn alero ha Meets cnc conta dd nba 169 E le Gino PANS NT 169 m Copines tiles eT 169 E Movin AAA mE MERO MCE 170 PO AGUNG eec 171 E Selecting ae US m M 171 MN L adinga Samples T M 171 B Create a New Program When Loading a Sample cccoooocconnnnnooocnncnonononononnnnnonononnnnnnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 172 W Loading Audio from the Internal CD Drive optional neenon enn nana rena ena sea anra 172 MEE Ce a PTO OT aI E eM 172 B Deleting All Programs and Samples in Memory Before Loading
3. sess 173 MEM ES aAGiIO ASS QUCICO TREES P M H 173 EE oon s UB CI T 173 BW Loading Individual Sequences trom the ALL Pile iii 173 E Leading Only the Effect Set from the ALL File eco ce A a a AE AAA elio 173 NH Eoadme a Folder tale idu estt tcd o oes sot edd estu tance aT Mer tae C E E 174 Automatically Create Programs from a Folder eeee eere nennen nnn nnn nnn 174 B Loading a Folder after Deleting All Data in Memory cooooooonncnnnnononnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnononnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 174 E Losdimpa Projecteur Einb idees ates cl dad 174 E Cosdne an Input Thru BHO coe ae ea di te oi ete SS 174 Burnilhig CDS A A R EE EEE TA E 175 E Dat CDS Mon RT 175 N Erasma CD RWS aee A O ne ER ACA rT 176 NS El S e gp P AA A S 176 Autoload sisina a a a a aR W Creating an Autoload S oen rtr ined aptat cd ara detta lada aaa a a aa a sd aa dub an Aa aaa de 176 W Restoring the Factory Utoloadu uu SAA AS 176 N burn AAA II ud ERE MER a a bcd ERC aa aa CD d Meret 177 Formatting csn AAA AAA BM Auditioning Synth Pro rra a dni AAA AAA exei uaque eeu toga ado oo eeu evt AREA 177 EH Ouck File Browser Movement depen tuia dad M A aa 177 Chapter 17 Program and FX Q LINK Controllers E Program Q LINK ne
4. When this is selected the duration of events recorded in Step Record mode will be automatically set to a percentage of the Timing Correct Setting For example if Timing Correct is set to 1 8th notes a TC VALUE of 50 will set the duration of each event to one half the length of the Timing Correct setting In this case the length of each recorded event will be 16th notes Setting a TC VALUE of 100 will insert events equal to the Timing Correct length E Inserting an event During the step recording you can enter events using the insert function as well as using pads and MIDI keyboard 01 Move to the time position that you wish to insert the event and press F5 INSERT The Insert Event window will be displayed 02 In the Type field select the event to insert and press F5 DO IT The selected event will be inserted Hint After completing the Step recording you can go back the previous status by pressing the UNDO button 53 E Track Lock Individual tracks in a sequence can be locked for editing This will allow data on that track to be protected when performing global functions and protects from accidental adding deleting or changing the information on the track A Track s LOCK Status is indicated by the padlock icon in the upper right corner of the display To lock or unlock a track do the following 01 Select the TRACK LOCK icon 02 Turn the DATA Wheel or press the button to lock the tr
5. 04 In the Mode field choose the method of velocity change ADD VALUE Mode Adds the value selected in the Value field to the note SUB VALUE Subtracts the value selected in the Value field from the note MULTI VAL Multiplies the Velocity percent by the value selected in the Value field SET TO VALUE Sets the note to the Velocity selected in the Value field 05 In the Value field set the value to be adjusted You can set the Value between O and 127 When you select MULTI VAL in the Mode field you can set the Value between O0 and 200 06 Press the F6 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start processing your changes 44 Editing Sequences E Changing the duration of an event DURATION You can change the Duration of any note event it MEL ME Edit fat oat l 531 681 Tor_ Gun 01 Select the Edit field in the EVENT page of the SEQ EDIT mode 601 01 000 Tk 01 Track l and select DURATION To 662 61 000 A The various fields necessary for changing the duration will be displayed 02 In the Range field and the Pad Notes field select the region that you wish to edit 03 In the Edit Sq field and the Tk field on the right select the sequence and track that you wish to edit 04 In the Mode field select how you want to change the Duration ADD VALUE Adds the value in MIDI pulses selected in the Value field to the note SUB VALUE Subtracts the value in MIDI pul
6. B Fade In This function sets an automatic fade in between the in and out point of SERE REHE CAE l Samrle Edit the selected section The following fade types are available Edit AS Fade Tyre LIHEHE Linear Fade In This selection fades in the audio with a linear curve A linear curve will go from start to end with no curve creating a straight line DO IT will arely a Fade In to the selected region Logarithmic Fade In This selection fades in the audio with a Logarithmic curve A logarithmic curve will quickly rise and then even out for the middle section surging quickly again as it nears the end Exponential Fade In This selection fades the audio with an Exponential curve An exponential curve will slowly rise in the beginning and then quickly rise for the middle section and then slowing again as it nears the end F4 CANCEL F5 DO IT Press F4 CANCEL to abort the Fade In operation Press F5 DO IT to apply the change 110 Sample Editing TRIM Mode E Fade Out This function sets an automatic fade Out between the in and out point of m Edit ASA the selected section The following fade types are available Linear Fade Out Fade Tyre LIHEHE This selection fades out the audio with a linear curve A linear curve will go from start to end with no curve creating a straight line DO IT will arely a Fade Out to the selected region Logarithmic Fade O
7. KEYGROUP Type Program The MPC5000 also has a program type called KEYGROUP A Keygroup program is a keymapped multisampled program which allows several samples to be played chromatically across a standard keyboard 5 Keygroups use velocity switching crossfading and key ranges to yield a iz Heu Hame Piano very realistic sound across the entire keybed Up to 128 keygroups each with up to 4 samples can be used to a total of 512 samples ej Prosram Ture E Creating a Keygroup Program To create a Keygroup program do the following b MESE DO IT 01 In PROGRAM Mode select the PGM field 02 Press the WINDOW key The NEW PROGRAM Window will be displayed 03 In the Program Type field select KEYGROUP You can also name the program using the New Name field 04 Press F5 DO IT to create a new Keygroup The screen will be displayed as shown on the right This page is similar to the SAMPLE page with the following new parameters Total Keygroups This field shows the total number of keygroups in the program KgLvl This field sets the overall volume of the Keygroup Like SAMPLE ae sample programs Individual sample levels can also be controlled in the LVL TL samples field pM samrle zamrle KgTune NT 166 KaTune 06 660 KsPan This field sets the overall tuning for the selected Keygroup D26 A G 9c12F Mute KgPan TUL This field sets the overall panning for the selected Keygroup KRange
8. 05 Select the Freq field and set the cutoff frequency The cut off frequency is the frequency that triggers the filter When you select the LOW PASS filter if you set the cutoff frequency too low the sound will seem dull This is because most of the higher frequencies of sound are attenuated by the filter When you select the HIGH PASS filter if you set the cutoff frequency too high most of the lower frequencies are attenuated which results in a more hollow sound 06 Set the Res field to adjust the resonance of the filter If you set the resonance value at a larger value the frequencies set in the Freq field will be boosted more It is hard to describe the effect of the resonance because it differs depending on the cut off frequency and filter type Experiment with several settings in the Type field Freq field and Res field 126 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs E Controlling the Filter with Velocity You can control the cutoff frequency of the filter by velocity With this feature you can control the sound by changing the velocity used to hit the pad 01 In the PROGRAM mode press the F2 FILTER button The FILTER page will be displayed The Filter Envelope window will be displayed This window is also available by selecting any associated filter field and pressing the WINDOW 02 Select the desired pad by hitting it The Pad field displays the pad number of the selected pad 03 Press the F5 FltE
9. zoom WES TRACK E The screen will zoom in or out with the point selected in the St field justified to the left 04 Select the End field and Zoom out or in by pressing the F2 ZOOM and F3 ZOOM buttons respectively The screen will zoom in or out with the point selected in the End field justified to the right 70 HD RECORD Mode E Choosing the Track to View You can select other tracks to view by doing the following 01 Press and hold the F5 TRACK button The screen will change as shown on the right with a popup to select which track to view 02 Select the track you would like to view by scrolling with the DATA wheel Editing Hard Disk Tracks Various edit functions are able to be performed on recorded Hard Disk tracks To select the tracks to be edited do the following E Selecting multiple tracks 01 On the TkVIEW page select the first track to be edited 02 Select the Edit field You can navigate to field by using the CURSOR buttons 03 Place a check in this track s Edit field 04 Repeat steps 1 3 for each track you wish to edit 05 Using the St and End fields select the time range you wish to edit You can edit this field by scrolling with the DATA wheel If you press the left or right CURSOR buttons while holding SHIFT you can move the cursor to higher points within the numeric display to allow for quicker value selection You can also enter the value directly
10. 04 VOCAL 05 HFREQ RHYTHM High Frequency Rhythm Section 06 MFREQ RHYTHM Middle Frequency Rhythm Section 07 LFREQ RHYTHM Low Frequency Rhythm Section 08 PERCUSSION 09 LFREQ PERC Low Frequency Percussion 10 STACCATO 11 LFREQ SLOW Low Frequency Slow Music 12 MUSIC 1 13 MUSIC 2 14 MUSIC 3 15 SOFT PERC Soft Percussion 16 HFREQ ORCH High Frequency Orchestra 17 LFREQ ORCH Low Frequency Orchestra 18 SLOW ORCH Slow Orchestra Adjust You can use this to tweak the selected preset If your selected preset is close to what you re looking for but still needs a little fine tuning try a few different settings here until you get the best result A value will help improve high frequency and percussive sounds while a value will help improve bass sound Most of the time this can be left at zero 07 Press F5 DO IT It may take some time to process depending on the length of the sample The Keep or Retry window will be displayed after executing the timestretch New Sample field Set the name for the new sample F2 PLAY KEEP Keers as new zamrle ODER lH Overurites original Auditions the new sample F3 OVER W Deletes the original sample and keep the new sample by pressing this button The sample name remains F4 RETRY This will return to the Sample Edit window without keeping the new sample F5 KEEP Allows you to save the new sample You can also name the sample
11. M 57 FAF DELETE BOUNO ie eth E TE ONEAN E EVENE aa de EN EOE 57 ESMPLA BUS EIA E AAEN 57 Copying and Pasting an EVenLE is ino On OXDRGI NGEREROER BORGO na MOVING al EVO dins Deleting an evebhlbusssseesewzaug xsara FE wa ars RR RR RE RR S E RERO AAA avs VUE R Entering an eVellbssecebs Oni ber NE EDU a MEE doi uiid 58 Detailed Setting for Grid Edit Recording eeeeeee eere eee eee ee ee eee eee NH Auto step increment field 6 nte ta teet Retro a tte tee 59 EH CD talion or recorded notes Helga ceu e SEA A it 59 Real time FTecordiltig usi Cans vis EVER VE EENEOR REVENUE RC VECEUFEKVRERDUE VIE EUER VERO CTVEMES EF CVM RDEKMVE KLEVE VEM EE m Duck Lock sami ld lite Fea A V RCRUM RR Ee ad 59 Controller View and editing individual events ss s2 5 Chapter 7 SONG er Structure of A SONG sms SELLOS iii EE oui a RAE REA UE Tn EE TT 61 N Song fiel e eo dan ULM MU MM MI DU MM I IC ET 61 NH SIE DS AM MEI Lu KI D ALIM AMI UE 61 m Seo oT m 62 W Sequence Meldcncinas ctas distent bed atn thoai tox d ors ARA da EAA tota d ab ta Ed 62 ES o sd opere c SETTE tabs 62 Ml Ecrire T 62 EO cel EL Ca AO RT Ro 5 PERENNE PPAR TTE PERS 62 Creating a SONG cssc Ern E ERR EREREKSE UU UO ORG DOC GC CO C c c Ru c CR rw Rr UH E Deleting SCS pe EE m M MR 62 W Inserte a AAA A O A MEL ott dia cop tans A a
12. When you are playing the internal sound module with the pads you can start recording just by selecting the desired program in the Program field in the MAIN page However the MPC5000 can be used as a MIDI sequencer By connecting an external MIDI keyboard to it you can record the data from the keyboard and control the external sound module About MIDI MIDI is a standard for transferring the performance data between electronic instruments regardless of the manufacturer Devices are connected using a special cable called MIDI cable For example when you connect the keyboard s MIDI OUT to MIDI IN of the MIDI sound module the performance data you made with your keyboard will be sent to the MIDI sound module which plays the sound MIDI can transfer only the performance data not the actual sound To transfer as much data as possible through one MIDI cable there are MIDI channels By using a MIDI channel you can transfer different performance data to each channel separately You can transfer the performance data to up to 16 channels The MIDI channel is very important when you handle MIDI You must set the same MIDI channels for both the keyboard and the sound module even if you play the sound from the keyboard For example if the keyboard s output channel is set to 1 the sound module s input channel should also be 1 Some sound modules can receive several channels In that case you can assign a separate instrument Piano Bass Strings etc
13. response will gradually slope to its maximum setting and a hard knee response will respond much quicker Output This sets the volume of the output signal Compressor Type Vintage This compressor has a sound similar to the classic tube compressors complete with gentle yet pumping curves and slight tube saturation WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected This sets how much compression will affect the volume of the incoming signal For instance with a ratio of 4 1 the incoming signal would have to increase by four decibels in order to increase 1 decibel at the output This sets whether the compression effect will be hard or soft A soft knee response will gradually slope to its maximum setting and a hard knee response will respond much quicker Output This sets the volume of the output signal Compressor Master This is the most transparent compressor able to perform substantial volume adjustments without artifacts WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effects Attack Sets how soon the compressor will start functioning after the threshold has been reached Rels Sets how soon the compressor will stop functioning after the signal drops below threshold Sets the level at which the compressor will start functioning Ratio This sets how much compression will affect the v
14. Default Q LINK Mode In Q LINK Mode the Q LINK Controllers always work as PROGRAM Q LINKs or FX Q LINKs depending on which page is selected When outside of Q LINK mode you can determine which type of Q LINKS are used by default To set the default Q LINK Mode do the following Default G Link Maocde im ED 09 In Q LINK mode press F3 SETUP 10 Set the Default Q LINK Mode to the desired setting PROGRAM Outside of Q LINK mode a Q LINK will control the corresponding Program Q LINK EFFECT Outside of Q LINK mode a Q LINK will control the corresponding EFFECT Q LINK E Bypassing Default Q LINK The Default Q LINK Mode can be bypassed temporarily by moving a Q LINK Controller while holding the SHIFT key Chapter 18 Using the MPC5000 with External Devices In this section you will learn how to sync the MPC5000 to the other MIDI devices using MIDI clock and MIDI Time Code You will also learn how to hook up a MIDI keyboard to your MPC MIDI Clock MIDI clock is a function of the MIDI standard and allows several MIDI devices to synchronize If your MIDI device supports MIDI clock you can use the device and the MPC5000 in sync If you are not sure if your MIDI device supports MIDI clock or not refer to the device s operation manual E MIDI Sync with the MPC5000 as the master When you play the MPC5000 s sequence the connected MIDI device will follow MIDI clock data will be sent from the MPC5000 to the connected
15. If needed you can download a free un zipping utility for the PC called WinRar at http download com Macintosh Users Macintosh users of OS 10 3 or later can simply double click the file to un zip it Macintosh users of earlier operating systems can download a free unzipping utility called Stuffit Expander at http www stuffit com mac expander trial html Once un zipped you ll have a bin file which needs to copied to a Compact Flash Card The file will be called MPC5000 OS bin Insert a Compact Flash Card into the MPC5000 Power up the MPC5000 Press the MODE button then press DISK Pad 3 Press USB F4 Connect a USB cable from the USB Port on the rear of the MPC5000 to a USB port on your computer The MPC5000 display will change from USB TRANSFER MODE Disconnected to Connected 199 Windows 98 2000 and XP Users The Compact Flash Card will appear as a removable disk in My Computer Windows Vista Users The Compact Flash Card will appear as a removable disk in Computer Macintosh Users The Compact Flash Card will appear as a removable disk on your Desktop 11 Copy or drag the MPC5000_OS bin file to the Compact Flash Card It must be copied to the root directory on the Compact Flash Card i e the top most directory not inside of a folder Windows 98 2000 and XP Users Once the MPC5000_OS bin file has been copied to the Compact Flash Card Safely Remove the MPC5000 s Compact Flash Card drive from the computer
16. Note Make sure that you do Step 11 Remove the device before disconnecting the USB cable Note You can transfer the data between the MPC5000 and the PC only when the USB page is displayed You can not move to another page or mode from USB page unless you disconnect the USB cable E Connecting the MPC5000 to the Macintosh 01 Insert the memory card in the card slot of the MPC5000 USE TRANSFER MODE Disconnected 02 Press the MODE button and PAD 3 DISK To enable this mode connect a The DISK MODE will be displayed ee ee eee ye a 03 Press the F4 USB key l l l To exit this mode dismount the This brings up the USB page which you use to connect the MPC5000 to the Mac MFCSAHG drives from sour caomruter Mac users Then unrlus USB cables 04 Connect the MPC5000 s USB slave jack to your computer s USB host jack via USB cable LOAD MOUNT 05 Removal media will be displayed on the desktop 192 Connecting the MPC5000 to Your Computer AAA A o t e ELA EL E A IEE Sr To save the data in the computer select the data and drag and drop it from the removable disk to the Hard Disk To load the data from the computer select the data and drag and drop it from the Hard Disk to the removal media 06 After you finish the data transfer select
17. PRESSED Mute Stor of One Shot THROUGH ADAT Chan 1 2 Program Audition Hote OTHER aa eth MAIN OUT L amp R C 36 em E Mute Stop of One Shot Samples The behavior of one shot samples is selectable To choose whether or not one shot samples play after stop is pressed or the track is muted do the following 01 Press MODE and PAD 9 to enter the OTHER page Master Level 1zdB Sus Pedal to Duration HO Truncate Duration TO SER LENGTH Record Pad Aftertouch HO Tar Average Z ALWAYS Flash Temra LED Hute Stor af ne 5Shot Biainili ADAT Chan 1 2 Program Audition Hote OTHER Waning gsn MAIN OUT L amp R C 3 5607 195 02 Select the MUTE STOP OF ONE SHOT SAMPLES field and select the desired Behavior THROUGH One shot samples are always played until sample end IMMEDIATE One shot samples are stopped immediately when pressing stop or muting the pad E Setting the ADAT Digital Output Normally the ADAT output follows the chart below Master Leuel Sus Pedal to Duration Truncate Duration TO SER LENGTH Record Pad Aftertouch HO ADAT Channel Output Tar Average 2 one eet Flash Temro LED ALWAYS 5 STEREO OUT R ido digniss THROUGH 3 MIX OUT 3 Prosram Audition Hote 4 MIX OUT 4 OTHEF asi 5 MIX OUT 5 6 MIX OUT 6 7 MIX OUT 7 8 MIX OUT 8 However by setting the value of parameter ADAT Chan 1 2 to ASSIGN OUT 1 amp 2 this will allow all eight of the assignable mix out
18. Parameter Displays which parameter is to be edited with the selected Q LINK Tune 02 Select one of the Q LINK controls When you move a Q LINK controller that controller will be highlighted You can also d IS nime iiir oo gies 311 o uiIRR AO 03 Press the WINDOW button Y Program Prosram 661 m H Links B1 Slider This will open the Q LINK EDIT window as shown on the right 04 Select the Assign field and select the pad you wish to assign the aldo N samples selected Q LINK to E You can select the pad you wish to edit by hitting the desired pad or scrolling with the P Parameter ME Ctrl OFF DATA wheel The effect of the slider or knob will be applied to the selected pad If Range 12H gt 126 you do not wish to use the Q LINK function for any pad select OFF by turning the CLOSE DATA wheel rrr tty 05 In the Change field select the condition for changing the parameter 180 Program and FX Q LINK Controllers NOTE ON The setting value of the Q LINK slider knob at hitting the pad affects to the sound If you change the Q LINK slider knob while the sound is playing back the sound will not be changed The information of the slider or knob position will be sent to the sampler section as Note Variation data The Note Variation data is included in the Pad Event and converts the specific parameter value to slider or knob position data For example when you select TUNE as a parameter by moving the slider you can affect the s
19. The MPC5000 s front panel has several noteworthy features 39 MEMORY CARD SLOT The MPC5000 s MEMORY CARD SLOT accepts Type I and Type II Compact Flash memory cards These cards are used to store your audio and song data 40 DVD ROM drive Optional Here you can install an optional CD RW DVD ROM drive Model CDM 25 Using this DVD drive you can load WAV AIFF or SND samples from CD sample from CDs create data backups of your work and record Redbook audio CDs to be played on any CD player 41 FOOTSWITCH Jacks 2 This is where you connect a momentary footswitch You can use a footswitch for several functions including punching in or out starting and stopping the sequencer or even playing selected pads For more information see Using the Footswitches on page 195 There are two types of footswitches normal open the contact is open when it is not pressed and normal closed the contact is closed when it is not pressed When the MPC5000 is powered on it automatically detects the type of foot switch connected so you can use either type of foot switch 42 PHONES Input Connect your stereo headphones to this jack This jack mirrors the signal from the STEREO OUT jacks The volume of the headphones is controlled by the MAIN VOLUME knob E Rear Panel All of the MPC5000 s inputs and outputs can be found on the rear of the unit They are as follows E i A Pop q E HE A A
20. Track will play as normal M Track is muted Additionally if this field is scrolled while the SHIFT button is held down the following is available S Track is soloed E Using Q LINK Controls with MIXER Mode In addition to the DATA wheel the Q LINK controls can be used to change settings within TRKMIX mode When track 1 4 is selected the four Q LINK knobs and sliders will control tracks 1 4 When track 5 8 is selected the four Q LINK knobs and sliders will control tracks 5 8 The selected tracks are indicated with a bold line The function of each Q LINK control is detailed in the section entitled Using Q LINK Controls with MIXER Mode on page 91 76 HD RECORD Mode Mixer Automation The MPC5000 can record information such as Level and Pan changes and Track Mute events so that they will automate during sequence play back 01 In the HD RECORD mode press the F3 TRKMIX button nA 02 Press the WINDOW button to open the HD MIXER SETUP page Record mix changes 03 In the Record Mix Changes field select YES with the DATA wheel In the Record Track Mute Events you can select OFF or ON to record track mute events or not Record Track Mute Events OFF If you set the Record mix changes field to YES and change the LEVEL SEND MUTE or PAN in the TRKMIX page while recording in SONG mode the changed E data will be recorded into the song The song will be played with changing the Level or the Pan as you did
21. to each separate channel About MIDI sequencers A MIDI sequencer is a device that can record and play back MIDI data The MPC5000 can be used as a MIDI sequencer When you connect an external MIDI keyboard to use the MPC5000 as a MIDI sequencer connect the keyboard s MIDI OUT to MPC5000 s MIDI IN and the MPC5000 s MIDI OUT to the external MIDI sound module s MIDI IN Thus you can record the keyboard performance to the MPC5000 and play sounds from the MIDI sound module In this section you will learn how to record the performance data from the external MIDI keyboard to the MPC5000 and play sounds from the external sound module 01 Connect the external MIDI devices as described in the Using the MPC5000 with External Devices section on Page 185 Connect the MIDI OUT of the keyboard to the MPC5000 s MIDI IN and the MPC5000 s MIDI OUT to MIDI IN of the external sound module Note You may still want to connect the MPC5000 stereo out to a mixer so that you can hear a metronome sound even when you use the MPC5000 as a MIDI sequencer 02 In the Type field select MIDI 03 In the Program field select OFF or No If you select it to the OFF or No the MPC5000 does not play internal programs If you select it to the No and set MIDI Program number MPC5000 transmit the MIDI Program number to the external sound module for selecting the sound in it when the sequence is selected 04 In the MIDI field select a MIDI channel Her
22. verse chorus hook etc of a song together Step 250 Songs are created and arranged in the MPC5000 SONG mode Each song can have up to 250 steps and the MPC5000 can hold 20 songs at one time See SONG Mode on page 61 for more information about this mode Song mode is also where you can record audio tracks directly to the Hard Disk This will be discussed further later on See HD RECORD on page 67 for more information E Sample When you tap the pads on the MPC5000 you trigger various different sounds that we call samples Samples are digitized snippets of audio that can be recorded using the RECORD IN PHONO IN or DIGITAL IN on the rear of the MPC loaded from a memory card CD ROM internal Hard Disk or transferred from a computer via the USB port Once a sample is loaded or recorded into the MPC5000 it can be manipulated in different ways For example a sample can be trimmed down in length looped pitch shifted or processed using one of the various effects found within the MPC When you are finished editing your sample you can assign it to one or more drum pads so that you can play the sample with those pads 15 The MPC5000 supports 16 bit samples at any sample rate audio imported at sample rates higher than 44 1k is automatically downsampled during playback Samples can be either mono or stereo E Drum Pad The MPC5000 has 16 pressure sensitive pads that are used to trigger sounds These pads are arranged in
23. 1 99 The MPC5000 will repeat the sequence the selected number of times HOLD The MPC5000 will repeat the sequence until you press the F4 SUDDEN or the F6 NEXT button If you set the Reps field to 0 the MPC5000 will finish the play back after the previous step It will not play the next step 05 Select the end of song field by pressing the down cursor button and select the sequence that you want played back next Assign the sequences in the desired order by repeating the steps 03 and 04 06 Press PLAY START The assigned sequence will be played in the selected order E Deleting a step To delete a step in the list proceed as follows 01 Select the step that you wish to delete You can select the step by using the up down cursor buttons in the step list 02 Press F5 DELETE The selected step will be deleted and the following steps will be moved forward ll Inserting a step To insert a step in a song proceed as follows 01 In the Step list select a step that you wish to insert a new step into The new step will be inserted before the selected step 02 Press F6 INSERT A new step with the same contents as the select step will be inserted right before the selected step 63 Playing a song You can play the song by pressing PLAY START To play from the middle of the song select the position that you wish to start the playback using the cursor and press PLAY During the playback
24. 100 This field sets the amount the LFO will be sent to the level of the selected pad yielding a tremolo sounding effect The lower this value the less tremolo effect and the larger the value the more tremolo effect Pan field 0 100 This field sets the amount the LFO will be sent to the pan parameter of the selected pad The lower this value the narrower the panning effect the larger this value the wider the panning effect will be 129 E Purge Unused Samples When you use the MPC5000 to record or load several samples you may E BC PORK NUR htt Purse Samrles have unused samples samples not assigned to any pads in the program in the MPC5000 s memory In this case it is time consuming to browse the contents of the program for unused samples and delete them one by Be one MGT ES eie one With the PURGE function you can delete all the unused samples at D SI eane eee notice the same time any Programs in menor 01 In PROGRAM mode press F1 SAMPLE 12 Sameles not used The SAMPLE page will be displayed EDO TT E 02 Press F6 PURGE The Purge Samples window will be displayed 03 Press F5 DO IT All the samples which are not assigned to any program will be deleted at the same time E Sample assignment When assigning samples to pads the sample list will remember the last sample selected rather than starting from the beginning of the list each time 130 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs
25. Aft A this parameter reduce the Program Volume parameter and turn up Aft gt Amp The higher the value the more the mP B modwheel will increase the volume of the program The corresponding Q Link AFTER button toggles whether the effect of this modulation will be positive or negative Aft Vib This parameter selects the degree in which aftertouch will control the Vibrato Level The higher the value the more AFt d Aftertouch will increase the program Vibrato The corresponding Q Link AFTER button toggles whether the effect Mib of this modulation will be positive or negative 2 Other Program Functions Pressing the WINDOW button in the Pgm field brings up the Program window In the Program window you can edit the setting for the selected program E Changing the program name 01 In the Pgm field of the PROGRAM page select a program that you wish to change the name of 02 Press the WINDOW button The Program window will open 03 In the Program name field enter the new name 143 For more information for setting the name see the Setting Names section on Page 20 04 Press F4 CLOSE button It closes the window and goes back to PROGRAM mode E Copying a program You can copy a program to make a new program 01 In the Pgm field in PROGRAM mode select the program that you wish to copy 02 Press the WINDOW The Program window will be displayed 03 Press F5 COPY
26. DIVIDE REGION atinado rodea 115 E COMBINE TRE GOIN anes ceca a edet e titm i oec o A ticos util teh arc R beta Seine 115 E RESTORE TEE leia 115 Setting the loop a ater ela wt daa rk a i fata ia ofa ucc ncc eren M E W Adjusting the loop DOM E SA aa veda eda nana earn ews Ecol va vot essa 116 E Adjistinethe endipomtVris ati ala lla decide idas 116 NH Zooming In Out of the WM ES o 116 E LINEAR and LOGARITHMIC Displays iia das 117 NH Linking the Loop Pol to the Si ds 117 E Auto Phrase LOOPuas tota in AA TEE e AD E routes 117 Popup List for Samples EARE AES E EEE EE ena aaa Le Je E Convert Patched Phrases to Sliced Samples oe A d t ER dei e te eae te T ASS 117 Chapter 13 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs 119 Sample PFOgr ams usssesssseuesessussusessssweFFb EM REEFRENMRERKRN AAN 19 W Creating a Sample PrOgEAITU ia instead Dus sa vec auc pe komm Rd ue 119 N Assenne Samples to 305 tad act teint edt ove cesi ten ues nbd iD state tse cU Deut ducens D ertt 119 E Note ONS ONG O NONIAN e INN UH soit Sin SU tU AS Vou A SU UAM AV ut aan Dora oo Du Uta E e S 120 E Volume and Tuning For a Sample ssec ii ds 120 LINE ooo PR 120 Velocity Cycle Random Sample Switching Zone Play cccccessccccessssscececeesesseeeececsssesseeecessesseeeeecesesesaaeeeeesssesaeeeeeees 121 E Velocity Sample Stc BIHE nuca ir a alos 121 MEO eir nu dore rc A Si las actuate 121 EH Ludo Sample ss wite nie eS 121
27. ERASE button There are two ways to use this feature by deleting in real time during overdub or by selecting a pad and part to delete in the Erase page E Deleting In Real Time 01 Press PLAY START and OVERDUB to start overdub recording 02 Press the pad you wish to delete while holding down the ERASE button While the ERASE button is held pressing a pad will not record the pad but delete any instances of the pad while it is being held down E Deleting From the Erase Screen Performance data will be recorded in a track as an event In the Erase window you can select specific events in a track Se Now GH Be 01 Press the STOP button to stop the sequence o 02 Press the ERASE button Track EH Track 81 03 E the track you wish to delete events from in the Track Time 461 81 886 663 61 668 ield Erase HOTE OHL This field will default to the current track but can be switched to any of the 64 i Jj HMote ALL CHit rad sequence tracks To erase events from ALL Tracks scroll to 00 ALL TRACKS B CLOSE j 04 Select the range of time you would like the selected events from This will default to the entire length of the sequence but you can set this to any range you wish For example to delete only the event in the first bar from 2 bar sequence set 001 01 00 002 01 00 In this case the event at 002 01 00 point will not be deleted If you set the end point 002 01 00 like this the area righ
28. Effect field select the effect set you wish to reset LEE 05 Press F5 DO IT The settings of the effect set selected in the Effect field will be reset to the default settings Pressing the F4 CANCEL button cancels the operation and closes the window Copy Paste Swap Effect Settings You have the ability to Copy Paste and Swap Effect Types and settings This will allow you to copy and paste effects across buses and move effects to different slots easily B F2 COPY This button copies the effect type and all the effect settings into memory 5 Effect Edit to be PASTED or SWAPPED ers 2 Block E WATE ee Ale ae E F3 PASTE EE 2 This button will replace the currently selected effect with the effect that was copied into memory i F5 SWAP This button will exchange the current effect with the effect in memory Pressing SWAP again will toggle between the previous effect and the current effect ll Easy Effect List Navigation You can easily navigate to the beginning or the end of the effect list popup by holding the SHIFT button and pressing the UP or DOWN arrows and pressing a letter using the NUMERIC keypad will jump to the first item alphabetically corresponding to that letter Chapter 16 Saving and Loading DISK Mode Samples or sequences you create in the MPC5000 will be lost when you turn off the unit If you wish to keep the data you need to save it You can use the saved files again by
29. F2 for switching pages and F5 and F6 for activating processing You cannot use F3 and F4 TRIM MEET CHOP EDIT In this manual function buttons are described something like this F1 TRIM button in the bracket F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 it shows the function displayed on the LCD E WINDOW Button The MPC5000 has so many functions that they cannot be displayed in one screen For efficiency each page only displays the most frequently used functions If you want to make an advanced setting press the WINDOW button This opens a window for the detailed setting of the selected field This is not available for all fields When you select a field in which you can use the WINDOW button the LED of the button is lit 20 Basic Operation E MODE Button With the MPC5000 each function such as recording samples editing samples assigning samples to each pad editing sequence data loading from memory cards etc has a separate screen These screens are called modes For example you will use the RECORD mode to record samples and the TRIM mode to edit samples etc By pressing the MODE button and hitting a pad you can switch modes The mode that a pad corresponds to is displayed above each pad Setting Names The MPC5000 handles various types of data from sound data such as samples and programs to performance data such as sequences and tracks This data is managed by naming In this section you wi
30. Note The MIDI clock signal does not have time information If the time settings of the master and the slave are different they will still play in sync but their time position display may be different MIDI Time Code MTC In addition to MIDI clock the MPC5000 can sync to and transmit MIDI Time Code or MTC MIDI Time code is a standard protocol to allow various devices such as Hard Disk recorders video cameras and tape based recorders to sync together MIDI Time Code contains location information in Hours Minutes Seconds Frames but unlike MIDI Clock it does not contain tempo information The following frame rates are supported 24 Frames Typically used in video productions where the finished product will be transferred to film Also used in HD video production 25 Frames Used in PAL format video production 30 Drop 29 97 Frames Used in NTSC video production 30 Non Drop Frames Originally used with music video production this is the most common format for syncing audio devices NOTE since MIDI Time Code is used to sync vastly different devices chase time is often required to ensure that all devices will be accurately locked to the same time For the MPC5000 it is recommended that a song to be synced to MTC contain at least 1 blank measure in the beginning to allow for accurate sync Most Hard Disk recorders recommend 10 seconds of chase time Some tape based video decks require a minimum of 30 seconds For recommended chase times
31. PAD 16 to enter HD RECORD mode 09 In the Song field select the song you wish to import an audio track into If no Hard Disk tracks are added to the current song add audio to this song as detailed in the section entitled Adding Hard Disk Tracks to a Song on page 67 10 Press the F4 TkVIEW button to open the TRACK VIEW tab eem CANCEL 11 Select the track you wish to import the file in to and select the EDIT checkbox 12 Press F6 EDIT to open the AUDIO EDIT page as shown on the right 13 In the Edit field select Import Track 14 In the Destination field select the track to import your track to 73 15 Press F5 DO IT This will open the following window Here you can select the track you wish to load P adie Import Track 16 Choose the drive and directory for the file to be imported You can navigate to different folders using the up and down CURSOR buttons and open and close folders by pressing the left or right CURSOR buttons For more on loading files and browsing drives see Saving and Loading DISK A Hard Drive Mode on page 165 l OCD Drive 17 Press F5 DO IT to import the selected file This will import the selected file into the selected track E Exporting To Export an audio track as either a 16 or 24 bit wave file to the Hard ioi rif cuai erigida ae Disk do the following in dia Edit eds 01 Press MODE PAD 16 to enter HD RECORD mode 02
32. The MIDI SYNC page will be displayed 03 Press F2 SYNC to select the Sync tab 04 Set the Sync in parameter to 1 Slave 05 Set the Receive MMC parameter to ON 06 Configure the master device to send MMC as per the instructions in the device s manual 07 Press Play on the master device The MPC5000 will start along with the Master device 188 Using the MPC5000 with External Devices Connecting the MPC5000 to a MIDI Keyboard with Built in Sounds In this section you will learn how to connect the MPC5000 to a MIDI keyboard which has internal sounds to use the MPC5000 s sequencer feature Normally The MIDI keyboard with internal sounds is set to generate sounds when you play the keyboard However the MPC5000 sends out any incoming MIDI signals to the MIDI keyboard at the MIDI output So if you play the keyboard the performance will be played in duplicate To use the MPC5000 as a sequencer you need to change the setting on the MIDI keyboard so that the MPC5000 not the MIDI keyboard plays the keyboard s internal sound module Normally this could be done by changing the setting called local control By setting the MIDI keyboard s local control to OFF you can use the external keyboard and its internal sound module separately In this case the MIDI signal flows as in the figure in the right The performance data from the MIDI keyboard will be entered to the MPC5000 It will not be sent to the internal sound
33. This field is a two part field that sets the high and low key ranges in which the selected Keygroup will play Tip While in these fields you can select the key range by pressing a note on a MIDI Keyboard B Adding Keygroups to a Keygroup Program When creating a new Keygroup program a new program is created with one Keygroup by default but you can more keygroups Up to 128 IL samrle keygroups can be added Each Keygroup can contain up to four samples geb 2amrie To change the number of keygroups in your program do the following idi samele 01 In PROGRAM Mode select the Total Keygroups field 164 KaTune 488 88 KaFan C 0 Bj Sil12r25 Mute 02 Using the DATA wheel scroll to select a new number TO The PROGRAM KEYGROUPS Window will be displayed Here you can add or subtract keygroups from your Program Current Keyarours 128 Hew Keuaroursz 03 Using the DATA wheel Select the desired number of keygroups Pressing DO IT will 04 press F5 DO IT to apply the setting E remove keyarours from the end af the Prosram CLOSE 131 05 To select different keygroups select the number field to the left of the sample list as indicated on the right and scroll with the amp DATA wheel B you can also select MULTI to allow for editing all keygroups at once Tip you can also select keygroups two convenient ways Select a Keygroup directly by pressing and holding the SHIFT button
34. You can record only from the devices whose sampling rates are set to either 44 1 kHz ex CD player or 48 kHz ex DAT The MPC5000 does not support the other sampling rates E Preparing the recording 01 Connect the external device to the DIGITAL IN which is located on the MPC5000 s rear panel 02 Press the MODE button and then PAD 4 REC SAMPLE to display the SAMPLE page 03 Select the Input field and select DIGITAL 04 Select the Mode field and select STEREO or MONO 05 Play the source Check the level meter on screen 06 Select the Threshold field and set the threshold level to trigger the recording 07 Select the Time field and set the recording time For the next steps proceed as described in the Starting the recording section on page 96 Recording the MAIN OUT In this section you will learn how to record the same signal from the STEREO OUT of the MPC5000 With this feature you can add the effects to the recorded sample and resample it or you can record the phrase that you created with the sequence feature as one sample E Preparation For Recording 01 Prepare the system so that you can play the desired sound by hitting the pads or playing back the sequence The sound that the MPC5000 will actually record is exactly the same as the sound from the STEREO OUT Before going back to SAMPLE mode set the program and sequence so that the desired sound will be output from the STEREO OUT 02 Press the
35. and is useful for tightening up drum loops or long samples set to NOTE ON AS PLAYED The MPC5000 records your performance as it is played This is useful for when it s desirable to have a note play for a long time as a sequence loops Track Features ll Setting the Track Type You can set the track type in the Type field in the MAIN page There are two types of track DRUM and MIDI Below are the differences of each track type DRUM Select this track type when you play the MPC5000 s internal sampler by hitting pads The DRUM track data will be managed per pad MIDI Select this track type when you use the MPC5000 as a MIDI sequencer with external MIDI devices MIDI keyboard etc The MIDI track data is managed per MIDI note event For more information see MIDI Sequencer Features section on Page 38 E Selecting a Program Playing Internal Programs Tyre DRUM In the Program field select the internal program loaded in the internal memory by turning the DATA wheel You can play the selected program by hitting the pads If you select OFF or No the MPC5000 does not play the internal programs samples 34 The Sequencer Playing an External Sound Module In the Program field select OFF or select a program number to play by choosing the Program Number field Displayed as No and select the desired program number The MPC5000 will not play an internal program but instead will trigger an exter
36. and then slowing again as it nears the end Pasting Tracks Cut and Copy allows you to duplicate a selected portion of your track You can then paste this portion elsewhere in your song using the Paste process When using the cut function the selection copied is deleted When Copy is selected the original is left intact AAZ A1 AAG l vd NN 664 61 688 To copy a section of audio into another track do the following AUDIO AUTOMATION 01 Select the track you wish to copy by checking the Edit field 02 Select the entire range of the track Scroll with the DATA wheel on the End field to select the entire track 03 Press F6 EDIT meu uc d o ae IE a This will open the AUDIO EDIT page 04 In the Edit field select Copy Track 1 2 Edit 05 Press F5 DO IT to copy the audio selection Start 601 01 5040 This will return you to the TKVIEW page 06 Select the track you wish to paste the copied data into POR Tes 07 Press F6 EDIT Note that the Edit field defaulted to Paste If paste is not selected in Edit then select it now 08 Choose how you would like your track pasted with the Paste Type 09 In the Number of copies field select the number of consecutive copies you would like to paste 10 Press F5 DO IT to execute the paste The audio data you copied will now be pasted into place 72 HD RECORD Mode i m LI LI Sri M B Normalize euis oue rum To T Normalize is
37. button For more on the Arpeggiator see page 145 PAD 11 EFFECTS PAD 12 SEQ EDIT o s PROGRAM PAD 8 MIDI SYNC a L MM 13 D PAD 4 REC SAMPLE 17 E EFFECTS Mode MODE Pad 11 This is where different digital effects such as reverb delay and flange can be applied to different pads etc Also master effects such as parametric EQs and compression can be applied to the Master output E SEQ EDIT Mode MODE Pad 12 This is where sequences can be edited and transposed as well as other types of editing E STEP EDIT Mode MODE Pad 13 Here the sequence can be edited with greater precision editing the parameters of individual notes and events NW GRID EDIT Mode MODE Pad 14 GRID EDIT mode allows you to edit the individual note and pad events on a track in a graphical interface This mode is ideal for fine editing of different tracks in a sequence visually E SONG Mode MODE Pad 15 Here is where individual sequences can be organized into a single song ill HD RECORD Mode MODET Pad 16 This brings you into HARD DISK RECORDING MODE Here performances such as vocals guitar or other live instruments can be recorded directly in to and played from the internal hard drive alongside the current song E SYNTH Programs SYNTH Pressing the SYNTH butt
38. envelope affects the overall volume of the program sese d Attack EAS 5 This parameter determines how long an envelope will take to reach maximum level when a pad is struck Sounds ranging from a slow swelling violin to drum like attacks are possible by adjusting this parameter This field also appears on the Basic page See page 135 for more information Decay This parameter determines how long the sound will take to go from the attack phase to the sustain portion of the envelope This field also appears on the Basic page See page 135 for more information Sust This determines how long a sound will sustain after the decay portion of the envelope finishes See page 135 for more information Rel Sets how long a sound will decay when the pad is released This field also appears on the Basic page See page 135 for more information E LFOs This page is where the parameters for the LFOs can be edited The A E MPC5000 has two LFOs One is dedicated to vibrato The other LFO is sine A lFetrisO Tri El Retriat used for different modulations To enter the LFOs page do the RUNE following UTE Mar OFF O Fade in OFF O Fade in 01 From the MAIN screen select a track that uses a synth program B B You can also create a new synth program as detailed in the previous section ro H 02 Press MODE and PAD 6 PROGRAM ANA MASTER This will bring you into PROGRAM mode where you can edit different parameters of your program Note
39. field has two fields to set the upper and the lower limits You can set the lower limit in the left field and the upper limit in the right field Here set the upper limit the right field to 63 07 Select the Range field in the same row with the 2 field and set the velocity range to trigger the sample assigned to the field In this example set the lower limit the left field to 64 08 Check the result by hitting the pad If you hit the pad hard the MPC5000 will play the sample assigned to the 2 field If you hit the pad softly the MPC5000 will play the sample assigned to the 1 field Tip How hard a pad is hit is measured in 128 steps 0 to 127 The maximum level is 127 This is the same as MIDI velocity which indicates the pressure used to play the keyboard Tip You can also use the Q LINK slider to switch layers For more information see Program and FX Q LINK Controllers on page 179 E Cycle Switching Cycle Switching will play a new sample zone each time the pad is played in numerical order In other words the samples will cycle through as follows 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 etc To enable Cycle Switching do the following 01 From PROGRAM Mode select any sample on the pad you wish to assign Cycle Switching 02 Press WINDOW 03 Set the Zone Play field to CYCLE E Random Sample Switching Random sample switching will allow all the samples assigned to the pads to be selected randomly This way every t
40. press the F4 CLOSE key and close the window Fy EU pei ee SER To send the Exclusive data to your device press the F5 SEND button 50 STEP EDIT Mode E Effect Select Event This event is used to switch the effect sets within the sequence ll Tempo Change Event Tempo change event is used to change the tempo within the sequence ae ere MN 662 081 006 BPM TG d i26 6 gt 54 4 The tempo change event is different from other events It does not belong to a specific track By selecting TEMPO in the View field you can display the tempo change event information separately regardless of the selected track Even when you have selected ALL EVENTS in the View field the tempo change event will not be displayed in the event list O o field You can set the amount of the tempo change Current New Tempo d 128 B 84 8 Setting the field will display the new destination tempo D 120 0 shows the original tempo set in the tempo filed of the sequence gt xxx x will show the new tempo based on the changed percentage For instance setting BPM to 70 00 will make the new tempo 84 0 when the current tempo was set to 120 0 E Real Time Event F HHic 3 7 CUTOFF H This is the real time event assigned on Q LINK sliders and knobs Pad Field You can set the pad number in this field Event Field You can set the event variation in this field The events described here are specific events to the
41. section on page 151 Like FX 1 you can use the effects of the FX 2 4 by setting the FX column to the desired buss and adjusting the Send Level in the SEND column E Buss Effects vs Insert Effects Buss Out Some effects such as reverbs and delays are best used as a buss effect controlling the amount of signal individual sounds are sent This allows for different sources to use the same effect with different send levels Dry Signal Direct Out See the signal flow diagram on the right for an example of a buss o effect Send Level Some effects work best when 100 of the signal is sent to the effect without mixing any dry signal These are called Insert effects and they include compressors limiters filters Autopan effects and Dry Signal x Buss Out parametric EQs See the signal flow diagram on the right for an example of an insert effect E Setting an Effect as an Insert Here we will show how to set an effect buss as an insert In this Effect Set a2 Effectaz example we will set an Autopan to FX2 01 Press the MODE and PAD 11 EFFECTS then Press the F1 BUS1 2 button FXIDFXZ OFF Direct ON 02 Select the first effect block of FX2 03 Press the WINDOW button or turn the DATA wheel CPU 24 Direct EUS 1 2 ee M COMP PHSSI GBOZMIE This will display the EFFECT EDIT window 04 In the FX 2 Block 1 field scroll with the DATA wheel to choose AUTOPAN and press F5 SELECT T
42. the root note can be set or the keygroup can automatically be set to look to the sample for its root note if the original 1 KesGrour Fh da note data was stored in the sample you are mapping m KeyTrk lipno di EA To change a sample s root note setting do the following Ss ho cP lei El 21 no samples Ed 01 Select the TUNE Field on the PROGRAM Page TE EERE E A 02 Press the WINDOW key U Pitch 0 00 The PITCH FUNCTION Window will be displayed CLOSE 03 In the Root Column set the root note of the sample Any note can be set here or select AS SAMPLE to use the samples default pitch You can also set the root note by hitting a key on a MIDI keyboard 132 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs E Keytracking Samples can be individually set to ignore their keygrouping and play in the pitch of their Root across the entire keygroup range This is helpful for percussive sounds or for particular effects To turn off keytracking for individual samples do the following 01 Select the TUNE Field on the PROGRAM Page 02 Press the WINDOW key The PITCH FUNCTION Window will be displayed 03 In the KeyTrk Column remove the check mark for each sample you wish to turn Keytracking off E Keygroup Tune and Transpose Entire Keygroup type programs can be transposed and Tuned as a whole Tuning and Transpose can have different affect on the sound depending on the source material When pressing a key and adjusting t
43. the slower the sound will start by velocity If you set this field to O the attack time is constant regardless of the velocity V Start field You can control the sample s start point by velocity The larger you set the value the bigger delay the sample start point will be by velocity If you set this field to O the sample start point is constant regardless of the velocity V gt Level field You can control the sample s volume by velocity The larger you set the value the bigger the difference of the level will be If you set this field to 0 the sample will be played back at the maximum level regardless of the velocity Filter Envelope 01 In the FILTER page of PROGRAM mode select the pad you wish to filter by hitting it 02 Press the F5 FltEnv button The Filter Envelope window will be displayed This window is also available by selecting any associated filter field and pressing the WINDOW button Pad field The selected pad will be displayed Amount Amount field Cre Ss Attack You can set the depth of the filter envelope If you set this Dacau SG field to a value the cut off frequency will start higher than the original cut off frequency and will follow the envelope level If you set this field to a value the cut off frequency will start lower than the original cut off frequency and go Sus Lul 5H Sus Dec 1a Release 9 back to the original frequency within the time set in t
44. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Timing Correct all values Click Metronome all values Step Edit Options Auto Step Increment Record Note Duration Active track receive channel Soft thru Sequence Change by Program Change Record Aftertouch Tap average Flash Tempo LED Mute Stop of One Shot Samples ADAT Channel Footswitches Pad to Internal Sounds Pad Sensitivity and Curve Sync in Autoload Sync out Mute Options Record Play Instant Master level Mixer Automation Record Options Sustain pedal to duration Record Sample Options Truncate duration E How to Upgrade the MPC5000 Download and Copy the OS bin file to a Compact Flash Card Go to http www akaipro com mpc5000 Click on Docs amp Downloads Click on the link titled MPC5000 Firmware Update v1 01 On the next page click the link titled MPC5000 Firmware Update Once downloaded to your computer uncompress the file titled mpc5000 os zip represents the latest OS version The file you ll download is a zip file that needs to be uncompressed or un zipped Many computers come with a utility pre installed to un zip zip files Simply double clicking on the zip file will often open the utility and allow you to uncompress the file Windows Users If double clicking the file does not automatically uncompress it try right clicking the file and selecting Explore or Extract These options should allow you to access the contents of the file
45. 1 to match the frequency of VCO 2 by locking their waves phase when the waves begin their rise and fall during their periodic cycles When two sound Sunc O waves have their phases synchronized their cycles begin at exactly the same instant and stay locked throughout the cycle As the oscillators are tuned to wider intervals a new set of harmonics are created resulting from two fundamental waves with significantly different frequencies being locked in phase the waveforms start their cycles at the same time This can result in harsh distorted waveforms perfect for aggressive dance type synth leads basses and effects VcoLvI This field controls the volume of the selected oscillator in each column Wooly Wcolyl Wooly gH in E Tip When VCO2 s level is set to zero the full amount of the oscillator is sent to VCO1 but the output is muted This allows for the VCO2 to be silent but still available for Sync and Ring Mod type sounds RMod This check box turns on the Ring Mod The Ring Mod is another classic analog tone modifier It generates a series of sum and difference overtones from two input signals in this case VCO1 in to VCO2 resulting often in a metallic distorted character that is frequency dependent RMod Ll Vco XMod This parameter controls the amount of oscillator cross modulation that is applied to VCO2 from VCO1 Cross modulation also called FM synthesis is when the output of VCO1 is used to modulate
46. 36T BD 1630 37 Abd S25T 60 167V 34 BD 1161 37 ABSE 425T 80 Sou 36 ABEL S65T 60 so SZ ABFE 4697 BD 1110 74 0i 63 4560 P Haec 3S85T 80 rel dy T C TRACE EDIT DELETE IHSERTI PLAY B Now field The Now field is displayed in the upper left corner on the screen The Now field always displays the current position of a sequence This is the same as the Now field on the MAIN page nDnnnunnununn Is Lc ph m Lol et E Event List The event list is displayed below the Now field and the View field This is where the events of a track are listed their parameters and at what time they each occur This is where the editing of specific events is performed Event Time field Event list B View field The View field allows you to simplify the event list by setting what is to be displayed The event list will only display the events specified in this field This is useful for customizing what s displayed and filtering out unneeded events B Event Time field The Event time field is displayed on the left of the event list It displays the positions of the events within the track ll Event The Event field is displayed to the right of the Event time field The display will differ depending on the type of event You can change the value by moving the cursor to each parameter and adjusting the values with the DATA wheel Numerical values can also be e
47. 4 banks called A B C and D These banks can be quickly selected using the PAD BANK buttons giving you easy access to 64 different sounds Use PROGRAM mode to assign samples to these pads E Sample Program Pad s bank Pad Sample Level Pan Filter A Sample Program is a file that contains a list of all samples to be used and A 01 Side Stick settings for each sample i e pad assignments loop points pitch tuning effects etc The MPC s PROGRAM mode is where you can edit and assign samples The A 03 Closed Hihat MPC5000 can have a total of 128 programs in memory x n i There are two kinds of programs that use samples for their sound source Sample Programs mostly used for creating drum programs and easy and quick assigning of samples to a pad and Keygroups Programs With Keygroup Programs you can use one sample or more and spread it across two or more keys and play the sample chromatically over a keyboard That way there is no need to sample every key of for instance a piano For more information on Keygroups Sample Programs see page 130 ll Synth Programs Synth short for Synthesizer programs are new to the MPC5000 The concept of a Synth is an instrument that is capable of producing a very wide range of sounds electronically Synths have been the basis of popular music since the late 60 s across just about every genre of popular music Browsing and playing through the included Synth Programs will g
48. AFTER button toggles whether a the effect of this modulation will be positive or negative Modwheel events can be received via MIDI from a keyboard or as control changes from a sequencer ModW gt Vib This parameter selects the degree in which the modwheel will control the Vibrato Level The higher the value the Modi more the modwheel will increase the program Vibrato The corresponding Q Link AFTER button toggles whether ib i the effect of this modulation will be positive or negative Modwheel events can be received via MIDI from a z keyboard or as control changes from a sequencer Aft gt Vcol This parameter selects the degree in which Aftertouch will affect the pitch of VCO1 The higher the value the higher AFL gt m the pitch of VCO1 will increase The corresponding Q Link AFTER button toggles whether the effect of this Wool modulation will be positive or negative Ba Note Aftertouch can be received via MIDI controllers or the MPC5000 s pads can also send Aftertouch when playing Synth programs Aft gt Filter This parameter selects the degree in which Aftertouch will control the filter The higher the value the more open the Aft E filter will become The corresponding Q Link AFTER button toggles whether the effect of this modulation will be Filter positive or negative A Aft gt Amp This parameter selects the degree in which Aftertouch will control overall program volume To get the most out of
49. BERGLIN PiBLL T CUT F HLL T CUTOFF pj ly o is d Ti A Track s LOCK Status is indicated by the padlock icon in the upper right corner of the display To lock or unlock a track do the following 01 Select the TRACK LOCK icon 02 Turn the DATA Wheel or press the button to lock the track Press to unlock the track Tat TRACE EDIT IGECETE PLAY The icon will indicate the track status as shown below m Track is unlocked ri E Track is locked 60 GRID EDIT Mode Controller View and editing individual events Individual Q LINK Controllers Pitchbend FX Automation Events and MIDI CCs can be viewed in GRID EDIT Mode in a linear graph view To open Controller View do the following BEL Gz 0A View REAL TIM P HLL Ts TUNE 01 In GRID EDIT Mode select the View field select the type of parameter you wish to view The following events are available PITCH PLAY Displays Pitchbend events on the selected track CONTROL This selection displays the MIDI continuous controllers on the track When this parameter is selected an additional field will be displayed which allows you to choose individual MIDI CC s or to view all CH PRES Displays Channel Pressure on the selected track PY PRES Displays all Poly Pressure events on the selected track REALTIM This field displays realtime Q LINK Events on the selected track When this parameter is selected additional fields will be displayed which
50. CLE CLE mode is easily editable using Q Links Do E Basic Editing of a Synth Program When a new program is created the sound is very basic To adjust the sound to your liking do the following 01 From the MAIN screen select a track that uses a synth program You can also create a new synth program as detailed in the previous section 02 Press MODE and PAD 6 PROGRAM This will bring you into PROGRAM mode where you can edit different parameters of your program 135 Note you can also use the SYNTH button as a shortcut to jump to the last Synth program you edited 03 Press the F1 BASIC button This will display the Basic page Here the most commonly used parameters for a synth program can be edited Each parameter can be selected by using the CURSOR to select each field and turning the DATA wheel or by using the Q Links as detailed in the section Editing with Q LINK Controls on page 134 The label in the lower left corner indicates which component of the synth is to be edited VCO 1 3 Different aspects of the Oscillators can be adjusted here Wave field This selects the waveform for each of the three oscillators The following amp awTri Pulse SawTri shapes are available Sine A very pure and simple tone with very little overtones mellow sounding SawTri This waveform has a shape varying from a triangle wave to a saw wave depending on the setting of the SHAPE control which
51. Duration field Note Variation field Tune pitch Filter Layer Attack time Decay time Pan Resonance Level Release Effect Send x A lt O UU r m d Tip Note variation data which is used for the Q LINK sliders or 16 LEVELS function is the information used to control the sound of a pad and is saved in the track along with the pad event With the note variation data you can switch the sounds of the pad even when you are playing back the same pad Note variation value field In this field displayed to the right of the Note Variation field you can set the note variation value D duration field Here you can set the duration of notes and pad events This parameter determines how long the pad or MIDI note is held The value is displayed in MIDI Ticks V velocity field Here you can set the velocity of a pad Velocity is a measure of how hard the pad was hit The velocity is shown in 127 steps with 127 the maximum This can be used to play sounds softer louder or control the filter cutoff etc For more information on velocity see Note Number Velocity and Length on page 15 ll Note Event This is a MIDI note event Hi Sect 1 D 14 U 12 7 N Note number field You can set the note number in this field A note number indicates the location on a keyboard as a numbers with the middle C of the piano as note number 60 D duration field You can specify how long a note is held lengt
52. E Selecting a Pad s Sample to Edit The MPC5000 can easily jump to a sample from the current program from within TRIM Mode To do so do the following 03 Press and hold the LOCATE button The screen on the right will be displayed 04 Hit the pads You can audition the samples assigned to the current program while holding the LOCATE button 05 When you ve found the sample you wish to edit release the LOCATE button The Sample will be automatically selected in TRIM Mode 106 Sample Editing TRIM Mode B Setting the Root Note of a Sample With a sample selected in TRIM mode pressing the WINDOW button will open the SAMPLE page Here a sample s Root Note can be edited ij Samele Name This Root Note parameter selects at what note the sample will play at 3 true pitch when in a Keygroup Program Tune 68 4 Foot Hote C 36 6H This field can be edited by using the DATA wheel or by pressing a note on your MIDI Keyboard DELETE La 1 OSE Other editing functions E NORMALIZE When you assign a sample recorded at low level its playback level will also be low You can set the levels of pads in the MIXER mode but you have to set some pads to a lower level With the normalize function you can increase the sample level to the highest level possible without being distorted Tips If you do not like the results of your sample edit the edit can be undone by pressing the UNDO button To redo th
53. Effects Busses Be sure to select an Effects Buss which has effects assigned 08 Set the Send Amt field to the desired level This controls how much signal from the Input Thru source is sent to the Effects Buss For a wetter effects signal turn this parameter up 09 Set the Out field to L R You can also route the Input Thru source to one of the 8 individual outputs in stereo pairs or mono Set this to OFF if you want to apply the selected effect as an Insert type effect Chapter 11 Sampling In this chapter you will learn how to record from an analog external device CD player s analog output microphone etc so that you can play that sound by hitting a pad Preparing the recording 01 Connect the external device to RECORD IN which is located on the MPC5000 s rear panel The MPC5000 can accept audio input from its 1 4 inch MIC combo jacks as well the RCA and Digital inputs Any of these connections will work for recording Note Make sure to set the LINE MIC and LINE PHONO switches appropriately for your source Incorrect setting of this switch can produce distortion 02 Press the MODE button and then PAD 4 REC SAMPLE Inrut ANALOG Mode STEREO Monitar OFF When you press the MODE button its LED will blink Pressing PAD 4 with the Threshold BEER Time emeis MODE button s LED on displays the SAMPLE page where you adjust the setting for the recording Level Meter 03 Select
54. LoPass This filter cuts out the high frequencies and passes the low frequencies HiPass This filter cuts out the low frequencies and passes the high frequencies BPass Band Pass Filter This filter passes the selected frequencies and cuts out the other frequencies BStop Band Stop Filter This filter cuts the selected frequencies and passes all other frequencies BBoost Band Boost Filter This filter boosts the selected frequencies and passes all other frequencies Modeli This is an analog style 4 pole filter modeled after a famous vintage semi modular synthesizer This filter will clip distort when fed a loud input level Model2 This is another analog style filter with a mellow resonance and slight fattening distortion in the lower frequencies Model3 This filter is a crazy analog modeling filter capable of howling piercing resonance and jaw rattling sub frequencies Watch your speakers Vocali This filter is a formant filter modeled on the human voice which emulates the ah and oo vowel sounds Vocal2 A 3 band formant filter which emulates the oh and ee vowel sounds Vocal3 A 5 band formant filter based on an idealized model of the vocal tract OFF No filter is used 04 Select the Slope field and adjust the Slope The Slope controls how extreme the effect of the filter will be A one or two pole slope will yield a subtle effect where an eight pole slope will be much more pronounced
55. MIDI device In this case the MPC5000 is called the master and the connected MIDI device the slave 01 Connect the MIDI OUT of the MPC5000 to MIDI IN of the external MIDI device using a MIDI cable The MPC5000 has four MIDI Outs MIDI OUT A MIDI OUT B MIDI OUT C and MIDI OUT D You can connect to any MIDI output but for this example connect to the MIDI OUT B 02 Select the MIDI SYNC mode by pressing the MODE button and hitting the PAD 8 MIDI SYNC 03 Press the F2 SYNC button The SYNC page will be displayed 04 Select the Sync out field and then select the output of the MIDI clock You can send out MIDI clock from any of MIDI OUT A or B or C or D When you select AB MIDI clock is sent from both MIDI OUT A and B In this example since you have connected the external MIDI device to MIDI OUT B in step 1 select MIDI OUT B 05 In the Mode field choose MIDI Clock 06 Press the MAIN button The MAIN page where you play back the sequence will be displayed 07 Set the external MIDI device to receive the MIDI clock 08 With help on setting up your external device please refer to the device s operation manual 09 Press the PLAY START button The MPC5000 starts playback and the external MIDI device should start playback at the same time E MIDI Sync with the MPC5000 as the slave The external MIDI sequencer triggers the MPC5000 When the external MIDI sequencer starts playback the MPC5000 starts playback as
56. MODE button and then PAD 4 REC SAMPLE to display the SAMPLE page 03 Select the Input field and select MAIN OUT 04 Select the Mode field and select STEREO or MONO 05 Select the Time field and set the recording time Note When the MAIN OUT is selected the recording level is decided by the setting of Master level in OTHER mode The initial setting of the Master level is 12dB as the output sound will not distort when many samples are played back simultaneously If you record one sample through MAIN OUT with this setting the recorded sample level is lower than the original sample level In this case if you set the Master level to OdB the recorded sample level is same as the original sample level For the next steps proceed as described in the Starting the recording section on page 96 Recording the internal CD s sound In this section you will learn how to record the CD s sound from the internal CD drive directly to the MPC5000 When the optional internal CD drive is installed E Preparation For Recording 01 Set the audio CD you wish to record on the tray of the internal CD drive 02 Press the MODE button and then PAD 4 REC SAMPLE to display the SAMPLE page B1 lt STEP gt lt lt BAR gt gt STOP PLAY B ml3s B3mz2S 13 tracks RESET PEHK 98 Sampling 03 In the Input field select CD The CD CONTROL page will be displayed instead of LEVEL METER page 04 In the Mode field sel
57. MPC5000 Each note event can have any one of these modifiers set one per note TUNE The pitch of the sample CUTOFF The cutoff frequency of the Filters LAYER This allows you to alter the HIGH and LOW Range at which the Event will be triggered Sample Programs only ATTACK This controls the attack time of the Amp Envelope DECAY This controls the decay time of the Amp Envelope RELEASE This controls the release time of the Amp Envelope PAN The panning position RESON The resonance value of the Filter The resonance value of the Filter LEVEL The volume level of the sample FX SEND This parameter sets the amount signal the selected sample or synth program will be sent to the selected FX Buss Note Both the LEVEL and PAN events share the Q LINK value For more information see Program and FX Q LINK Controllers on page 179 Below are the MIDI events that you use when using the MPC5000 as a MIDI sequencer Note How a MIDI event affects an external sound module depends on the specification of the sound module For more information about the effect of each MIDI event see the operation manual of your sound module 51 1 4 E E Effect Automation Event B Track Mute Event This is the event you will get when you record a Track Mute Event B Pad Mute Event aspig F This is the event you will get when you record a Pad Mute Event Aai 3 MUTE ON Copying Pasting an Event To copy the se
58. Name field turn the DATA wheel NEE nur Ao The Name window will be displayed and you can change the Effect Set name For more information about the operation in the Name window see page 20 04 In the Name window press the F5 ENTER J RESET Loud COPY F It confirms the name and closes the Name window 164 Effects E Copying the effect set 01 Select the Effect field at the top of the BUS1 2 or BUS3 4 page 02 Press the WINDOW button The Effect Set window will be displayed 03 In the Effect Set window press the F5 COPY button The Copy Effect Settings window will be displayed From Bl EFfectHi 04 In the From field select the source effect set To ERPEffectaz 05 In the To field select the destination effect set 06 Press the F5 DO IT button See rem IA CANCEL The Effect Set selected in the From field will be copied to the effect set selected in the To field Pressing the F4 CANCEL button cancels the operation and closes the window E Resetting the effect set You can reset the setting for the Effect Set to the default settings 01 Select the Effect Set field at the top of the BUS1 2 or BUS3 4 page 02 Press the WINDOW button The EFFECT SET window will be displayed Effect Set GEFEffectal 03 In the EFFECT SET window press the F2 RESET button Pressing DO IT will reset this effect set The RESET EFFECT SETTINGS window will be displayed 04 In the
59. Pressing the Footswitch will set the next track as the Active Track PREV TRACK Pressing the Footswitch will set the previous track as the Active Track NEXT SEQUENCE Pressing the Footswitch will select the next sequence to be played at the end of the current sequence PREV SEQUENCE Pressing the Footswitch will select the previous sequence to be played at the end of the current sequence INC Pressing the Footswitch will act as if the button had been pressed DEC Pressing the Footswitch will act as if the button had been pressed 197 E Adjustment of Pad Sensitivity and Velocity Curve Each time you hit a pad the MPC5000 determines how hard you hit the pad and converts this to a MIDI Velocity value This parameter is used to determine the strength weakness of the internal sound during playback as well as other system parameters that the velocity may be mapped to If you find it difficult to achieve a comfortable velocity range for your playing style e g you can not get a velocity of 127 even you hit the Pad very hard or vice versa you get velocity 127 easily even you hit the Pad softly you can adjust the Pad Sensitivity and the velocity curve as desired The Pad sensitivity and the Velocity curve can be adjusted for each Pad separately 01 Press the MODE button and then the PAD 9 OTHER The Other page will be displayed 02 Select the PAD page by pressing F3 PAD 03 Select the Pad you wish to adjust
60. RECORD Mode press the F4 HDVIEW button to open the HD VIEW Page 601 061 006 02 dn the track you wish to edit by placing a check in the EDIT S ERI eee 03 Press F6 EDIT to open the AUDIO EDIT page 04 In the Edit field select either CUT or COPY 05 In the Type field select one of the following AUDIO AUTOMATION Both Audio and Automation will be copied or cut 74 HD RECORD Mode AUDIO ONLY Only audio will be cut copied AUTOMATION ONLY Only Automation will be cut copied Mixing Hard Disk Tracks Output level pan and effects settings can all be set for each Hard Disk track To access the Hard Disk track mixer do the folowing our PRELRELRELFILRILR LRELR How 001 61 000 01 Press MODE PAD 16 HD RECORD to access the HD RECORD mode 02 Press F3 HD MIX to access the HARD DISK TRACK MIX page as shown on the right The Columns shown represent each of the eight Hard Disk tracks Each Track Number will be displayed next to the LEVEL indicator in the LVL row E Setting Track Output To set which out each Hard Disk track will be routed to do the following 01 In HD RECORD mode press F3 HD MIX The HDMIX page will be displayed Each column indicates Hard Disk tracks 1 8 and the currently selected track is highlighted The row at the top is the OUT field where you where you will assign a track to a specific assignable output 02 Hit the pad that corresponds with the desir
61. RR RR RR AR AG GG AR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RR Program with Pads Pad Mute iissxxwsxxu ku Su ARR R HONOR RCR HCR CACHER EE CR KEARDEN m Operationen c 83 E Pad Mute ricardo E EREE EEEN ETE EAEE EATER EEE AEE EEEa 83 Pad Mute QUANUIZA ION iii a Ea a E PADMUTE 0 ds 83 B Changing the Timing Correct for Pad Mute Quantization cccconoooconcncnononnnnnnnnnnnonnnnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnss 84 Selecting a Sequence to Play with Pads ssss2ss2 NW OPEN tinta ita dd dd ad Uc tbc 84 E SUDDEN Butaca tiara 85 E lt HOLCD Button eerren e E A IIS A EAT A ASS 85 Next Sequence for Next BaP iii Chapter 10 MIXER Mode exar Programi MIS m Setin the OM 1010 ca Ot E E Lue orte AA lc 87 NH Seine the Levelland Panofa Dada exc eer out eeaeee aa eA mee un ete d AERA A AEA peu ua Coe CUR ETEEN anaE deed 88 NH Assigning Effects to a Pad is a 88 E Munns Padsre a LL AAA AAA A AS AO al 89 Viewing Program OO ri AAA Track MIO a da NH Settine the Level and Pan Position of a Tracks ait ce EA AE 90 gt Moira race lit ds dt 90 B Using Q LINK Controls with MIXER Modena od o li a ltd 91 VIEWING Track Detal S eicitan EEWEERRRRREERREEKEEEKREREERRREREKEERRE Mixer AUTOMAtI N lt lt aE REAA E gt Shoricut between MIXER and EFFECTS Mode suede e A A EN 92 Take Ov r Mode ici dus skins nnna aa EE InDUt TDEU as exenda rrr A EH Xpplyi peltects to 3n Incoming si
62. Random synthesizers Random Range is useful for fattening up pads leads and all sorts of other synth type sounds Ranse 7 B Pitchbend Fitchbend This parameter sets the Pitchbend range in semitones for use with an external MIDI controller s Pitchbend wheel 2 Up to 12 semitones one octave can be set ModW gt Vcol1 ae y Mach El This parameter selects the degree in which the modwheel will affect the pitch of VCO1 The higher the value the Wool Ge higher the pitch of VCO1 will increase The corresponding Q Link AFTER button toggles whether the effect of this B modulation will be positive or negative Modwheel events can be received via MIDI from a keyboard or as control changes from a sequencer ModW gt Filter This parameter selects the degree in which the modwheel will control the filter The higher the value the more open Modi E the filter will become The corresponding Q Link AFTER button toggles whether the effect of this modulation willbe Filter positive or negative Modwheel events can be received via MIDI from a keyboard or as control changes from a El sequencer ModW gt Amp This parameter selects the degree in which the modwheel will control the program volume The higher the value the Macll E more the modwheel will increase the volume of the program To get the most out of this parameter reduce the Ame Oo Program Volume parameter and turn up ModW gt Amp The corresponding Q Link
63. Square wave producing an almost chainsaw effect WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Controls the intensity of the distortion effect Tone shaper specifically targeting the boost cut of low frequencies Distortion Amp This effect is designed to sound like a tube amplifier at louder volumes producing a wider range distortion than your typical fuzz style distortion WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Controls the intensity of the distortion effect Tone An overall tone shaper to either boost high frequencies and attenuate lows or boost low frequencies and attenuate highs Output Controls the overall output of the distortion Distortion Overdrive This distortion is designed to sound like an amplifier mildly distorting at medium volumes It is the mellowest distortion type available WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Controls the intensity of the distortion effect Tone An overall tone shaper to either boost high frequencies and attenuate lows or boost low frequencies and attenuate highs Output Controls the overall output of the distortion Distortion Custom This effect is a highly customized distortion capable of a wide range of useable sounds WetDry Controls the ratio of un
64. The input thru will be recorded as the mixdown is performed Note The level of the source being played via Input Thru is controlled by the REC GAIN knob Make sure the level is set properly before mixing down 07 Press F5 DO IT The MPC5000 will begin mixing down the track You will be able to monitor the mixdown by listening to either the STEREO OUT or by listening through the PHONES jacks At any time you may cancel the mixdown by pressing the F4 CANCEL button When the mixdown is complete you will be asked for a location to save the mixdown 08 Select the folder and drive to save the mixdown to 09 Press F5 DO IT DO ITA The mixdown will be saved Track Mix Access in HD RECORD Mode When in HD RECORD Mode it is possible to access the Sequence Track Mixer This will allow the mixing of Sequence tracks while recording HD tracks E Selecting Track Mix To access the Track Mixer from HD RECORD Mode and on the HD MIX page press the F5 TrkMIX button 78 HD RECORD Mode E Returning to HD MIX To return to the HD Mixer from the Track Mixer press F3 HD MIX eur EL FL ESLRILRSLESLRSLR How Bel 61 606 Chapter 9 Functions of a Pad The MPC5000 has 16 drum pads The pads perform various function besides making sounds you will learn about various functions of the pad Playing with pads By assigning the sounds in memory to a pad you can play those sounds Below are some use
65. You can also use the SYNTH button as a shortcut to jump to the last Synth program you edited 03 Press the F5 LFOs button This will display the LFOs page Here the various parameters for the Vibrato and the LFO can be edited Each parameter can be selected by using the CURSOR to select each field and then turning the DATA wheel 04 Edit the parameters of the LFOs page as desired The Screen is divided in half The parameters on the left are for Vibrato The parameters on the right are for the LFO wave Sine H Tri Ej This field selects which basic waveform for the LFO and Vibrato 141 Retrig This setting determines if the LFO and Vibrato waveforms will run on their own in the background or be triggered when a key is pressed With Retrig ON notes with extreme pitch fluctuations will always start from the original pitch This is useful for vibrato With Retrig OFF modulations will sound more Natural This is useful for when the LFO is set to a slow rate and you want the change to happen over a long time as you play Retris Ol Retris Lb Sync Selects whether the LFO will sync to MIDI When set to YES the Rate parameter will be hidden and the sync parameter will display different beat synced rates from 8 whole notes to 1 32 notes When set to NO the LFO will run independently from the sequencer Fade in Fade in Fade in Time Time 5 Time g Increasing this parameter from zero will cause the LFO to
66. You can correct the timing of recorded events 01 When a sequence is stopped press the F1 T C button in the MAIN page Timing Correct window will be displayed as above 02 In the Note value field set the value for timing correction For example if you set 1 16 each position of the performance data will be moved to the nearest 1 16 note You can set the Note values as follows 1 4 note 1 8 note 1 16 note 1 4 triplets 1 8 triplets 1 16 triplets 1 32 Note 1 32 triplets 1 64 note 1 64 triplets OFF 03 Press the F5 FIX button Timing Correct window will be displayed 27 04 In the RANGE field select the area to correct the timing 05 In the Note field hit the pad you wish to correct the timing To correct the timing of all events leave it as ALL To correct the timing of only events on a specific pad hit the pad You can select several pads If you hit a different pad by mistake you can cancel the selection by hitting the pad again To restart the pad selection turn the DATA wheel to the left The value in the Note field will be reset to ALL so that you can select pad from the beginning 06 Press F3 DO IT button The timing correction will start and the window will be closed ill Swing You can set the swing value in the Swing field With the swing feature the even numbered events set in the Note value field will be off the rhythm according to the value in the Swing field With this feature yo
67. a process that analyzes your recording and adjusts the Track 1 2 volume to make the loudest part of your audio track equal to O dB i e Edit HORMOLIZE the loudest possible level Start BBG1 81 858 End 47 601 256 Press F5 DO IT to execute this function CANCEL DO IT B Silence This process allows you to silence a section of a track or silence an ixi ui ap moa Edit E entire track Press F5 DO IT to execute this function LE 1 2 Edit EMINEM Start 661 481 806 End 478 81 256 Deleting importing and Exporting Tracks The MPC5000 can import wav files as tracks to be used in your song and export Hard Disk tracks to allow for editing with a computer or even loading the exported track as a sample You can also delete one or more tracks from your song E Deleting To delete an audio track do the following i 01 Press MODE PAD 16 to enter HD RECORD mode Thselitqp ns 02 In the Song field select the song you wish to delete an audio SOT track from 03 Press the F4 TkVIEW button to open the TRACK VIEW tab 04 Select the track you wish to delete and select the EDIT fg mu checkbox CHHCEL 05 Press F6 EDIT to open the AUDIO EDIT page as shown on the right 06 In the Edit field select Delete Track 07 To delete the track press DO IT as Im ortin E wma m nae waa m cm a ee To import an audio track as a Hard Disk track do the following amma Audio Edit 08 Press MODE
68. aea 62 PIAVINO a SONG Meet o E ESO UDDEN AAA E E citar Sears tu dM ort d ccs oleate Soateuantcidasteadseablianetaeds 63 MER es ee eI 63 Other features in SONG MOOG i eii onus vsu aRo a a FIDE CK P aR ERE EERDRNF aa SEUDESR E RESEEEFA EE EEEE m Cha upine tlie Song MAM uou iuda tias an FESERRuII D adi O docu du ad pei papa Een eM A IURE e xps i 63 E PIU Uu EE TU T UU Un 63 E ie eicere Ree eee RENE NC OER esser DM AE Cowra etu use Dav ET TUMOR asi cota rese dcc MTR 63 E Deletine all TS a cet a cal sas a UMS 64 W Setting all sequences to the same tempo ose tesi rn errata nr ese om diodos acia 64 E enorme tempo change events in a SEqUE DIC ooo tede A AREAS A A REE AE Eta au can hoa 64 B Converting asong to aseg n ena asl osa a neta deiude essa BUR veld aa Ls e Macaca tetas Mesa diee PLUMAS 64 ENERO ucc e PM TUR P Seen a 65 Chapter 8 HD RECORD MOGG urea Seen tino toca tiesto ca venu Es vu canat Tes aaa Adding Hard Disk Tracks to a Song inci E Abo tthe RECORD Base eR X NT 67 Recording Hard DISK Tracks 5i exa iac CREDI GRCRER CREER RR ACER ER REC CRCR CRT RC REDDERE R RR AETA RR RR W Recording additional tracks tete dl la PM CU DUM NN LL M ELLE 68 Viewing Recorded TACKS oisevssvesesessvessevsesesesessvesscusuvssesEREREEEREWERREFERRRREEFEREREERFERRERRENRRENEREEFEEE Selecting the VIEW Range usicssscsv eusuePAAEIRPRRANN RDUM EDKPOU E EPI DIRAS DIR EDI POUC PEL P
69. and let the string ring out which fades quickly as soon as you release the note and the damper is applied Synthesizer designers model this behavior using ADSR envelopes ADSR stands for attack decay sustain release and represents the different stages that the sound goes through over the life of the note Since the most important application of the envelope is to control the loudness of the sound the MPC5000 provides one envelope that is specifically designed for this purpose This is the amp envelope The MPC5000 also has an additional envelope to control the filter This allows the Cutoff Frequency of the filter to be controlled independently of the sound s amplitude E Playing a Synth Program Synth programs on the MPC5000 differ from Sample programs in that when you play a synth sound a single sound is played chromatically across the pads This allows you to create synth melodies and bass lines with ease E Auditioning a Synth Program To audition a SYNTH Program select the program in DISK Mode and press F5 PLAY The note played when auditioning programs can be set in OTHER Mode 134 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs ll The Synth Button Pressing the SYNTH allows quick access to the synth program on the current track automatically add the first loaded synth program to the current track or if no synth program is loaded create a new generic synth program for you to work with It s best to think of the SYNTH button as
70. assign it to When you use mute groups set the Play field to POLY E Limiting the Number of Voices in a Program Normally the pad sounds in the program are played polyphonically when you hit the pad several times you hear a new instance of the sound every time But you may wish to play the sound monophonically meaning that each new pad strike will silence the previous strike This is useful in programs such as programs being made by the SLICED SAMPLE function In this case you can set the limit of voice number on the pad in the program 01 In the PROGRAM mode press the F1 SAMPLE button 02 In the Program Play field select either POLY or MONO POLY The MPC5000 overlaps the sound in the program Polyphony MONO The MPC5000 does not overlap the sound in the program Monophony E Setting Voice Overlap Normally when you hit the same pad several times the same sound will be overlapped When you use the MPC5000 as a drum machine you can make the performance sound natural with this feature However when you are using a phrase sample it may be better not to overlap the same sound With the voice overlap function you can set the MPC5000 not to overlap the same pad sound 01 In the PROGRAM mode press the F1 SAMPLE button The Sample page will be displayed 02 Select the desired pad by hitting it 03 In the Voice Overlap field select MONO 128 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs POLY The MPC5000 over
71. be accessed by pressing the MODE button and then the PAD 6 PROGRAM Sample Programs E Creating a Sample Program To create a new sample program proceed as follows Note the MPC5000 comes from the factory with preset sounds loaded on the internal ROM These programs are set to load automatically when the MPC5000 is turned on You can set the MPC5000 to start without loading it s internal ROM by turning off Autoload For more information see the Autoload on page 176 01 Press MODE and PAD 6 PROGRAM This will enter PROGRAM mode SEE LIMA S m2 gizi ino samrle Patni samplet FOL Fam Tune 88 dh Mute Grour OFF Mute Target OFF OFF OFF OFF 02 Select the Pgm field and press WINDOW The Program window will be displayed Fraaram Program Hame COS MIDI Prosram Change ADELETER HEW WNEI 03 Press the F3 NEW button The New Program window will be displayed 04 In the New name field turn the DATA wheel The name window will be displayed Set the name for the new program and press the F5 ENTER button For more information about setting the name see the Setting Names section on page 20 05 In the Type field select Sample This is a program that will contain samples For more information on Synth programs see the section entitled Synth Programs on page 133 06 Press F5 DO IT The new program will be created The new program is empty which means it does not hav
72. be set to the values that you set in the sequence in the first step of the song If the track setting of the sequence in another step is different from those in the first song step the song may not be converted properly To avoid this it is better to make the track settings and the order of each sequence the same For more information on how to change the order of the tracks see the Changing the order of the tracks section on page 30 PUR uL ae Nea pisi E VREWKRE ERN a E NUEVE GO TO Heel B LOCATE Locate is available in SONG Mode as well as MAIN Mode LOCATE 1 603 01 LOCATE 2 l LOCATE 3 618 61 To access Locate in SONG Mode press the LOCATE button LOCATE 4 645 61 LOCATE 5 689 01 Entering a locate point and then pressing F5 GO TO will move you to the selected position in the song CAPTUR CLOSE i rrr FA You can also memorize a locate point Select a point in your sequence and press the GO TO button Select number you want to memorize and press F2 CAPTUR to memorize this point Chapter 8 HD RECORD Mode Another function that is new to MPC line with the MPC5000 is Hard Disk Recording Using the RECORD IN PHONO IN or S PDIF IN jacks on the back of your MPC you can record performances such as vocals live guitar live keyboards just about anything you can imagine to your song Up to eight tracks can be recorded per song Since this audio is recorded directly to the
73. buttons into selected numeric fields and press the ENTER button If you are entering numbers with a decimal value enter the number ignoring the decimal point Example for 120 5 enter 1205 If you make a mistake it is possible to cancel by pressing the SHIFT button If you use the CURSOR buttons DATA wheel or MAIN button while you are entering data with the numeric buttons the input will be canceled and the data returns to its original value Also you will notice that much like a telephone each number also has three or four letters associated with it These are used for naming programs tracks samples etc For more information on naming see page 20 These buttons can also be used in SAMPLE lists FX lists and in DISK Mode to quickly jump to the first item corresponding to the letter pressed DATA Wheel and Buttons This wheel lets you change the value of the currently selected field Turning the wheel clockwise increases values or moves you forward in a list whereas turning the wheel counterclockwise decreases values or moves you backwards in a list Also the and buttons can be used to change the selected value by single increments These are best used for fine adjustments 12 CURSOR Buttons These four buttons let you move your cursor around the LCD screen to select the various parameters available on screen Holding SHIFT while in a list and pressing up or down will bring you to the top or bo
74. create a song by assigning sequences to each step in the list For each step you Step 001 Sequence 03 can assign a sequence and also set the number of times the MPC5000 should Step 002 Sequence 21 repeat the sequence You can create a song in the SONG mode which can be Step 003 Sequence 07 accessed by pressing MODE and PAD 15 Step 250 Screens Now TN Step field Song field Bars field Now GH 01 600 Sons 62 Sonsb2 Ler 9Je uence hers Tempo Bars 1 CBS 88 0 2 07 Verse s 88 0 Step list 3 a8 Chorus 88 0 4 07 Verse 98 Chorus end of sona b KNB DIH L L rper RA SONG lal zs Sequence field Tempo field Reps field E Now field The time display on the upper left corner on the screen is the Now field The Now field always displays the current position of a sequence This is the same as the Now field in the MAIN page E Song field You can set the song number in this field The song name will be displayed to the right of the number If there is an unused song it is displayed as unused E Step list The list that is displayed below the Now field and the Song field is the step list which is used to assign the sequences to each step Pressing the down cursor button when the Now field or the Song field is selected moves the cursor to the step list When there are many steps with different sequences assigned you can scroll thr
75. destination with the source data The data that is already in the destination will be removed MERGE The MPC5000 will merge the source data with the data that is already in the destination In the Start field set the start point of destination time The MPC5000 will start moving the event to the time selected here Press the F6 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start moving the event ll Transpose You can transpose change the key of the note events This operation changes the selected track whether it s a DRUM track or a MIDI track 01 02 03 04 Select the Edit field in the EVENT page of the SEQ EDIT mode Edit MRE Edit and select TRANSPOSE 5941 B1 TorP_ Gun The various fields necessary for the transpose will be displayed ane ees um l ee TEE Aur kin In the Range field and the Pads Notes field select the region 3 that you wish to edit In the Edit Sq field and the Tk field on the right select the sequence and track that you wish to edit Pad Hal When the MIDI track is selected the Amount field is displayed Set the amount of the transpose in the Amount field The unit of the amount is semi tone When the DRUM track is selected the Pad field is displayed You can change the selected pad event to another pad event To do this select the pad event you wish to change in the Pad Notes field and then select the destination Pad in the Pad field Press the F6 DO IT button The MPC50
76. during the recording The mix data recorded in the song is displayed in STEP EDIT page as follows and you can edit it the same as other MIDI event These events are viewed as LEVEL and PAN events in STEP EDIT Mode Note To record Mixer Automation in HD RECORD Mode the current song must have at least one sequence assigned Erasing HD Track Automation It is possible to cut or copy Automation Audio Only or both from a Track armes sri a bem e ndo in HD VIEW To do so do the following E eee ATE DELE E e e E B nm 01 In HD RECORD Mode press the F4 HDVIEW button to open the HD VIEW Page BB1 81 888 02 Select the track you wish to edit by placing a check in the EDIT 603 081 006 box AL TO AUTOMAT ITOH For more information on HD Track editing see page xxx 03 Press F6 EDIT to open the AUDIO EDIT page a l t E 04 In the Edit field select either CUT or COPY 05 In the Type field select one of the following AUDIO AUTOMATION Both Audio and Automation will be copied or cut AUDIO ONLY Only audio will be cut copied AUTOMATION ONLY Only Automation will be cut copied Mixdown The MPC5000 can mix down songs including internal sounds Hard Disk tracks and effects into a single file Using this function a 16 bit 44 1 kHz stereo wav mixdown of the current song can be created ready to burn to CD as your final master or you can bounce the tracks to a two track mix in the current song E
77. holding the SHIFT button the track mute status of only the pressed pad is changed and mute group settings are ignored Pad Mute Quantization E PAD MUTE To turn on Pad Mute Quantization do the following 01 Press the TRACK MUTE Button This will open the TRACK MUTE Page 84 Functions of a Pad 02 Press the F3 PHMUTE button to select the PAD MUTE Tab 03 Press the F5 T C button The F5 button will darken to indicate it is active as shown on the right TEMUTE TEGRP JIAN TEES DN 04 Press a pad you would like to mute The MPC5000 will mute the selected pad on the next division of the T C setting E Changing the Timing Correct for Pad Mute Quantization To change the Timing Correct value while in TRACK or PAD MUTE Mode press the WINDOW Button This is separate from the MAIN Timing Correct and is used exclusively for Pad Track Mute The following divisions are available 2 Bar 1 Bar 1 4 Mute Timina Correct 1 4 3 Hote Value EERE 1 8 1 8 3 1 16 Off CLOSE Selecting a Sequence to Play with Pads You can select a sequence that you wish to play next by hitting the pads Now 88 63 216 S4 86 Sesuernce B5 This is useful for live performances which change a song structure in real i s Sa 13 5a 14 Sa 15 52 16 time Also you can check the relationship between sequences while you are working on a song with several short sequences deb Ed Aou dus Ah m T a Pressing the NEXT S
78. increase in amplitude on a E B curve This allows the LFO effect to fade in like the parameter s name would suggest Rate l Rate Rate These parameters control the speed of the LFO and Vibrato When the Sync parameter 42 45 is set the Rate controls are hidden 1 48 E OFF O Src Sunc Level Vibrato Only Level This parameter controls the amount of vibrato that is applied to the program B il MASTER The global aspects of a synth program are accessed in the Master page Poly O Lesatold Random Pitchbend To access the Master page do the following Trans Th Glide jj Ranse 7 c El Ee E EH z Hodil gt Modw gt E Modi E Maocdlil E 01 From the MAIN screen select a track that uses a synth Ucol O Filtern Ame G uib cy program E E n d You can also create a new synth program as detailed in the previous section Aft g Aft gt p AFt H Micol Filter Ame 02 Press MODE and PAD 6 PROGRAM B B B BHSIC This will bring you into PROGRAM mode where you can edit different parameters of your program Note You can also use the SYNTH button as a shortcut to jump to the last Synth program you edited 03 Press the F6 MASTER button This will display the Master page Here global parameters for a synth program can be edited Each parameter can be selected by using the CURSOR to select each field and turning the DATA wheel j52nth Pros B i 04 Edit the parameters of the Master page as des
79. is better to set the start and loop point to the same value so that you can change both points at the same time 01 In the LOOP page select the start loop link field 02 Turn the DATA wheel and set the field to locked by the key Loop point is set to the value of the start point If you change the loop point later the start point will be changed as well and vice versa If you reset the start loop link field you can set the start point and loop point separately E Auto Phrase Loop You can make a loop automatically match the tempo of the phrase sample 01 In TRIM mode press the F2 LOOP button The LOOP page will be displayed 02 In the Lp field set the loop start point of the phrase sample 03 Press the F5 AUTO L button The Auto Phrase Loop window will be displayed In the Tempo field the tempo of the phrase sample is displayed with calculated by the MPC5000 Set the tempo if you know it In Beat field set the number of beat you wish to loop For example if you want to loop 1 bar of 4 4 set to 4 Note You cannot set the beat number longer than the length of the sample F4 Cancel You can cancel the Auto Phrase Loop by pressing this button 04 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start the Auto Phrase Loop Note Depending upon the sample such as a single snare hit the tempo may not be calculated correctly Popup List for Samples When selecting Samples to edit in TRIM Mode all
80. is located on the VCO page A Triangle wave has a fuller sound than a sine wave but still has very little overtones A Saw wave a harsh aggressive sounding wave with lots of overtones Pulse Ranges from a square wave to varying degrees of pulse widths Generally a more hollow sound approaching nasalness as the wave gets thinner WNoise PNoise RNoise Three different flavors of noise are available White Pink and Red Each has it s own sound white being the most content rich and coldest sounding and red being most warm sounding TPWM PWM stands for Pulse Width Modulation This waveform is special in that it is a Pulse wave whose shape is hard wired to LFO 2 This gives this waveform a range of sounds from a classic warbling tone to a buzzing harsh sound rich with overtones SEMI Adjusts the tuning of each oscillator in semitones Each OSC can be tuned four octaves by semitones Semi i Semi pa Semi E Vco XMod This parameter controls the amount of oscillator cross modulation that is applied to VCO2 from VCO1 Cross modulation also called FM synthesis is when the output of VCO1 is used to modulate the nad frequency of VCO2 From vibrato like pitch variations to harsh clanging metallic noises to bell type a sounds a broad range of sound is possible with cross modulation Filt Various aspects of the filter are edited here Ej E LoFass Ej Enl Filter Select Field Cutoff Res c C
81. load it The CAUTION window will be displayed 03 Press the F5 DO IT button The loading will begin E Loading an Input Thru File If you use SAVE ENTIRE MEMORY to save the internal memory data the Input thru file will be saved with the Project file The Input Thru file contains the settings of Input Thru in the MPC5000 When you load the Project file the Input Thru file will be loaded automatically with the Project file You can also load only the Input Thru IPT file file in the Load page 175 Burning CDs B Audio CDs Adding the optional DVD CDR W drive CD M25 to the MPC5000 will allow burning of Audio and Data CDs as well as reading audio and data CDs and DVDs To create an audio CD do the following 4 Press F31 UTILIT Function WRITE AUBIO CD ES Disk Status EMPTY DISC tR The UTILITY page will be displayed 05 Select WRITE AUDIO CD in the Function field When a disk is inserted into the CD drive you will see EMPTY DISC in the Disk Status field as well as R or RW indicating whether the disk is a recordable R or rewritable RW type CD 06 Select the location of the audio file you wish to write to the CD LOAD You can select RAM Hard Disk or Memory card as the source in the Directory List as well as which folder it resides in 07 Press F6 DO IT to write the file to the disk Write CD R RU The WRITE CD R RW window will be displayed 08 Press F5 DO IT The MPC5000
82. loading them into the MPC5000 E About memory cards The MPC5000 uses Type I or Type II compact flash cards Cards in sizes up to 2 gigabytes are supported The MPC5000 comes with one compact flash card containing factory sounds to get you started but you can use any compatible card for saving Tip MB indicates the size of the memory card The larger this number is the more data you can store Note The size of the compact flash card that MPC5000 can handle is from 32MB to 2GB Note When you use a new compact flash card with the MPC5000 you need to format the card before using it For more information about formatting the card see the Formatting section on page 177 Saving In this section you will learn how to save your work This is done in the SAVE page which can be accessed by pressing the MODE and PAD 3 DISK E Selecting the destination You can choose where to save your files on a memory card or the internal Hard Disk Here you will learn how the data will be saved and how to select the destination 01 Press MODE and F3 DISK ad do ete This will open the DISK page A gt AUTOLCOAD 02 Press F2 SAVE The SAVE page will be displayed 03 Select the device you would like to save to For this example choose the Hard Drive 04 Move through the directory using the left right cursor buttons The files in the Hard Disk are saved in the directories hierarchically like other computer files
83. organized into columns Each of these controls can be edited by turning the DATA wheel or by moving the corresponding Q LINK controls Compressor This effect compresses the signal level that exceeds the selected level to make the volume even ComPressar 0FF as a whole The fields are the same as those of the COMPRESSOR which is selected in the buss Attack Felease Thresh Fatio effects sa Dlsa Ola wli To access the MASTER COMPRESSOR do the following OldSkool Qutreut 01 Press F4 M COMP mos o 02 Select the Compressor field and set it to ON 03 Edit the MASTER COMPRESSOR parameters as desired BENE mE The MASTER COMPRESSOR is a high quality compressor limiter designed to be IHE SIEN M COMP transparent enough to be used to affect the entire mix Each of these controls can be edited by turning the DATA wheel or by moving the corresponding Q LINK controls Editing the Effect Set The Effect Set is all the parameters of each effects bus and all the settings of the master effects Each Effect Set can have completely different settings and you can switch the effect sets in the Effect field of the SELECT page In this section you will learn how to change the name of copy and reset the Effect Set E Changing the name of the Effect Set 01 Select the Effect Set field at the top of the BUS1 2 or BUS3 4 Bere O pde 02 Press the WINDOW button The EFFECT SET window will be displayed Preso ecce 03 In the
84. other than 0 the level setting for Modwheel gt LFO in the PGM page determines how much modulation depth is static and how much will be controlled by the Modwheel Some examples LFO Depth 0 the Modwheel gt LFO setting makes no difference LFO Depth 68 and Modwheel gt LFO setting 0 There is a static LFO modulation with value 68 LFO Depth 68 and Modwheel gt LFO setting 100 Modwheel down no static modulation Modwheel up LFO modulation depth is 68 LFO Depth 68 and Modwheel gt LFO setting 50 Modwheel down static modulation LFO depth is 34 Modwheel up LFO modulation depth is 68 Aftertouch gt Filter Aftertouch can be set to control filter cutoff and can be set from 0 100 effect 133 Synth Programs New to the MPC5000 are virtual analog or Synth programs These differ from sample programs in that rather than using pre recorded sounds the sound is created by a method called subtractive synthesis From smooth whistling leads to huge booming basses to lush spacious pads this method of creating sound can be used to create a vast array of sounds E About Subtractive Synthesis The concept of a synthesizer is an instrument that is capable of producing a very wide range of sounds electronically The huge popularity and continued development of synths since the late 60s is due in great part to this ability to offer so many different types of sound textures in one box A synthesizer s
85. please see your master device s owners manual il Time code Display Hours Minutes Seconds Frames can be displayed on the MPC5000 From the Main screen Bahaamaisaaf use the CURSOR buttons to select the Now field Scroll with the DATA wheel The Doa nahna Aim and display will change as shown il MPC5000 as the Slave To sync the MPC5000 to MIDI Time Code do the following 01 Connect the MIDI output of your master device to one of the MIDI inputs on the MPC5000 02 Make sure your master device is set to send MIDI Time Code 03 press MODE PAD 8 MIDI 04 In the Sync in field choose the MIDI input the master device is connected to 05 In the Mode field choose MIDI TIME CODE When the MPC receives MIDI Time Code it will automatically determine frame rate and sync to the master device ll MPC5000 as the Master To sync MTC capable devices to the MPC5000 do the following 01 Connect the MIDI input of your master device to one of the MIDI outputs on the MPC5000 02 Make sure your slave device is set to receive MIDI Time Code 03 press MODE PAD 8 MIDI 04 In the Sync out field choose the MIDI output the slave device is connected to 05 In the Mode field choose MIDI TIME CODE 06 In the Frame Rate field select the frame rate appropriate for your slave device For more information on appropriate frame rates for your slave devices consult the devices owner s manual 187 E MIDI Ma
86. point can be edited by moving the Q1 Q LINK slider 04 Hit the pad to check the start point When you hit the pad the MPC5000 plays the sample The playback method varies depending on the pad PAD 13 PLAY LOOP The MPC5000 will play the sample from the loop point to the end point repeatedly PAD 14 PLAY TO The MPC5000 will play the part before the loop point If the cursor is on the TRIM END parameter it will play from the sample start to the TRIM END If the cursor is on the LOOP START parameter it will play from the sample start to the LOOP START Any other case it will play from the sample start to the TRIM START PAD 15 PLAY FROM The MPC5000 will play the sample from the loop point If the cursor is on the TRIM END parameter it will play from the TRIM END to the sample end If the cursor is on the LOOP START parameter it will play from the LOOP START to the sample end Any other case it will play from the TRIM START to the sample end PAD 16 PLAY ALL The MPC5000 will play the whole sample PAD 1 to PAD 12 The MPC5000 will first play from the start point to the end point and then play from the loop point to the end point repeatedly 102 Sample Editing TRIM Mode 01 02 E Adjusting the end point Select the End field to adjust the end point You can change the end point value by turning the DATA wheel If you press the left or right CURSOR buttons while holding SHIFT you can move
87. press the left right cursor key while holding the SHIFT button you can select the digit with the DATA wheel You can also enter the value directly using the Numeric keys 06 Hit the pad to check the loop point When you hit the pad the MPC5000 plays the sample The playback method varies depending on the pad PAD 13 PLAY LOOP The MPC5000 will play the sample from the loop point to the end point repeatedly PAD 14 PLAY TO The MPC5000 will play the part before the loop point If the cursor is on the TRIM END parameter it will play from the sample start to the TRIM END If the cursor is on the LOOP START parameter it will play from the sample start to the LOOP START Any other case it will play from the sample start to the TRIM START PAD 15 PLAY FROM The MPC5000 will play the sample from the loop point If the cursor is on the TRIM END parameter it will play from the TRIM END to the sample end If the cursor is on the LOOP START parameter it will play from the LOOP START to the sample end Any other case it will play from the TRIM START to the sample end PAD 16 PLAY ALL The MPC5000 will play the whole sample PAD 1 to PAD 12 The MPC5000 will first play from the start point to the end point and then play from the loop point to the end point repeatedly E Adjusting the end point 07 Select the End field and adjust the end point Note The end point of the loop is the same with the end point of the sample wh
88. represents the relative level of each pad much like faders on a mixing board You can use the CURSOR buttons to move to each field in MIXER mode and you can adjust each level with the DATA wheel Tip You can also easily change the settings for tracks by using the Q LINK controls For more information on using the Q LINK with MIXER Mode see Using Q LINK Controls with MIXER Mode on page 91 E Assigning Effects to a Pad With the MPC5000 you can route programs or specific pads of Sample Programs to any of four 4 internal FX buses To do this you need to route the pad in the FX row In this section we will discuss routing specific pads to the FX buses Tip This picture displays the signal flow of the sample sound to the stereo out through the effect section EFFECT OU PAD SAMPLE DIRECT Note Each FX bus can be assigned to a separate output allowing for the dry signal and the affected signal to be routed independently For more information see page 162 01 In MIXER mode press F1 PrgMix The PrgMix page will be displayed Each column indicates pad 1 though 16 from the left to right and the currently selected pad is highlighted 89 SS SJJSJ JJHFJSXSJSJSSS H Hj j ss SHH Note Different pad banks can be selected by pressing the corresponding PAD BANK button 02 Hit the desired pad The column of the selected pad will be highlighted 03 Select which FX Bus to send the pad to To adjust this v
89. samples in memory are displayed in a scrollable list Press any pad to audition Samrle Select the highlighted sample To close this window press the F4 CLOSE button TIP You can easily navigate to the beginning or the end of this list by holding the SHIFT button and pressing the UP or DOWN arrows and pressing a letter using the NUMERIC keypad will jump to the first item alphabetically corresponding to that letter E Convert Patched Phrases to Sliced Samples Patched phrases can be converted directly to Sliced Samples To slice a patched phrase into its individual sections do the following iceland 1PPF2 lliewn BOTH 01 Select the Patched Phrase you wish to slice and press the F4 CONVRT button Create New Program If you set this to YES the MPC5000 makes a Program where each region is assigned to pads from PAD A01 A16 in order 02 Press F5 DO IT COHUFRT EDIT 118 Sample Editing TRIM Mode The MPC5000 will process the SLICED SAMPLES and then the TRIM page with the divided sample will be displayed The new sample name of the divided sample will be the original sample name and a number For Example Sample01 gt Sample01 01 p p i Convert to SLICED SAMPLES Sample01 02 Sample01 03 Create new Prosram EEM ASMA CO IT Chapter 13 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs In this section you will learn how to edit a program This is done in the PROGRAM mode which can
90. select the desired Q LINK Controller DSPESSCSnBESERHESEdHE ES EN This can be done by moving the selected controller or navigating to the desired Q i Program Prosram AAL LINK Controller with the CURSOR buttons d G Link 01 Slider E 02 Set the Assign field to OFF j e a a dS This will allow the Q LINK to act just as a MIDI control When the Assign field is set i Change HOTE OH e to OFF MIDI Continuous Controller Numbers from the selected controller will be recorded to the current sequence Fl Parameter TUNE Ctrl Range 128 gt 126 03 Set the Ctrl field to the desired MIDI CONTINUOUS CLOSE CONTROLLER NUMBER When the Q LINK is turned the selected MIDI CONTINUOUS CONTROLLER NUMBER will be sent from the MIDI channel and port of the current track When recording moving this Q LINK will write MIDI Continuous Controller Numbers to the sequence Configuring FX Q Links New to the MPC5000 is the ability to automate individual Effects Parameters To access FX Q LINKS press F2 FX Q in Q LINK Mode To access standard Program Q LINKS press F1 Prg Q E Configuring the FX Q LINK Sliders amp Knobs 01 Press MODE PAD 1 to enter Q LINK mode and press F2 FX Q to open the FX Q LINK page The Screen shown to the right will be displayed Each of the following settings for each Q LINK is quickly displayed here FX Name Chorus Displays the name of the effect being automated Bus Bus Buel Dis
91. signal and the delayed signal on the right side Sets the amount of times the delayed signal will be repeated This control is capable of self oscillation at maximum value Damping Cuts off the high frequencies of the delayed signal creating a darker sound Delay Multi Tap This delay is a mono delay which has three different signal generations that can be panned across the stereo field and independently time controlled WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Time 1 Sets the amount of time between the original signal and the delayed signal of tap 1 Time 2 Sets the amount of time between the original signal and the delayed signal of tap 2 Time 3 Feedbk Sets the amount of time between the original signal and the delayed signal of tap 3 Sets the amount of times the delayed signal will be repeated This control is capable of self oscillation at maximum value Pan 1 Controls the stereo position of tap 1 Pan 2 Controls the stereo position of tap 2 Pan 3 Controls the stereo position of tap 3 Damping Cuts off the high frequencies of the delayed signal creating a darker sound Gain 1 Controls the volume level of tap 1 Gain 2 Controls the volume level of tap 2 157 Controls the volume level of tap 3 Distortion Fuzz This popular effect uses extreme hard clipping This clipping at extreme settings can turn a standard waveform into a
92. the Input field and select the recording source For this example please select ANALOG The following sources are available as well ANALOG The MPC5000 will record the incoming signal from the RECORD IN on RESET PER the rear panel PHONO The MPC5000 will record through the PHONO inputs This input is useful for devices with RCA type connections DIGITAL The MPC5000 will record the incoming signal from the DIGITAL IN on the rear panel MAIN OUT The MPC5000 will record the same signal as the signal from the STEREO OUT on the rear panel OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The MPC5000 will record the same signal as the signal from the selected ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT INT CD The MPC5000 will record the signal from Audio CD in internal CD drive This only can be selected if the optional CD drive is installed 04 Select the Mode field and select STEREO or MONO STEREO The MPC5000 will record the left and right channel signals as a stereo sample MONOL The MPC5000 will record only the left channel signal MONOR The MPC5000 will record only the right channel signal 05 Play the source Check the level meter on screen and adjust the recording level using the REC GAIN knob The level meter moves according to the input level If the meter goes too far to the right the sound will be distorted but if the sound level is too low the sample will gain a lot of noise Set the level as high as possible without reaching the right e
93. the MID Output C Nal simien ireanii i dr amo etae tana teet Ded cous decade tons belts ETERRA 34 WM Changing a Track Name sien se ose ee Eae ori Idee dod Eae Hefe elu TS edat fer i adeat 35 E Changing the Default Name for a LEAE S3 sacs ASA A 25 E Coping do Diels ene entitatem iret ce ELE PM uon Pues M Ad E edad aD uL E 35 NEC on CM rack esgos EC xn 35 E Deleting cie EE m 35 m Doc deo qe 36 E MIDI Receive dica did 36 NH Track Select witha SEDET Pad oia ethos e Dat seti ett ARA A e doas AA A nas d LUE US 36 Continuous Sample TRACKS cnino VEI EVI OU p OO OR RECEN GR REOR N E Selecting a Track with FUNCION KEYS cuoi cocti eee edi utr tete e sind eoe a tuc See it iaa cta 37 MEER nuce eR E M TE 37 MIDI Sequencer Features a O Handling the Sustain Pedal siis u p aa CAD YCRUHA S a SS Recording Aftertoucbh ossi aiv XR cS QR ER ROREM PRO RN uc RR ON ER ur RR PROP UR ARI NER RDU ARMA url cw oN Eu eR MER a RA OR Chapter 4 Editing SEQUENCES currar al Selecting a region for the diting asin aaa ea M Setting th Radeon tata 41 W Setting the pad note numbers dos 41 MB Copying events COPY aa AS st drid 41 IS ia MOVE AAA O O E NS A E Ate oN 42 A uiu ete 42 B Changing the timing of an event SHIFT TIMING rociado 43 B Changing the Velocity of an event VECINAS ev Az di da aid 43 E Changing the duration of an event DURATION a 44 Selecting the editing region DY bD r icvss vae ooo ono an 44 C pyine bars COPY Janon ote ero ccu i
94. the cursor in the Event area by the cursor buttons You can also move the cursor to horizontal directions by turning the DATA wheel If the Event area is not shown in the grid the time ruler will move and the next event area will be shown by turning the DATA wheel When the horizontal marker is the upper side of the Event area pressing the up cursor button will move the cursor to the Now field E Relationship of Grid Value to Timing Correct The unit of the grid in the Event area is changed by the Note value in the Timing Correct window which is shown by pressing the F1 T C button When you set the Note value to 1 16 one unit of the grid is 1 16 notes When you set the Note value to 1 8 one unit of the grid is set to 1 8 notes 5 y Mr jjaja E 1 In this case every single event is displayed in the first four grids but each grid actually has two Pad Events When you edit such as copy paste delete move the grid all the events in the grid are edited Note If you only wish to change how the units are displayed in the grid press the F4 CLOSE button after changing the Note Value in Timing Correct window If you press the F5 FIX the MPC50000 will begin processing the Timing Correct change E Selecting an event When you select the Pad Event move the cursor to the grid of the Pad Event by pressing the cursor buttons For example if you wish to select the PAD A03 event at 001 04 00 in th
95. the tempo change event in the STEP EDIT mode See page 47 for more information ll Tap Tempo You can set the tempo using the TAP TEMPO button as well as in the Tempo field Press the TAP TEMPO button along to the desired tempo and the MPC5000 will calculate the tempo based on the timing that you tap The sequence s tempo will automatically be set to the tapped value The MPC5000 takes the average of four taps of the pad but you can adjust the number of taps used to calculate BPM in the Tap average field in OTHER mode E Changing Tempo of All Sequences At One Time You can change the tempo of all sequences to the same tempo at one time You can change the tempo of each sequence at any time after you create the sequence but it is useful to change all the sequence at one time when you are creating one song with several sequences 01 In the MAIN page select the BPM field and press the WINDOW button E AE REB TemrFa Change DEM Initial TemrFo 178 8 Current Tempo 176 8 The TEMPO CHANGE window will be displayed 02 Press F5 FIX button The FIX TEMPO window will be displayed 03 In the Fix tempo field set the tempo Fix temro 128 Bbem 04 Press F5 DO IT button Preso ina CO TT Uil fix temro of all It changes the tempo of all of the sequences to the value set in the Fix Tempo field LE sesences DO IT MEL E About Tempo Change With the Step Recording feature in the STEP EDIT mode you ca
96. tick is a unit that divides a beat 1 4 note into 960 parts For example 1 beat equals one 1 4 note 960 ticks so one 1 8 note equals the half of 1 beat which is 480 ticks Below is the relationship between note and tick 1 4 note 960 ticks 1 8 note 480 ticks 1 16 note 240 ticks 1 4 triplets 640 ticks 1 8 triplets 320 ticks 1 16 triplets 160 ticks 1 32 Note 120 ticks 1 32 triplets 80 ticks 1 64 note 60 ticks 1 64 triplets 40 ticks Absolute Time Another way the Now field will display time is absolute time Absolute time will show actual length of the sequence in hours minutes seconds and frames For example 00h03m07s03f means three minutes seven seconds and three frames Unlike when displayed in BARS BEATS TICK the Now field will increase in time linearly as a sequence plays In other words If you have a two bar sequence and you let it play for 5 minutes BARS BEATS TICK will show the time counting to bar two then looping back to one but viewing the HOURS MINUTES FRAMES display will count up to 0OhO5m00s00f showing the sequence played for five minutes Frame is a subdivision of seconds sent via MIDI in a format called MIDI TIME CODE or MTC MTC is a standard that has been used as a timing standard for many years by both the Audio and the Video industry The MPC5000 can sync to the frame rate of external devices or generate its own timing data to slave other devices to its internal clock For more on MIDI TI
97. to be raised or lowered by up picas to 18dB Note that this function is different than Normalization in that it i gt Samele Edit will allow volume to be boosted beyond the point of clipping This may be a desired effect but be sure to watch your output levels j Edit BI a Gain Amount a Gain Amount 8 This field sets how much the volume is to be boosted This parameter de DO IT will arPeR1IS sain can be set to a maximum of 18dB i4 to the selected region F4 CANCEL F5 DO IT Press F4 CANCEL to abort the GAIN operation Press F5 DO IT to apply the change B Bit Reduce The Bit Reducer removes bits from a sample effectively lowering the Eta quality of the sample Using the Bit Reducer can be effective at achieving i a dirty sound on drum loops without the harshness of distortion This is Hs EN similar in sound to the Resampler effect but permanently applies the Edit NEIN change to the sample d Bit Depth 12 Bit Depth DO IT will bit reduce This field sets the amount that the Bit Reducer will reduce the source i4 the selected resion material to This ranges in sound from a Vintage Sampler sound 12 5E bits to an aliased dirty sound associated with some popular vintage home computers 8 bit to a full on digital sound akin to some very popular 80s game consoles 4 bit F4 CANCEL F5 DO IT Press F4 CANCEL to abort the Bit Reduce operation Press F5 DO IT to apply the change
98. to extract Reaion 1B New sample Hew S5Samrle PhatLral Sets the new name for the new sample here 02 Press the F5 DO IT button id Re RSM DO IT JE The MPC5000 will start the extract process Pressing F4 Cancel will cancel the extract and the display go back to the CHOP SHOP Page E DIVIDE REGION Divides the selected region into two regions 01 In the Edit field select DIVIDE REGION de Region r Edit HUESO Selects the number of the region to divide Resions 16 02 Press F5 DO IT The MPC5000 will start dividing the region into two regions Pressing F4 Cancel will cancel the process and the display will go back to the CHOP SHOP Page E COMBINE REGION Combines an adjacent range of regions to one region 01 In the Edit field select COMBINE REGION Region Selects the number of regions to combine For example if you set this 1 5 the regions from 1 to 5 will be combined 02 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start combining the regions Pressing F4 Cancel will cancel the process and the display will go back to the CHOP SHOP Page E RESTORE If you want to restore a Patched Phrase sample back to a normal sample just select the sample in TRIM screen and press F6 EDIT 01 In the Edit field select RESTORE j Edit CES Tempo Temro 118 HB Here you can set the tempo for the loop you are restoring This field e Hew Sample Samrle mai will default to the current S
99. to play while playing back a sequence so that you can play the sequences in a series While a sequence is playing you can select the next sequence to be played from the Main page by turning the DATA wheel or using the numeric keypad at the Sequence field 24 The Sequencer 01 From the Main page select a sequence and press PLAY oBE DiliHCi o5 02 While the selected sequence is playing change the Sequence field to another sequence using the DATA wheel The screen will change as follows The Sequence field continues to show the sequence number that is currently playing The gt field shows next sequence that will be played 03 After playing back the currently selected sequence to the end the MPC5000 will start playing back the sequence you ve selected By repeating this step you can play back several sequences seamlessly When next sequence is selected you can start to play next sequence immediately by pressing STEP gt button When next sequence is selected you can cancel selected next sequence by pressing STEP button Tip With the NEXT SEQ button you can select the next sequence with a pad For more information see the Selecting a sequence with pads section on Page 84 Tip In SONG mode you can set the order to play sequences For more information see the SONG mode section on Page 61 E Punch In Punch Out You can start the recording in the middle of the sequence during the pla
100. uPPETHDALALEGHUERLAERLERELRLELELRLAELERLAEDLELE To view a track s details select the desired track and press the Pad WINDOW button Parameters such as Volume Pan and Outputs can individually be edited d here with greater detail e Mute Fa bus Quteut 90 MIXER Mode Track Mixer In the TRACK MIXER tab you can control the overall volume of the entire track along with each of the other tracks On the TRACK MIXER tab it s possible to adjust the level of each of the 64 sequence tracks Sequence Track Mixer simultaneously Note while in Track Mixer the pads are used to select the corresponding tracks In this mode pads will not make sound or send MIDI E Setting the Level and Pan Position of a Track 01 Press the MODE button and then the PAD 7 MIXER 02 Press F2 TrkMix to select the Track Mix page In this display each column indicates tracks 1 though 16 starting from the left and the currently selected track is highlighted The bar display on the bottom indicates the current level Longer bars indicate higher levels Note tracks 17 64 can be used by pressing the corresponding PAD BANK buttons 03 Hit the pad corresponding to the desired track The column of the selected track will be highlighted You can select several tracks by hitting pads while holding down the SHIFT button You can also select all 16 tracks displayed by pressing a PAD BANK button while holding in the SHIFT but
101. well The MIDI clock is sent from the external MIDI sequencer to the MPC5000 In this case the external MIDI sequencer works as the master and the MPC5000 as the slave 01 Connect the MIDI IN of the MPC5000 to MIDI OUT of the external MIDI device using the MIDI cable The MPC5000 has two MIDI In ports MIDI IN 1 and MIDI IN 2 You can connect to either MIDI IN but here connect to the MIDI IN 2 02 Select the MIDI SYNC mode by pressing the MODE button and hitting the PAD 8 MIDI SYNC 03 Press the F2 SYNC button The SYNC page will be displayed 04 Select the Sync in field and select the input of the MIDI clock You can receive the MIDI clock from both MIDI IN 1 and 2 In this example as you have connected the external MIDI device to MIDI IN 2 in step 1 select MIDI OUT 2 05 In the Mode field choose MIDI Clock 06 Press the MAIN button The main page where you play back the sequence will be displayed 07 Set the external MIDI device to send out the MIDI clock Refer to the device s operation manual 08 Start the playback of the external MIDI sequencer The MPC5000 starts the playback as well 186 Using the MPC5000 with External Devices EXT will be displayed in the BPM field Note The tempo being set in the sequence will be displayed when the sequence is stopped Note The MIDI clock signal has tempo information The slave device will follow the master device s tempo regardless of its original tempo
102. 00 Mixdown 76 Mixer automation 77 MMC 4 187 ModW 142 Modwheel 142 Monitor 98 99 MTC 21 186 Multi 156 Mute group 127 N Normalize 72 Note event 55 Note repeat 28 Note variation 48 57 80 Note variation value 48 206 Index Now 20 21 23 29 47 51 52 55 56 57 58 61 67 69 80 83 84 107 123 146 176 186 198 Numeric keys 116 O Out 9 24 71 93 116 161 162 P Pad event 55 Parameter 25 179 180 Pgm 119 122 125 128 134 142 143 Pitch shift 108 Poly pressure event 49 Program 15 22 33 34 38 49 83 87 89 100 113 119 127 128 133 134 135 136 139 140 142 143 144 145 166 167 172 203 204 R Ram 10 Range 41 42 43 44 50 55 58 69 121 142 180 Rate 27 128 141 152 153 162 186 Record Aftertouch 39 194 Region 112 113 115 Replace same files 167 168 174 Replace same files in memory 174 Replace same samples 166 172 Replace same samples in memory 172 Reps 62 63 Res 125 135 138 153 154 155 158 S Sample 11 14 15 16 22 37 87 88 101 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 111 112 114 116 119 120 121 122 123 125 127 133 144 166 167 168 171 176 189 Save 73 76 166 167 176 Send level 149 Sequence 2 14 20 22 23 24 29 31 32 33 34 39 44 45 62 64 77 80 84 100 106 163 167 173 Sequence list 84 Shift timing
103. 00 will start processing your changes 43 E Changing the timing of an event SHIFT TIMING You can shift the timing of the note event 01 Select the Edit field in the EVENT page of the SEQ EDIT mode and select SHIFT TIMING The various fields necessary for the Shift Timing will be displayed 02 In the Range field and the Pads Notes field select the region pec NM TN that you wish to edit BB81 01 888 Tk 81 Track l aras n BB2 01 000 meme 03 In the Edit Sq field and the Tk field on right select the sequence and track that you wish to edit 04 In the Amount field set the amount of Shift timing nuc EARLIER This is a value in clock ticks the selected region will be moved Amounts BB 05 Select the direction of Shift Timing EARLIER Shifts forward LATER Shifts back 06 Press the F6 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start processing your changes E Changing the Velocity of an event Velocity You can change the velocity of any note event 01 Select the Edit field in the EVENT page of the SEQ EDIT mode and select Velocity The various fields necessary for changing the velocity will be displayed 02 In the Range field and the Pads Notes field select the region its E Sar 1 Tor_Gur that you wish to edit 001 01 000 Tk B1 Track Bl 03 In the Edit Sq field and the Tk field on the right select the To 002 81i aaa Voss R EE E Ea A a sequence and track that you wish to edit
104. 02 Press the WINDOW button Track B1 5CD The TRACK NAME window will be displayed 03 Press F5 COPY button 1 xx The COPY TRACK window will be displayed as shown Track BE SCD 04 In the Track field below select a track to copy to Ed WE 05 Press F5 DO IT button Copying the sequence will start To cancel the operation press F4 CANCEL E Deleting a Track FEN You can remove a track from the memory of the MPC5000 ee GE i Lis Delete TEE 01 In the Track field in MAIN mode select a track to delete 02 Press the WINDOW button Track Track 8l The TRACK NAME window will be displayed i Pressing DO IT will erase this track 03 Press F2 DELETE The DELETE TRACK window will be displayed as shown MMRR CANCEL 04 Press F5 DO IT That deletes the selected track and changes its name to unused NO EL eL 3 3x E Deleting all Tracks e You can delete all the track data in the memory at one time 05 In the MAIN mode select the Track field and press the l l WINDOW button Pressins DO IT will E Will erase The TRACK NAME window will be displayed ALL tracks CANCEL DO IT kun 36 The Sequencer Rx x eee 06 Press F2 DELETE button The DELETE TRACK window will be displayed 07 Press F3 ALLTRK button The DELETE ALL TRACKS window will be displayed as shown 08 Press F5 DO IT button That deletes all the tracks and changes their names
105. 158 159 Auto step increment 52 58 59 Autoload 119 134 176 177 198 Automation 76 77 91 167 B Bars 21 29 31 32 62 69 C Channel pressure event 49 Copies 42 44 D Decay 48 123 124 136 139 140 160 161 Direct recording 99 Drum pad 200 Duration of recorded notes 52 59 DVD 8 175 201 E Edit 41 42 43 44 45 47 51 52 55 58 69 70 71 72 73 103 104 106 107 108 109 113 115 136 138 139 140 141 163 198 End 69 70 71 101 102 103 112 113 116 ENV 133 Erase 25 26 51 Event 47 48 49 50 51 52 55 56 57 58 180 181 Event list 51 57 58 Event time 47 58 F Filter 48 50 123 124 125 126 128 135 138 142 153 154 180 200 Filter envelope 123 Footswitch 13 195 196 Freq 124 125 126 153 154 Full level 79 G Gain 71 154 156 157 I Ignore tempo change events in 64 In play 27 Input 8 11 77 92 93 95 97 98 99 158 159 169 174 189 201 Input thru 92 169 174 K key 15 27 39 42 45 48 52 57 59 79 82 83 98 113 116 117 123 124 138 141 146 191 193 195 L Latch 146 Layer 48 Lfo 137 Load 169 172 173 174 Lp 116 117 Lvl 120 123 124 M Main page 3 23 24 100 Make new folder 167 Master level 16 97 193 198 Memory card 175 Mic 8 11 MIDI Machine Control 187 200 MIDI Time Code 185 186 187 2
106. 170 Saving and Loading DISK Mode E Moving Files When moving a file the file is copied to a new location and then deleted from the original location To move files from one folder to another or from one drive to another do the following 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Press F2 SAVE to open the SAVE page Select the desired file or folder to move with the cursor You can move through the directories with left right cursor buttons Press and hold the F5 EDIT button The Function buttons will change as shown While holding in the F5 EDIT button press F1 COPY This will copy the selected file and open the PASTE TO window In the Directory List select the directory to move the file to Press F2 MOVE The CONFIRM MOVE window will be opened The selected file will be moved to the selected location Press F5 DO IT The selected file will be moved to the new location Tare SAVE A SAMPLE Item S88 KICK B RHUTOLORD 2 BB a na na as P a as na s CIRRUCIMO Oeo G keit ns COPY FILE FOLCER TO T COMFIRM MOLE T This will delete the selected file in it s current location Jand move it to the newly Hdiselected location dPraceed CANCEL DO IT Note A folder can only be MOVED or COPIED to a different media such as hard disk to compact flash or CD to hard disk for example 171 Loading In this section you will learn how to load
107. 1l Track E Track 06 Press the F6 SELECT button 2 Track Track B Track Track This selects the track Bd Track Track Ba T k T k To select a track again press the F5 CANCEL button a a Hr Irack Track 07 Select the destination by turning the DATA wheel The list will scroll with the track selected in steps 5 and 6 fixed Refer to the list on the left to select the destination position 08 Press the F6 MOVE button The track will move to the selected location and the order will be changed Chapter 5 STEP EDIT Mode Unlike SEQ EDIT Mode STEP EDIT allows you a way to easily edit individual events one at a time In this section you will learn about the STEP EDIT mode where you can edit each event in detail STEP EDIT mode is accessed by pressing MODE PAD13 E A Note about Playing Events You can audition events while in STEP EDIT Mode by selecting the event and pressing the F6 PLAY button E About Step Edit Each track has the performance data you made with pads or Now field MIDI note information from an external MIDI keyboard The View field Step Edit function allows you to edit each event separately including individual note velocity pitch and duration as well as TUER z MIDI controller data program changes and other types of events There are also events specific to the MPC5000 such as Q LINK controllers pad tuning and tempo SARL SPOT BD a3u 33 AGZ 429T 60 rel 41 AB2C
108. 43 Soft thru 188 198 Solo 80 81 Song 14 61 62 63 64 65 67 68 69 72 73 200 203 204 Sq 42 43 44 St 69 70 101 102 113 Step 23 30 47 51 52 55 58 59 61 62 64 146 187 191 192 198 Step list 61 62 Sustain pedal 39 193 198 Sustain pedal to duration 198 Swing 26 27 146 Sync in 185 186 187 198 Sync out 185 186 187 198 Synth 6 15 16 17 87 119 133 134 135 136 137 139 140 141 142 166 176 189 203 T Tempo 30 50 62 64 99 114 117 194 Tempo change event 50 Threshold 95 97 112 Time stretch 107 108 Timing correct 26 28 47 57 Ir 25 Track 2 22 33 34 35 37 45 64 67 68 69 70 72 73 74 75 80 81 83 90 91 98 100 145 167 189 Track list 80 Track mute 2 81 Track type 100 Truncate duration 198 Tune 48 104 114 120 122 123 181 203 204 V V 48 49 57 120 122 124 126 VCA 139 158 VCE 133 137 138 VCO 133 135 136 137 Voice overlap 128 W Window 7 27 99 121 gt O O OC A S lt
109. A ees pe dme 105 B Selectimea Pads sample fo Edif 5e ai 105 B Setting the Root Note ofa Sample caia dt daniela coa 106 Other editing FUNCEIONS iiio soe sus esessRE E PESE E Ts EESEEWENERARESEFEARERERRR NR EREFRR AREE EN RRREFEAKMREKKRN RENE EM MR 106 W NORMALIZE 5 e Gore dee rodea efc iud aw sane ence sies ut A tds ad a abate EOS MD Santen ed ne isa S aia 106 2280 REVERSE iia 106 E PIME STRETCH eee ae a sala tall 106 W PITCH SHIFT Changing the pitch of the sample 108 A ioo MP eee TO Aner cA cb db ied ctetu i dete e D pO I MEE 109 EP coUe T HHVN 109 A ETE ER 109 E icis PT 110 Dividing a Phrase Sample into Several Regions eeeeeeeeeeeee 111 NH SCN SIO Dre ca vice dd bla 111 WS SLICEDSAMPEEPATCHBB PHRASE tbt tet hu eee eit n Y Roten t eds teda im uae abu aa 111 B Dividing Sample Automatically AUTO Louie Eod RE 112 B X Dividing a Sample into Regions of Equal Length EQUALLY ooooocccnnnnnooonncncnonononnnononononnnnnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnncnnns 112 NH Adjusting the Start End Point of the Resalta tica 112 MEME on E 113 B Converting Divided Samples to SLICED SAMPLE G cccccccccccssssossccessesssccscecsssscensccnseesseesecessessceeeeesesenensecesees 113 M Converting PATCHED PURAS Es SS A AAA IA ts 114 Changing the Tune and Tempo of a Patched Phrase Sample eee 114 EGO REGIONS AAA AAA 115 NE TRAC Bates rM 115 E
110. AKAI professional Yee m m mn USIC PRODUCTION CENTER I REFERENCE MANUAL V 2 00 WWW AKAIPRO COM MPES SODOO MUSIC PRODUCTION CENTER REFERENCE MANUAL Version 2 00 Chapter 1 ATER OG GULONN iem OVGFVICW LECT IDIOT TIERE LM onus TE l E Pront a e ANN 8 Me Rod ie a a a a Sa 8 Me Botton Panels rater e a da o o e es A na eel ints iia eS 10 Hooking Up Your MPC5000 Operating Modes Outp t Connectivity Example esseen cot aed dcc dude chc Soap etoile ea duit dao Deoa dein A E E A hes Rupe de 11 Analog Input Conmectivity B XdImple unan tale 11 Digital Connectivity Example e A tir 12 USB Conectividad 12 MIDEN EUA sl NN 13 Footswitch Headphone Connectivity a Ad A old 13 Basic Concepts and Terminology eeeeee eere eee eee eene en nnn nnne scie TH a 14 MAAC Si lI 14 OM NERONE ERE eisai P PERTH 14 A O o O NUN err 14 Dunn AG eH rias 15 Sample Proa io 15 A beo asm E a aa VEe na ra A E A A E A 15 Note Number Velocity and En ptTi oii obice a tte dos 15 RAM asn doi lao 15 Memory Card erre nd E 15 MAIN Mode EVENING Dist E T T A A a adden editus 16 O PINK Mode A MODE Trad Marat ls 16 DISK M de MODET PAL Dis E E E E E S T ORR 16 REC SAMPLE Mode IMODE J Pad 4 onion Ra S dc 16 TRIMMMode MODE DIM da sn 16 PROGRAM Mode MODE EP Pad eccisesnsintad st A e quet td aim vio EET ves bunte 16 MIXER Mode A MODE P
111. Arpeggiator settings Adjust the Arp Pattern field as desired to vary the pattern The following settings are available Up The notes being held will move upward from lowest note to highest note For example if you hold down the notes C3 E3 and G3 the arpeggiator would play the following repeating pattern C3 E3 G3 While holding down the above if you were to add a D4 the MPC would then play the following C3 E3 G3 D4 Down The notes being held will move downward from highest note to lowest note For example if you hold down the notes C3 E3 and G3 the arpeggiator would play the following repeating pattern G3 E3 C3 While holding down the above if you were to add a D4 the MPC would then play the following D4 G3 E3 C3 Inclusive The notes being held will move upward then downward from lowest note to highest note then from highest to lowest playing the lowest and highest note twice For example if you hold down the notes C3 E3 and G3 the arpeggiator would play the following repeating pattern C3 E3 G3 G3 E3 C3 While holding down the above if you were to add a D4 the MPC would then play the following C3 E3 G3 D4 D4 G3 E3 C3 Exclusive The notes being held will move upward then downward from lowest note to highest note then from highest to lowest without repeating the lowest and highest note For example if you hold down the notes C3 E3 and G3 the arpeggiator would play the following repeating patt
112. Chart Akai Professional LLC Model MPC5000 Sampler Section Function Transmitted Changed Mode Default 1 Messages X Altered X True Voice 000 127 Note Off X Channel O Used in Note Repeat Pitch Bend Low Synth Programs Only o Joms System Exclusive 00 System Common Song Position Song Select une System Real Time Clock Commands Aux Messages Local On Off All Notes Off Active Sense Reset Triple STOP x be m x Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 204 Other Settings Akai Professional LLC Model MPC5000 Sequencer Section Function Transmitted Basic Channel Note Number Velocity Aftertouch Pitch Bend System Exclusive System Common System Real Time Notes Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Changed 1 16 1 16 Default Messages Altered True Voice Note On Note Off Poly Channel Song Position Song Select Tune Clock Commands Local On Off All Notes Off Active Sense Reset O Yes X No Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO 1 16 levels 2 79 80 A Active track receive channel 189 198 ADAT 9 12 195 201 Aftertouch 39 142 194 197 203 204 Amount 42 43 124 152 Arpeggiator 6 16 145 146 147 Assign to pad 100 171 Attack 48 123 124 136 139 140 153
113. DO 17 04 Press F5 DO IT to erase the CD RW B Close Session Once you are satisfied with the content of your CD the CD will need to be closed This will finish the CD and allow it to be played on any compact disk player Function SESSIUMH To access the CLOSE SESSION function do the following Disk Status EMPTY DISC CR 01 Press F3 UTILIT l l Pressing DO IT will close the CD The UTILITY page will be displayed allowing it to be read by a CD Plaser 02 Select CLOSE SESSION in the Function field 03 Press F6 DO IT The CLOSE SESSION page will be displayed 04 Press F5 DO IT to close the CD session Autoload The MPC5000 comes with an array of factory demos as well as preset Sample and Synth Programs that load on startup from a preset ROM Instead it can be set to automatically load a particular folder on startup instead When you create an AUTOLOAD folder on a memory card or Hard Disk the MPC5000 can be set to load the contents of the AUTOLOAD folder automatically when you switch on the unit You can use this function to load the most frequently used programs or sequences automatically E Creating an Autoload The MPC5000 can be set to automatically load a particular folder on startup instead of the preset ROM When you create an AUTOLOAD folder on the memory card or Hard Disk the MPC5000 can be set to load the contents of the AUTOLOAD folder automatically when you switch on the unit You can use this function t
114. EP EDIT mode For more information about entering the program change events see the STEP EDIT Mode chapter on page 47 01 In the Pgm field of the PROGRAM mode press the WINDOW button The Program window will be displayed 02 Select the MIDI program change field and set the program change number If a track has a program change event with the same number set in this field the MPC5000 switches the program at the event while playing back the sequence If you do not wish to switch the program during the playback set this field to OFF 144 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs E Assigning MIDI Notes to Pads in a Sample Program The performance data you made by hitting the MPC5000 s pads is sent to the internal sampler and sequencer section directly You can also send the data as a MIDI signal at the same time The performance data will be sent as MIDI note information To do so you need to determine which MIDI note to send out when you hit each pad Also when you load sequence data created on external sequencer and saved as a smf or mid file to the MPC5000 and play the internal sampler section you have to determine which pad to play by the MIDI note data in the sequence Any midi note number 0 127 can be assigned In this section you will learn how to assign MIDI notes to the pads of a Sample program 01 In the PROGRAM mode press the F3 NOTE button MEJ ecir The NOTE page will be displayed E ER E E l m l E ER E E 02 S
115. EQ button brings up the next sequence page Wes ees Seer Ml EHE Sa BS Sa Be Sa HP Sa B3 Now Field Ceauence seauence Sseaauenca tunuszed Sa B2 Like the Now field in the MAIN page it displays the current time position al Parens EUR Eod of the sequence 2e encae Sequence Field Hz 5e ue B2 XTBEBR ISUDDEHI HOLD CLEAR Like the Sequence field in the MAIN page you can select a sequence in this field Sequence List The sequence list is displayed under the Now field and the Sequence field The sequence list displays the first 8 letters of the sequence name The sequences are displayed according to the position of the pads Sequence 1 on the lower left and sequence 16 on the upper right You can display 16 pads at one time allowing you to display 1 to 64 sequences by switching pad banks Note you cannot select a sequence between 65 and 99 using pads but you can select them in the Sequence field B Operation ow Aez 42 575 SarH2 Seauence M2 01 In the Sequence field select a sequence that you wish to play ies mud E Pone 02 Start to play back the Sequence Cuniuseds tcunuzed tzunused cunused Sa H2 Sa 66 Sa Be Sa DS 03 Select another sequence that you wish to play next using a SequencelSesuence Sequence unused pad CHEESE Sa 02 Sa 63 Sa 84 Tee Se EP Ce Sequence Sequence The number and name of the selected sequence will be displayed below the Sequence list as shown in the i
116. F Play Track Mute Events OFF Select the Record Track Mute Events field and change it to ON Instant Track Mute Also note that there is a convenient shortcut to the SEQ EDIT page here Press F2 EDIT to access the SEQ EDIT page As further convenience the VIEW field in SEQ EDIT is set to TRACK MUTE automatically when SEQ EDIT is accessed in this way CLOS Once Record Track Mute Events has been set to ON pressing PLAY and REC or OVERDUB in the Track Mute page will allow track mute events to be recorded Track mute events are only recorded when in the Track Mute page Timing Correct settings will affect the recording of track mute events E Ignoring Track Mute Events To hear your sequence without playing back recorded or inserted track mute events do the following 01 From the MAIN page select the MUTE field 02 Press WINDOW The MUTE EVENTS page will open 03 Select the Play Track Mute Events field and change it to OFF This will allow you to play back sequences while ignoring track mutes To play track mute events in your sequences set this field to ON ll Track Mute Groups Pads can be grouped together so hitting one pad will affect the other How 881 01 608 Sa G1 First Verse pads in the same group TRACK MUTE GROUPS are accessed by pressing F2 TKGRP from the Track Mute page To add a pad to a group do the following 01 Press a pad For an example press PAD AO1 The mute group selection fo
117. F6 RECORD button when you wish to start the recording and play your performance The MPC5000 will start the recording and the bottom of MAIN page will be changed as shown CHHCEL You can stop the recording by pressing F6 STOP button If you want to cancel the recording press F5 CANCEL Tip When you use Direct Recording the foot switch is very useful for starting stopping the sequence leaving your hands free For more information on this see Using the Footswitches on page 195 After finishing the recording the Keep or Retry window will be displayed Note In Direct Recording the MPC5000 will keep the recording by pressing the F6 STOP whether the sequence is set to LOOP ON or OFF 07 Check the recorded sample by pressing F4 PLAY button If you press the F4 PLAY button you can hear the recorded sample until you release the button If you do not like the recording you can delete the recording and return to the SAMPLE page by pressing the F2 RETRY button If you like the recording and decide to keep it proceed to the next step 08 In the New name field the recorded sample will have a new name automatically If you wish to enter in a new name use the CURSOR buttons and the DATA wheel to enter in the new name For more information about entering in a sample name see the Setting Names section on page 20 09 Select the Assign to Pad field with the cursor and select the Pad to which you
118. FX setting for the FX row Pressing this button repeatedly will toggle through each FX bus for the selected column Q LINK Q5 8 KNOBS These knobs correspond to the PAN setting for the PAN row Q LINK Q1 4 AFTER BUTTONS These buttons correspond to the MUTE setting for the MUTE row Pressing this button repeatedly will toggle the MUTE setting on or off Holding the SHIFT button while pressing one of these buttons will solo the selected track Q LINK Q1 4 SLIDERS These sliders correspond to the LEVEL setting for the LVL row Viewing Track Details Each Track can be selected and viewed in detail To view a track s details select the desired track and press the WINDOW button BE Track 82 Volume Pan and Mute can individually be edited here with greater detail Mixer Automation The MPC5000 can record information such as Level and Pan changes and trackmute events so that they will automate during sequence play back 01 02 Froaram Program BB Lo lume Fan Mute In the MIXER mode press the F3 SETUP button Record mix chanses The SETUP page will be displayed Record Track Mute Events Play Track Mute Events In the Record mix changes field select YES with the DATA Instant Track Mute wheel In the Record Track Mute Events field select ON Enobz S5lider Take Over Mode If you set these fields to YES and or ON and change the LEVEL SEND MUTE or PAN in the PrgMix page during the sequence is reco
119. Hard Drive no RAM is used so the only limit to how much you can record is the size of the Hard Drive Many hours of sound can be recorded on the MPC5000 s Hard Drive You can also apply effects to your Hard Disk tracks edit your recorded audio and mix down your song along with your song to create a finished product Adding Hard Disk Tracks to a Song To add a Hard Disk track to your current song do the following 00 60 01 064 Sora 01 JONSOGa 01 Press MODE and PAD16 HD RECORD to enter the HD REC page The following page will be displayed as shown Here you can select whether you Add audio tracks to sons would like to add audio tracks to the current song EE Ho RE Note this page is also accessible from SONG mode by pressing F2 HD REC 02 Select a song you would like to add Hard Disk tracks to in the EmM 001 01 006 41 Sorr8 1 Source ANALOG Song field Fec In L to Track 1 EC EMEND A NENNEN UNE CON dE 03 Press F6 DO IT Fec In F to Track 2 This will add audio tracks to the current song and the screen will be displayed as shown on the right For recording audio tracks see the next section See page 61 for more information on SONG mode A RECORRE L ARM Note an important thing to note is that once audio tracks are added to a song when attempting to select another song you will be prompted to save the current song if anything regarding the current song has changed This is to avoid wasted ha
120. In the Song field select the song you wish to export audio tracks from 03 Press the F4 TkVIEW button to open the TRACK VIEW tab 04 Press F6 EDIT to open the AUDIO EDIT page as shown on the right 05 In the Edit field select Export Track 06 In the Track field select the track to Export You can choose any of the eight Hard Disk tracks to export or you can export all of them by selecting ALL 07 For Format choose 16 or 24 bit If you will be burning this track to a CD select 16 bit If you will be importing the fle AE man ais se into a 24 bit capable audio application select 24 bit zii as Eco 08 Press F5 DO IT This will open the window shown to the right Here you can select device and destination you wish to save the exported track to 09 In the Save to field choose the drive you wish to export track to 10 Select the directory to save to in the File browser field You can navigate to different folders using the up and down CURSOR buttons and open and close folders by pressing the left or right CURSOR buttons For more on loading files and browsing drives see Saving and Loading DISK Mode on page 165 11 Press F5 DO IT to export the selected file This will export the selected file into the selected directory E Erasing HD Track Automation It is possible to cut or copy Automation Audio Only or both from a Track in HD VIEW To do so do the following 01 In HD
121. ME CODE see page 186 To toggle between Bars and Beats and Absolute Time do the following 01 In MAIN Mode select the NOW field as shown MT ga1 81 888 02 Scroll with the DATA wheel or press the button 03 The screen will change as shown IIT aaheameasaet 22 The Sequencer B Sequence A Sequence is the most basic unit when creating data with the MPC5000 Performance data from the MIDI keyboard or pad can be recorded on each track within a sequence You can select a sequence Sequencer Bl Seauujence Hl in this field by turning the DATA wheel or typing in a number with the NUMERIC KEYPAD You can have up to 99 sequences in memory at any one time Empty sequences are indicated as unused All the settings in the MAIN page can be set separately for each sequence B Track field A sequence has 64 tracks You can record different parts separately to Gg Track 61 Cunused3 each track You can for example record Piano sounds on track 1 Bass on track 2 Organ on track 3 etc In the Track field you can select a track within the sequence selected in the Sequence field An unused track is indicated as unused You can set Mute MIDI Velocity Type and Program fields separately for each track B Track Status field The Track Status field shows a small representation of each of the 64 tracks in the current sequence When an event is played on each track the track indicator for that par
122. MIX OUT 7 8 1 8 The effect output will be sent in MONO to the corresponding ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT output Using Master Effects The master effect is applied to the overall sound from the stereo out You can use it separately from the four effects busses The effects you can use as the master effect are a 4 band equalizer and compressor With these effects you can add the final touches to the sound 163 01 Press MODE and F11 EFFECTS to enter EFFECT mode 02 To use the 4 band EQ press F3 M EQ and select ON in the EQ field 03 To use the compressor press F4 M COMP and select ON in the Compressor field E Editing the Master Effects TY In addition to the four effects busses the MPC5000 also has Master Fres Frey Effects used for polishing up the entire Sequence affecting all sound num from the Main Outs G a ola In this section you will learn how to access the master effects Gain Gain 4 band EQ B BdB B GB This is the 4 band EQ equalizer which consists of two shelving type EQs for high frequency and low frequency shaping and a 2 band parametric EQ With the equalizers you can boost or NEEDS 1 EC MEEEENIMIPEPRSSIIIGOZMIS lower a specific frequency to control the sound from the stereo out To access the MASTER EQ page do the following 01 Press F3 M EQ 02 Select the EQ field and set it to ON 03 Edit the MASTER EQ Parameters as desired The controls for each band are
123. MO jarama ede esee uester aca 187 NH Sending MME to a de YIGG tetera to Ail el eesti etos a buds elit oet teat ee e ule dee EM c 187 E Receiving MMC trom device e aseciu ti A A data 187 Connecting the MPC5000 to a MIDI Keyboard with Built in Sounds Setting the MIDI Input Chanel cnica Connecting the MPC5000 as a Multitimbral Sound Module eee eee m Setting IDE TERRE UM 189 Select Active Track or Sequence with a Program Change e eee ee nennen nnn Chapter 19 Connecting the MPC5000 to Your Computer B Connecting the MPC5000 to a Windows based PC coonoonocccccnonococonocononooonnonononononnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnns 191 E Connecting the MPC5000 to the MacIHtoslu oett oerte Cae resa cR P aaerek ded usc osa sa iata du bera Ursus d corde ER ed 191 Chapter 20 Other Seld miss E Adjusting the Master eye iss ict cise dace AA AAA AA R AA a atts 193 B SusctiiPedal to ID UN AIO torta 193 Wien DCUM T 194 m Record AMOO cR 194 NH TINA E IN A Ads 194 m Flash Trempo LED cenm a A sa eas Na ea a alc a elo Oe a Naga 194 NH Mille Stop of One Shot Samples sarita 194 NH Settings the ADAT Digital O tp t s rss ainda 195 W Program Audition Note sono utto Dti adds 195 E Using the Foots Wile MCS TERT A m UN AA E a E a 195 B Adjustment of Pad Se
124. Mixdown to File To perform a mixdown of the current song to an audio file do the following Destination 01 Select the RECORD tab by pressing F2 Tracks 1 2 02 Press the WINDOW button to open the MIXDOWN page o E Recorded audio The page shown on the right will be displayed Effects 03 In the Destination field select Save as file Mixer automation Inrut thru 04 In the Tracks field you will see the tracks select for mixing down For more information on naming see page 20 05 For Format choose 16 or 24 bit 27 If you will be burning this track to a CD select 16 bit If you will be importing the file into a 24 bit capable audio application select 24 bit 06 Select what you would like to be included in the mixdown You can select from the following parameters Each parameter can be set to YES or NO Sequence Tracks Internal Sequence tracks will be included in the mixdown This includes all tracks created using internal programs such as drums virtual analog synth programs etc Note MIDI tracks will not mix down as their sources are external to the MPC5000 In order to mix down external devices with the MPC5000 they must be plugged into the RECORD IN and mixed down as Input Thru Recorded Audio The eight Hard Disk tracks will be included in the mixdown Effects Effects will be included in the mixdown Mixer Automation Mixer automation will be performed on the mixdown Input Thru
125. NCE window will be displayed 02 In the Load into field select the destination sequence number Select the sequence number to load the data to 03 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start loading the data E Loading the ALL File You can load the ALL file which has sequence and song data When you load the ALL file all the sequences and songs which are currently in the MPC5000 will be replaced by the new data 01 Select the ALL file and load it The Load ALL SEQS amp SONGS File window will be displayed 02 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start loading the data E Loading Individual Sequences from the ALL File 01 Select the ALL file and load it The Load ALL SEQS amp SONGS File window will be displayed 02 Press the F3 SEQ button The Load a Sequence window will be displayed 03 In the Load file field select the sequence to load In the Load file field you can select sequence data from the ALL file 04 In the Load into field select the destination sequence Select the sequence number to load the data to 05 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start loading the data E Loading Only the Effect Set from the ALL File The ALL file has effect set file which has the effect setting information You can load only the effect set from the ALL file 01 Select the ALL file and load it Load ALL SEQS amp SONGS File window will be displayed 02 Press the F2 EFFECT button
126. NM Por sample Panning uu nem ae eot iU eet ti vat di scettur Aa d rut tu e eret c dev bu lal 122 E Changing Pitehwith Velocity cti A rt bie oe ova ea mida to ovi Dev An obra dU d ew nt ei EDS n Eo IE 122 E Playing several samples with one paladio 122 B Assigning One Sample across All Pads Auto Chromatio esses eene enne ener ener nennen 122 NH Simultaneous Playing of Multiple Pads adiens eU eb die apu or deut uetus diea aD Sa ed so R tU sd y IR GE MNA 123 B SSCS nr E d 123 W Using Filters with Sample Programs 5o E Dobis ee ete eee eas 125 MEE odi Nas tee tel LR 125 NH Controlling the Filter with ind 126 E Muli Pad Edit serri enO TREA EEE ASA I E A OAR EEEE SIRE DESEE S EEOAE ERT UNENEE 126 m Prostrani Tuner NECS 127 US erm 127 E Limiting the Number of Voices in a Procranys iiu oo eese saree eee 127 E Settine Voice Overa m td tdi tai 127 Y Niute Tarectic ais alli d s aiii 128 W Low Frequency Oscillators LEON id A 128 EE A Sa PRA A II A A ENT 129 NH Sample assi O dor tl US 129 KEYGROUP Type Program iausossacuxossaskEFU EE a LS O NH Creating die everolbPIOPLIDIL il AA A toba 130 W Adding Keyeroups to a Keygroup PA a 130 NH Sample Lover Crossfade A tesi dct tot wee E AAA sd dada wees itech dade dori uiu d ue 151 NH Pan me Individual Samples du iS reto ce an cse e oditaut A E 131 M Tuning and Root NO G se Goss Uode E a E teeta tuna NM E SIUE PEL UUE 131 E Ry ti ae Suo 132 E Keyeroup Lutie and T
127. QH ER UD UO ER Viewing Individual Disk Tracks coria AAA Mm Choosing the Track TRA EET T Y P 70 Editing Hard DISK TFaCKS sisi inci n oH RR EAE RC CHCR QE RACER RR RC REN A RR RN RR mW whch CG E Select multiple Akai cs ote air bett rd 70 E Fine Editing Ota Single Lak qo E E 70 Individual Edit FUN CUO occus ses sus sue asa uCR E ss eaaa araea Meo 71 NE C o aera erases EE rr KE 71 Mm CUCA PERS Abre CN E m em 71 BE NONNA Sa sonar dees 72 BNC e A EE 72 Deleting importing and Exporting Tracks eeeeeeee eee eere eee e eee ee eee Im T TT TENE 72 m A TE 72 EE Deor M M 73 NW Erasme HD Track Attia Oise decrescit A oet EA E eed buco ot ACRE Seat cds du oe EUM LOCA A alee 73 Mixing Hard DISK TEaCKS inira AERE REI VEDI aT eRe E Setting bee abu eere M 74 m Setting the level and pan ofa Track iS SS 74 E Assigning effects toa Tracki n A AD tO A LL E Ad TS ia AAA T A E 75 E Usine O LINK Controls with MIXER Modest ida tds 75 Mixer Automation iniciados Erasing HD Track AULOMAHGR us MUO WIN mee UU si BING er eatcla 76 Track Mix Access in HD RECORD Mode cens snnseeeeuuuuuuuuuuuuRRRRRSRRRRRRRRSEERRRERRSRSSEERENES Ms Sele nint Bos dd s do 77 E R
128. REO OUT jacks so you can hear what you are recording When unselected you will be able to hear back what was recorded Track Matrix The Track Matrix shows which track the left and right inputs are being recorded to allowing for quick reference These will illuminate when the selected track is armed Recording Hard Disk Tracks To record your first Hard Disk tracks do the following 01 Add Hard Disk tracks to the song you wish to record to This is accomplished as detailed in the previous section Adding Hard Disk Tracks to a Song on page 67 02 Select the Source field and select the desired input source For our example let s choose ANALOG 03 Select which tracks the left and right inputs should be recorded to by selecting the corresponding tracks in the Rec In L R fields For our example let s select tracks 1 and 2 04 Arm the desired tracks in the song by pressing the F5 L ARM and F6 R ARM buttons 05 Play the source you wish to record Adjust the GAIN knob to get the best volume level without clipping or distortion 06 Press REC and PLAY START This will start the recording process 07 Record your performance along with your song Press the STOP button to end the recording when you are finished il Recording additional tracks To record additional tracks to the song do the following 01 Select the Rec In L R fields and select the next tracks you wish to record to For our example let
129. RT E IL AR I RHO e ve i la 5 e TI e O e m O 6 ASA te f D 5 AM CO gl EFIE Cer 7 en E POWER E A F Xs gt o E s M TEN MUT lA QUT D TEA AADS ih T e Qa t h Yo Ns p mes ie Rc f s emu r A A Ss AT A tty a AME pe e E u A i TI ad LU bang A TAE ACUERDA iapa ih i N ip 43 STEREO OUT Jacks These are your MPC5000 s main outputs Connect these jacks to your recorder mixer or speakers RECORD IN Jacks 1 4 Mic Combo Use these inputs to record samples into your MPC and record streaming disk tracks to the internal Hard Disk The RECORD IN jacks are 1 4 Mic combo jacks allowing either type of connector to be used The input level for this jack is controlled using the REC GAIN knob 45 MIC LINE Switch This switch sets whether the source plugged into the RECORD IN is a mic level or a line level source If set to MIC the input will be preamped for optimal level 46 PHONO IN Jacks RCA Use these jacks to connect a turntable or a CD player with RCA connections to your MPC The input level for this jack is controlled using the REC GAIN knob For best performance be sure to set the INPUT phono line switch properly 47 ADAT Digital Out This output is used to connect ADAT capable digital devices This connection uses an optical cable to send 8 tracks of ADAT digital audio to a recording device For more informa
130. SETUP This will open the SETUP Tab 02 Select the Knob Slider Take Over Mode field and select YES Take Over Mode will now be enabled Tip Take Over Mode applies to the TrkMIX PrgMIX HD MIX SYNTH pages and EFFECTS EDIT page Q LINKs set in Q LINK mode always work as immediate access regardless of Take Over Mode setting Input Thru The MPC5000 can mix the incoming signal from RECORD IN or S PDIF IN with the play back sound from the MPC5000 Inrut Thru SEG You can also route the Input Thru signal to one of the four effects busses Hode and you can control the level pan effects send etc of incoming signal Level with the Q LINK sliders and knobs Pan Fr Send Amt E Applying effects to an incoming signal 01 Press the INPUT THRU button The INPUT page will be displayed You can also get to the INPUT page by pressing the F4 INPUT button in MIXER mode 02 In the Input thru field select ON 03 Set the Src field to ANALOG You can also set DIGITAL here to be able to listen to digital S PDIF sources 04 Set the Mode field to STEREO MONO LEFT or MONO RIGHT 93 05 Set the level field to an appropriate level If you select ANALOG in the Source field adjust the REC GAIN volume with using the level meter in the RECORD mode in advance If you select DIGITAL in the Source field the REC GAIN volume is not used 06 Set Pan as desired 07 Set the FX field to one of the four
131. T SO 04 In the Track status field select the track status after conversion to a sequence REFERENCED TO 1ST SQ The setting data such as MIDI output Mixer setting Tempo etc of each track in the 1st Sequence of the Song will be used for all tracks in the following sequences CAHCEL 65 MUTE TRACKS IGNORED The muted tracks in the sequences of the Song will not be converted MERGED ON MIDI CHANNEL The track in the sequence of the Song will be merged to the track according to the MIDI output channel For example The track data of MIDI output channels 1A 16A will be merged to tracks 1 16 The track data of MIDI output channels 1B 16B will be merged to track 17 32 The track data of MIDI output channels 1C 16C will be merged to track 33 48 The track data of MIDI output channels 1D 16D will be merged to track 49 64 Note When using MERGED ON MIDI CHANNEL if the track is set to OFF in the MIDI field in the MAIN page the data in the track will not be merged after Convert Song to Seq If you wish to convert the tracks for an internal program set the MIDI output channel for the track temporarily 05 Press F5 DO IT The song will be converted to a sequence Note during Song Conversion When selected REFERENCED TO 1ST SQ and MUTE TRACKS IGNORED When you convert a song the specific settings used in each track within the sequence such as track type MIDI channel setting selection of the program etc will
132. THM High Frequency Rhythm Section 06 MFREQ RHYTHM Middle Frequency Rhythm Section 07 LFREQ RHYTHM Low Frequency Rhythm Section 08 PERCUSSION 09 LFREQ PERC Low Frequency Percussion 10 STACCATO 11 LFREQ SLOW Low Frequency Slow Music 12 MUSIC 1 13 MUSIC 2 14 MUSIC 3 15 SOFT PERC Soft Percussion 16 HFREQ ORCH High Frequency Orchestra 17 LFREQ ORCH Low Frequency Orchestra 18 SLOW ORCH Slow Orchestra Adjust You can use this to tweak the selected preset If your selected preset is close to what you re looking for but still needs a little fine tuning try a few different settings here until you get the best result A value will help improve high frequency and percussive sounds while a value will help improve bass sound Most of the time this can be left at zero 06 Press F5 DO IT The Keep or Retry window will be displayed after executing the Pitch shift Lengthy samples will take longer to process New name field Enters the new name for the sample F2 PLAY KEEF Keers as neu samrFle ODER W Overwrites original Auditions the new sample F3 OVER W rely PLAY WOWER WW RETRY W KEEF JE Deletes the original sample and keep the new sample 109 F4 RETRY Returns to the Sample Edit window without keeping the new sample F5 KEEP Keeps the new sample with the name set in the New Name field E Gain This function allows the volume of a sample
133. The Copy Program window will be displayed 04 In the New name field set the name for the new program For more information regarding setting the name see the Setting Names section on Page 20 05 Press F3 DO IT Copying the program will start To cancel the operation press F4 CANCEL instead E Deleting a program You can remove a program from the memory of the MPC5000 01 In the Pgm field in PROGRAM mode select the program that you wish to delete 02 Press the WINDOW button The Program window will be displayed 03 Press F2 DELETE button The Delete Program window will be displayed 04 Press F5 DO IT button This deletes the selected program E Deleting all programs You can delete all the program data in the memory at the same time 01 In the PROGRAM mode select the Pgm field and press the WINDOW button The Program window will be displayed 02 Press F2 DELETE button The Delete Program window will be displayed 03 Press F3 ALL PG button The Delete ALL Programs window will be displayed 04 Press F5 DO IT button This deletes all the programs E Setting a Program Change Number You can switch the programs assigned to a track within the sequence by setting the program change numbers in each program You do not have to set the program change numbers if you do not need to switch the programs To switch the programs program change events are used You can enter these events in the ST
134. The Load Effect File window will be displayed 03 In the Load file field select the effect set to load 04 In the Load into field select the destination effect set Select the effect set number to load the data to If you select ALL in the Load file field the current effect set in the unit will be replaced by the data from the ALL file 05 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start loading the data 174 Saving and Loading DISK Mode E Loading a Folder You can load a folder and load all the files within the folder at the same time You can load program sample and ALL files 01 Select a folder and load it The Load Folder window will be displayed 02 Make a setting in the Replace same files in memory field You can set how to handle the file when you already have the data with the same name as the loading file in the unit NO The MPC5000 will not load the file with the same name YES The MPC5000 will overwrite the data in the unit with the loaded file 03 Press the F5 DO IT button The loading will begin Automatically Create Programs from a Folder When loading a folder the MPC5000 also has the ability to load only samples and create a new program The Samples will automatically be assigned to each pad of the new program If more than 64 samples are in the folder an additional program will be created These programs will be named Program followed by a unique number starting at 001 To load all samples
135. Total Bars You can switch the sequence loop features on or off by turning the DATA wheel In this field you can only set whether the loop is on or off You can set the start and end points of the loop in the LOOP window 02 Press the WINDOW button The Loop window will be displayed as shown on the right The MPC5000 will repeat the part you set in the First Bar and Last Bar fields If you set END in the Last Bar field the last bar of the sequence is always the end of the loop Even if you edit a sequence and change its length the last bar of the sequence is still the end of the loop The Total Bars field displays the length of the bars to loop The Last Bar field and the Total Bars field work together Changing the value in the Last Bar field also changes the value in the Number Total Bars field 03 Press F4 CLOSE button This closes the window and goes back to MAIN page E Extending the Sequence Length Automatically Usually the length of a sequence is set based on the value of the Bars field in the MAIN page However when you are recording or overdubbing with the Loop field set to OFF the length of a sequence will be extended automatically For example when the Bars field is set to 2 if you start recording with the loop field set to OFF the recording will continue after second bar until you press the STOP button And the number of the bar when you actually pressed the STOP button will be s
136. Vocal3 A 5 band formant filter based on an idealized model of the vocal tract Pole Selects how many poles the selected filter will be A 2 pole filter will have a milder effect where an 8 pole filter will Pole E have a more extreme effect This field also appears on the Basic page See page 135 for more information KeyK gt Cutoff kesk E This parameter sets whether the filter frequency rises and falls to match the keys you play or stays constant CutorF es regardless of the keys you play A setting of O means the filter frequency will remain constant across the keyboard a If the key track parameter is set to 100 the filter tracks the keyboard perfectly and with enough resonance can be played as if it were an oscillator The corresponding Q Link AFTER button toggles whether the effect of this modulation will be positive or negative Negative settings mean the filter will grow darker as higher notes are played 139 Envi gt Cutoff Enyi E This parameter determines how much of an effect the envelope will have on the filter The corresponding Q Link Cutoff AFTER button toggles whether the effect of this modulation will be positive or negative This field also appears on A the Basic page See page 135 for more information LFO gt Cutoff LFD G The knob sets the amount of effect the selected LFO will have on filter cutoff The corresponding Q Link AFTER Cutoff o button toggles whether the effect of this modulation wi
137. W Button This is separate from the MAIN Timing Correct and is used exclusively for Pad Track Mute The following divisions are available Mute Timina Correct 2 Bar Hote Walue EME 1 Bar 1 4 1 4 3 CLOSE 1 8 1 8 3 1 16 Off Change Sequences in Track Mute Mode You have the ability to change sequences when in TRACK MUTE Mode To ai 54 865 x change Sequences in TRACK MUTE Mode do the following How 001 004 605 Sar lioMe rrechorusl _ 01 Press the TRACK MUTE Button This will open the TRACK MUTE Page as shown on the right 02 Press the F1 TKMUTE button to select the TRACK MUTE Tab lee ec scere Pe 03 Select the SQ field cede E prec TE ac 83 04 Press the buttons or turn the DATA wheel to select the next sequence The next sequence to be played will be indicated with an gt as shown on the right The Sequence will change to the selected sequence at the end of the current sequence Program with Pads Pad Mute How egy 61 Bad Pam Prosram 641 You can mute unmute individual sounds in a particular program on a Ri3 Hi4 AIS E particular track in real time by hitting the pads This is useful when you Se Se la tei af ea have several samples assigned to different pads and you wish to remove wan Ale ci dae POM CE a particular sound or isolate specific drum hits AN ental Fils 01 Press the TRACK MUTE button 02 Press F3 PHMUTE This brings up the Pad Mute page Now fie
138. You can use the DATA wheel to move through the list to select different folders Pressing the left right CURSOR buttons will move through the directories For example as shown in the picture above when you scroll with the DATA wheel to select the AUTOLOAD folder and then press the right cursor button again the AUTOLOAD folder will be displayed above the Directory List and the contents of the AUTOLOAD folder will be displayed If you press the left cursor button the Directory List will go back up to the ROOT directory Tip The ROOT folder indicates the top directory of the Hard Disk There is no other upper directory 05 Select the folder you wish to save the data to If you wish to create a new folder proceed to the next step If not proceed to the next section which details saving each file type Saving to Compact Flash In order to save to Compact Flash replace HARD DRIVE with CF CARD in step 3 above Note Make sure that you insert the compact flash card completely into the slot Tere MZ E Creating a New Folder lans Har Ssnele You can create a new folder and select it as the destination 01 Press F2 SAVE to enter the SAVE tab 02 Select the directory in which you wish to create a new folder The new folder will be created in the folder currently selected The name and path of the current folder will be displayed above the navigation window Free 262 6MB COPY IDELETENRENAMEN HEW EDIT 166 Saving a
139. a MIDI OUT D MIDI OFF 35 E Changing a Track Name 01 In the Track field in the MAIN page select a track you wish to ive Hida HEE EHA change the name on 02 Press the WINDOW button Le E The TRACK NAME window will be displayed as shown Press inc dec or move dial to change name Default Hame For more information for setting the name see the Setting the name section on Continuous Sample Track OFF Page 20 E DELE Elsa CLOSE CORY bad 04 Press F4 CLOSE button 03 In the Track Name field enter the new name This closes the window and goes back to the MAIN page E Changing the Default Name for a Track Usually when you create a new track the name will be automatically set as default Track 3 indicates track number You can change the default track name 01 In the MAIN page select the Track field 02 Press the WINDOW button ae eee The TRACK NAME window will be displayed as shown sel Hence frak Al 03 In the Default Name field enter the new name Pre AEE For more information about setting the name see the Setting the name section on A dial to chanse name Page 20 Default Hame 04 Press F4 CLOSE Continuous Suele Track OFF This closes the window and goes back to the MAIN page GAETE ASA COPY E Copying a Track Y track t ther track ou can Copy a track to anotner trac rar BEI 3i LU 01 In the Track field of the MAIN mode select a track to copy
140. a Sample Program s specific pads This will allow you to send out individual pads to an external source such as an effects processor mixer or a recording device Tip Each track s settings can be viewed in detail by selecting the track and pressing WINDOW LI m x E Setting the Output 01 In the MIXER mode press F1 PrgMix The PrgMix page will be displayed Each column indicates pad 1 though 16 from the left and the currently selected pad is highlighted The row at the top is the OUT field where you where you will assign a specific pad to a specific assignable output Note Different pad banks can be selected by pressing the corresponding PAD BANK button 02 Hit the desired pad The column for the selected pad will now be highlighted 03 Select the desired output in the OUT row You can use the CURSOR buttons to move to each field in MIXER mode and you can adjust each level with the DATA wheel The following choices are available ST The pad will be output to the stereo out 88 MIXER Mode 1 2 The pad will be output stereo to ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 1 2 3 4 The pad will be output stereo to ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 3 4 5 6 The pad will be output stereo to ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 5 6 7 8 The pad will be output stereo to ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 7 8 1 8 The pad will be output in MONO to the corresponding ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT output Tip You can also easily change the settings for tra
141. a file The MPC5000 can load files from Memory Card Internal Flash Memory the Internal Hard Disk or the Internal CD Drive optional This is done in the LOAD page which is accessed by pressing the MODE button and then the PAD 3 DISK ll Selecting a File To select a file to load proceed as follows 01 Press the MODE button and the PAD 3 DISK The LOAD page will be displayed If another page is displayed press F1 LOAD 02 Select the location you wish to load data from ROM Flash B Hard Drive CCD Drive The MPC5000 will load the data from the internal preset memory Normally when you switch on the MPC5000 it will load the data from the preset memory but you can load these files individually by selecting ROM Flash here MEMORY CARD The MPC5000 will load the files from the memory card in the card slot HARD DISK The MPC5000 will load the files from the internal HARD DISK CD Optional The MPC5000 will load the files from CD ROM disk in the internal CD Drive Optional 03 In the Directory List select a file to be loaded Files can be selected by turning the DATA wheel Use the left and right CURSOR buttons to navigate through the directory For more on navigating through directories see Selecting the destination on page 165 04 Select the file you wish to load 05 Press the F6 DO IT button The MPC5000 will load the selected file The next procedures differ depending on the type o
142. a quick fix shortcut to quickly get into synth programming E Creating a Synth Program To create a new synth program do the following Prosram j 01 Press MODE and PAD 6 PROGRAM This will enter PROGRAM mode D Prosram Mame Tor_Set 02 Select the Pgm field and press WINDOW E MIDI Prosram Change The Program window will be displayed as shown 03 Press the F3 NEW button x ADELETER HEW s The New Program window will be displayed as shown ricca poer LEM Hoi Prosram 04 In the New name field turn the DATA wheel The name window will be displayed Set the name for the new program and press f Hew Hame Program Gas the F5 DO IT button For more information about setting the name see the Setting Names section on page 20 id Program Tyre EXE 05 In the Type field select Synth ENCES DO ITE 06 Press F5 DO IT The new program will be created and the Basic screen will be displayed The new program is a default template of a very basic synth sound You can play this sound by hitting the pads E Editing with Q LINK Controls In addition to the CURSOR buttons and the DATA wheel each 09 AFTER E parameter in SYNTH Mode is editable by moving its corresponding Q Quo LINK control allowing for quick and intuitive editing of each parameter JD The image to the right displays a chart of which Q Link control 207 S corresponds to which control on the screen Every parameter in SYNTH JD ap
143. ability to produce such an incredible variety of sound comes from its basic design it electronically simulates the fundamental components of sound and gives you control over each part The term synthesizer means to combine parts into a whole And that s exactly what a synthesizer does the essential ingredients of sound are presented as separate parts which are then re assembled as an audible sound The MPC5000 s synth generates sound by emulating or modeling the behavior of an analog synthesizer Oscillators generate the raw sounds The oscillators are then fed into the filters which in turn are fed into the amplifiers As the signal moves through that basic path you are able to adjust the mix of the signal at several points apply various modulations and envelopes and add effects In this way the MPC5000 s synth can generate a virtually limitless variety of sounds Voltage Controlled Oscillators VCO The oscillators are where sound is born You may have heard that what you perceive as sound is simply vibrating air molecules hitting your eardrums That vibration has to start somewhere and in the MPC5000 s synth section it comes from the oscillators By varying the frequency of the vibration the oscillators can produce different pitches which are heard as musical notes By adjusting the waveform type and shape the oscillators can produce various harmonics which are heard as different timbres Each of the MPC5000 s synth voices contain
144. ack Press to unlock the track This will toggle the TRACK LOCK Icon The icon will indicate the track status as shown below E Track is unlocked ri B Track is locked Chapter 6 GRID EDIT Mode The MPC5000 has the GRID EDIT mode for editing or entering Pad events and Note events in a sequence In GRID EDIT mode you can enter and edit Events in the Graphic Matrix Editor About Grid Edit Each track in the MPC5000 contains performance data entered with the pads or with an external MIDI keyboard In GRID EDIT mode you can enter or edit Copy Delete Move etc the Pad Event MIDI notes or controller data on a graphical matrix Pressing the MODE button and then pressing PAD 14 GRID EDIT will allow you to enter GRID EDIT mode GRID EDIT mode s view will change depending on what type of track is being viewed M T j A M When the current track TYPE is set to DRUM on the main page See E E Ri page 21 the track will be displayed in a Step Sequencer style as Li above This allows for easy editing of DRUM type tracks in a matrix display il MIDI View When the current track TYPE is set to MIDI on the main page See page 21 the track will be displayed in a Piano Roll style as above This allows for easy editing of MIDI type tracks in a matrix display This view is useful to also see the duration of each note played Which octave is being viewed can be selected by changing the field
145. ad when the track mute page is displayed switches the track mute setting of that track instead of playing the sound E Solo Function With the Solo function you can play back only the selected track 01 Hit the pad that corresponds to the track that you wish to play while pressing the F6 SOLO button F6 SOLO will be highlighted and MPC5000 will play only the selected track while it mutes the other tracks You can switch the tracks to play by hitting a pad 02 Pressing F6 SOLO deactivates the solo function E Selecting Instant Track Mute The MP5000 has the ability to mute tracks using two different methods Method one ignore Note On messages This is how legacy MPC track muting has worked This method allows samples and notes that are playing to finish playing through their entire length This is useful when using loops and you want to have a loop finish playing to the end of a measure then not play the next time the sequence loops Method two is Instant Track Muting which sends MIDI track volume This is a method that is new to the MPC5000 which is useful for when you want to have the track muted immediately The advantage of this method is that the loop will continue to play but at zero volume allowing the loop to continue playing when the track is unmuted Using this method stuttering beat juggling between two loops and other DJ style techniques can be employed 81 To Turn on Instant Track Mute do the followin
146. ads ita 16 MIDI SY NG Mods MODE IPad S usiaunaienceta iens nbl UR RR pecu n Va Ae a Ud 16 OTHER Mode MODE Pad p mentee i doli 16 ARP Mode IMODE JH Pad Pollas ts lO is 16 EFFECTS Mode IMODE Pad TU diario lala dis USE 17 SRO EDIT Mode IMODE Pad F Di AL NAAA IA ARAS TAE eode 17 STEP EDEP Mode MODE Pad lisas nta tia 17 GRID EDIT Mode MODE F Pad 14 rate a a ETEA EE a EA E Pa dutem o areae Re HERR 17 SONG Mode MODE Padilla cest edreraacssadcca a i e A Ea EE sn colis aids 17 HID RECORD Mode TMODEJH Pad LOI Jarrones teea EEE EEE E E 17 SNTE Programas SANTO ia ect hee cates a a E a eo uet a a a ie aaaea ecu e TR do uta aS is ds 17 Chapter 2 Basic Operational teta E OMAIN P3 uc So 19 EH Cursor Cursor Buttons DATA Wheel sine v OB DURAS ORE uta I Ad reacios 19 E ner Ie URS 19 LIMEN EpL On Betis 19 E MODE Brno PE 20 Setting NAMES nonis a A MEEEESRNFFEAE FRE KE MEE EE NR NE B Entering letters with DATA Wheel 4 icit Y d m RD be cla ida eoo vases nal date a petas Ease Se toe e De Iesu 20 B Fntering letters with the Numeric Keypdado uen ertet terii rex emat tat hu ette Se eov Ed toda Be cec e Sexo code 20 Chapter 3 The Sequencer inire maet I qst Pss EIU MISES NIE PES PI SEIS EIUS PPS EIL SSEE LUE Main Page ii dob OO OUR CROGOD OR RN E d da E NON 21 N S
147. age 20 04 Press F5 DO IT The MPC5000 will start copying the sample To cancel the operation press F4 CANCEL instead E Deleting a sample You can remove a sample from the memory of the MPC5000 Delete Samrle 01 In the Sample field in TRIM mode select a sample to delete 02 Press WINDOW Sample EH BL F 2PP2 The Sample window will be displayed E Pressinm DO IT will erase i this zamrle 03 Press F2 DELETE The Delete Sample window will be displayed Pet de e Delete sample window WI e alsplaye A ALL Hees oo IT i 04 Press F5 DO IT This deletes the sample you have selected E Deleting all samples You can delete all the sample data in the memory at one time 01 In the TRIM page select the Sample field and press fg Delete All Samrles WINDOW The Sample window will be displayed Pee me bo IT n 02 Press F2 DELETE T will erase E E ALL samrlesz The Delete Sample window will be displayed 03 Press F3 ALL The Delete ALL Samples window will be displayed 04 Press F5 DO IT This deletes all the samples from the MPC5000 s memory E Assign a Sample to a Pad directly in TRIM Mode The MPC5000 can directly assign samples to a pad To do so do the following 01 Press and hold the SHIFT button The screen on the right will be displayed 02 Hit the pad you wish to assign the sample to The Sample will be assigned to the selected pad in the current program
148. ake a moment to familiarize yourself with the following terms and concepts since you l encounter them throughout this manual Sequence 99 ill Sequence A sequence is the most basic building block of music you can compose on the MPC MIDI information from the MPC s pads buttons and Q LINK controls or an external keyboard are recorded to tracks within a sequence Each sequence has 64 tracks and the MPC5000 can hold up to 99 separate sequences at one time The length of a sequence can be set from 1 to 999 bars and you can theoretically create an entire song using only one sequence However the MPC has a special SONG mode that lets you arrange several short sequences together to create a song This allows you to create a sequence for each section of your song and to arrange and rearrange these sections however you d like For example by creating a separate sequence for the verse chorus and hook of a song you can use Song mode to quickly arrange the verse chorus and hook in any order you d like This saves you from having to repeat the same section such as the chorus many times throughout the song More importantly SONG mode makes editing and re arranging your song easy since you can simply change the order of sequences or number of repetitions for each sequence instead of re recording the entire song Song mode is also where you can record audio tracks directly to the Hard Disk This will be discussed further later on Sequenc
149. al signal and the delayed signal Feedbk Sets the amount of times the delayed signal will be repeated This control is capable of self oscillation at maximum value Cutoff Controls the frequency at which the filter will affect the incoming signal Res Controls the emphasis of the frequency at the cutoff point Delay Analog Delay Analog Sync Analog Delay is similar to Mono Delay except that it s designed to sound like the unique voicings of an analog style Bucket Brigade style delay This delay has a unique character to it generally warming up the sound by adding subtle inaccuracies in phase and timing WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Sets the amount of time between the original signal and the delayed signal Feedbk Sets the amount of times the delayed signal will be repeated This control is capable of self oscillation at maximum value Ramp Ramp time is the time it takes to change tempo This is like motor inertia At max it takes a long time and the tape stretch effect is heard most At minimum the motor s speed is instant 156 Effects Delay Tape BeatSync Tape Delay is a system that uses an analog tape and a series of tape heads to produce an echo effect The original signal is written to the tape and then reread by the heads This delay type yields a very distinct echo sound often heard in Reggae and Dub style music as well as
150. allows you to select the particular pad and event type you are viewing FX AUTO This field displays FX Automation Events on the selected track When this parameter is selected additional fields will be displayed which allows you to select the particular Effect Bus and parameter number 1 12 02 To edit individual events in Controller View use the DATA Wheel or the CURSOR LEFT RIGHT buttons to select the event You can choose to DELETE this event by pressing the F4 DELETE button You can also COPY PASTE and MOVE Events by pressing and holding F3 EDIT and selecting the corresponding edit button 03 To edit an individual event with more detail select the event and press the WINDOW button This will display the EVENTS Window Here events can be individually edited with more detail or deleted by pressing the F5 DELETE button o aM LOSE LELE T E Chapter 7 SONG Mode In SONG mode you can set the order of multiple sequences and play them in a series SONG mode is useful when you are creating a song by combining short sequences You can check the structure of an entire song while working so you can finish the song easily You can also perform direct to Hard Disk recordings here in SONG mode as well For more on Hard Disk recording see HD RECORD on page 6 7 Note MIDI recording is disabled in SONG Mode Structure of a song The MPC5000 can handle up to 20 songs Each song has 250 steps You can
151. alue simply move the cursor to the FX row and use the DATA wheel OF No effect will be used 1 to 4 The effect bus number selected 1 to 4 will be used The Pad sound will be sent to the selected effect section 04 Adjust the SEND level by selecting the control in the SEND row by turning the DATA wheel The display in the SEND row indicates the output setting The graphical knob display in the FX row indicates the current send level Increasing this level will increase the amount of effect for the selected pad Note the SEND knob in the SEND row will be disabled if the selected FX bus has DIRECT OUT Disabled For more information on DIRECT OUT see page 150 E Muting Pads Individual Pads can be muted To mute a specific pad do the following 01 In the MIXER mode press F1 PrgMix The PrgMix page will be displayed Each column indicates pad 1 though 16 from the left and the currently selected pad is highlighted The row at the top is the OUT field where you where you will assign a specific pad to a specific assignable output Note Different pad banks can be selected by pressing the corresponding PAD BANK button 02 Hit the desired pad The column for the selected pad will now be highlighted 03 In the MUTE row Displayed as M scroll with the DATA wheel to select one of the following Pad will play as normal Pad is muted Viewing Program Info Each Program track can be selected and viewed in detail
152. ample to before attempting a Direct Recording 01 Press MAIN button Oel MESI II MENS Direct Recordina The Main page will be displayed 02 In the Type field press WINDOW button The Direct Recording window will be displayed If you press the F5 Turn ON Pressing Turn n will enter button the window will be closed and the MAIN page will be displayed with waiting DIRECT RECORDING mode for the Direct Recording If you press the F4 CANCEL the window will be closed and the MAIN page will E i E be displayed CLOSE Turned 03 Select F5 Turn ON 04 The MAIN page IS displayed and the Type field becomes pee m Now BB1 81 888 Sequence Bi Seayence H3 The MPC5000 is now in stand by mode for Direct Recording You can start the BPM 120 0 Es sequence freely in stand by mode for Direct Recording Time Sia F6 RECORD BHl Track l The MPC5000 will start the recording Program Blue Pad RD T 9Fe Direct Recaordina Hute F5 CANCEL Welocitux 10 MIDI The MPC5000 will go back to the ordinary MAIN page CLICK EA RECORRE F2 CLICK The MPC5000 will go to the Click Metronome page For more information see the section entitled Click Metronome on page 27 Note In Direct Recording mode you cannot change the Sequence Track or Track type If you want to change them press F5 CANCEL and go back to the MAIN page 05 Press the PLAY or PLAY START button for playing the sequence 06 Press the
153. ample tune REAL TIME If you change the Q LINK slider knob while the sound is playing back the sound will be changed When REAL TIME is selected the information of Q LINK slider knob is recorded as a Q LINK event not as Note Variation data 06 In the Parameter field select the parameter you wish to control When the REAL TIME is selected in the Change field TUNE This controls the sample s pitch Sample Programs only LEVEL This controls the sample s volume level CUTOFF This controls the cutoff frequency of the Filter RESONANCE This controls the resonance value of the Filter PAN This control the sample s position in the stereo field ATTACK This controls the attack time of the Amp Envelope DECAY This controls the decay time of the Amp Envelope RELEASE This controls the release time of the Amp Envelope FX SEND This controls the FX Send level for the selected pad When the NOTE ON is selected in the Change field TUNE This controls the sample s pitch Sample Programs only LAYER This allows you to alter the HIGH and LOW Range at which the Event will be triggered Sample Programs only CUTOFF This controls the cutoff frequency of the Filter RESONANCE This controls the resonance value of the Filter PAN This control the sample s position in the stereo field ATTACK This controls the attack time of the Amp Envelope DECAY This controls the decay time of the Amp Envelope RELEASE This
154. and PAD 3 DISK l To enable this mode connect a 03 Press the F4 USB key This brings up the USB page which you use to connect the MPC5000 to the PC To exit this mode dismount the HPCSBBBR drives from our comruter 04 Connect the MPC5000 s USB slave jack to the PC s USB host jack Mac users Then unrlus USB cable via USB cable LOAD BUNT 05 Press F6 MOUNT to mount 06 When you connect the MPC5000 to the PC for the first time the message Found New Hardware will be displayed and follow the instruction on the display Once the PC recognizes the MPC5000 its Removal icon will be displayed in the task bar In the Device Manager the MPC5000 s CF Card and Hard Disk will be displayed as a USB Mass Storage Device 07 In My Computer the MPC5000 s CF Card and Hard Disk are both displayed as a removable disk To save the data to a PC select the data and drag and drop it from the removable disk to the Hard Disk To load the data select the data and drag and drop it from the Hard Disk to the removal media 08 When you finish the data transfer click the Removal icon on the PC s task bar and select the Stop USB Mass Storage Device Drive Note In the a letter is displayed which indicates the drive in the PC When you select to stop the device the USB Mass Storage Device is ready to remove safely dialog box will be displayed 09 Remove the USB cable from the USB jacks of the MPC5000 and the PC
155. and red being most warm sounding 137 PWM PWM stands for Pulse Width Modulation This waveform is special in that it is a Pulse wave whose shape is hard wired to LFO 2 This gives this waveform a range of sounds from a classic warbling tone to a buzzing harsh sound rich with overtones When this wave is selected an additional knob becomes available called DEPTH This knob controls amount of control LFO2 has over the width of the PWM oscillator Env1 VCO1 This knob sets how much effect envelope 1 will have on the pitch of VCO1 The corresponding Q Link Enui E AFTER button toggles whether the effect of the envelope will be positive or negative Wool o This is most commonly used in conjunction with the Osc XMod control i SEMI FINE Selecting this control will toggle the TUNE controls range Semi O Fine E Semi O When set to SEMI the TUNE control adjusts the tuning of each oscillator Tune c ming c ne T in semitones Each VCO can be tuned four octaves by semitones 2r 18 E When set to FINE the TUNE control adjusts the tuning of each oscillator in 100 of one semitone This is useful for slightly detuning oscillators to fatten up the sound or add a chorusing type effect Lfo gt VCO1 Lfo E This knob sets how much effect the LFO will have on the pitch of VCO1 This is useful for use in col a conjunction with the Osc XMod control B SYNC Selecting this checkbox forces the frequency of VCO
156. and striking a pad Keygroups will be selected by number In other words striking pad 16 will select keygroup 16 Striking a pad a second time will select keygroups beyond 64 IE striking pad 1 2x will select keygroup 65 To select a keygroup you are currently playing press and hold LOCATE while pressing a pad or pressing a MIDI note on an external keyboard Additional presses of the same key will cycle through all of the keygroups that the particular note belongs to E Sample Layer Crossfade Samples can be crossfaded to add realism to a velocity switch This can en i Fl Mad yield smoother transitions between samples in a particular Keygroup A Turn on Crossfading for a Keygroup do the following E Kari GEL Fro de D gore Play VELOCITY 01 Select one of the Sample Slots Crossfade H Laser 1 HOTE DH Fan 02 Press the WINDOW button HOTE OH Pan i HOTE OH Fan the PLAY MODE window will be displayed HOTE ON Par 03 Select the Crossfade field and set this field to ON A CLUSE B Panning Individual Samples a Plau Mode While in the PLAY MODE Window samples can individually panned To eee Eee pan samples select and edit the PAN field for each of the 4 sample Sone Plau UELDCITS layers A Crossfade OFF 3 Layer 1 HOTE OW Pan HOTE OH Fan HOTE OW Fan HOTE OH Fan CLOSE B Tuning and Root Note Samples in Keygroups can individually be tuned like in a sample program and additionally
157. ary sample The tempo of the patched phrase sample will change with the LOOP COMET EDIT sequence tempo Changing the Tune and Tempo of a Patched Phrase Sample If you press the WINDOW button in the Sample field of the TRIM page the Sample window will be displayed You can set the sample name tune and the original tempo of the patched phrase Sample name 9 o A new name can be entered here Samrle Hame EEN Tunez 66 8 Tune This sets the pitch of the patched phrase Orisnal Temro 183 Original tempo This sets the tempo of the patched phrase The Original tempo setting is important for playing the patched phrase correctly If the patched phrase i DELETE AMA COPY sample cannot be played with the correct tempo adjust the Original tempo Pressing F4 CLOSE will go back to the TRIM page Pressing F2 DELETE will remove the selected file from memory 115 Editing Regions By using the Edit function in the CHOP SHOP Page you can divide one region into two regions or combine continuous regions into one region You can also extract the selected region as another sample 04 In the CHOP SHOP Page press the F6 EDIT button The Region Edit window will be displayed 05 In the Edit field select the type you wish to edit E EXTRACT Extracts the selected region as another sample 01 In the Edit field select EXTRACT i Region r Edit ExTRACT You select the number of the region you wish
158. ately 01 Adjust the start end points Set the desired part with the start and end points 02 Press the F6 EDIT button The Sample Edit window will be displayed 03 In the Edit field select EXTRACT 104 Sample Editing TRIM Mode 04 In the New name field set the name for the new sample 05 Press the F5 DO IT button The part between the start end points will be saved as a new sample Converting a Stereo Sample to Mono STEREO TO MONO This function will convert the current sample to a new mono sample 01 In the Sample field select the sample you wish to convert 02 Press F6 EDIT The Sample Edit window will be displayed 03 In the Edit field select STEREO TO MONO 04 Select how you want the file converted The following options are available Left The Conversion will only use the left channel for conversion Right The Conversion will only use the right channel for conversion Sum The conversion will combine the left and right audio channels to a single mono channel 05 In the New name field set the name for the new sample 06 Press F5 DO IT The current sample will be copied to a new sample and converted to MONO It may take some time to process depending on the length of the sample Sample window features Pressing the WINDOW button in the Sample field bring up the Sample window In the Sample window you can make several settings for the selected sample E Changing t
159. atically assign to the 5 Orisinal Keu Z6 AM1 selected pad Tune 66 06 Hew FGM Hame Prosram B63 04 Select the Tune column and press the WINDOW button CO IT NEUES 123 The Pitch Function window will be displayed 05 Press F5 AUTO to open the Auto Chromatic Assign window In the Source and Original key fields the display characters show the MIDI note number and drum pad number 36 A01 is MIDI note 36 pad bank A drum pad number 1 06 Select the sound and MIDI note number to be assigned in the Source field You can select the sound with the drum pads or the DATA wheel the name of the sound also appears Note The parameters of the sound selected here will be copied to each note 07 In the Original key field select the note on the MIDI keyboard drum pad which will play the original pitch of the sound You can also use the Tune setting to apply an offset to the original pitch This setting will affect each note 08 In the New PGM name field you can enter a new name for the Chromatic program to be created 09 Press DO IT to create a new auto chromatically assigned program E Simultaneous Playing of Multiple Pads Simultaneous play will allow the triggering of up to four other pads by hitting just one pad To turn on simultaneous play do the following 01 Press MODE PAD 6 to enter PROGRAM Mode Fam Top Set 02 Press F4 SIMULT Pad AGI TOPRIM Simultaneous Play EM This will open t
160. ave your work on either a memory card or the internal Hard Disk E Memory Card Compact flash memory is similar to the Hard Drive but in a portable format allowing you to take your projects with you or to back up your data About Memory Cards There are several types of memory cards available today The MPC5000 supports type I and type II compact flash cards only so please make sure you purchase the correct type of card 16 Introduction Operating Modes The MPC5000 has several different modes of operation Each of these modes handles specific tasks such as arranging your sequences SONG mode or recording your own samples REC SAMPLE mode Each mode can be accessed using the MPC5000 s drum pads To enter these modes press the MODE button and tap the PADIS STEPEDT E SADEDT PADIS SONG PAD16_HD RECORD pad associated with the mode you want The name of each mode is listed in yellow at the upper right of each pad il MAIN Mode MAIN This is the start page of the MPC5000 and is displayed when the unit is powered on Use this mode to record your sequences Should you get lost pressing the MAIN button will always return you to this page E Q LINK Mode MODE Pad 1 Here the function of the Q LINK slider can be set Various real time performance data and Effect parameters can be recorded and entered here as well as sending MIDI continuous controllers to external modules ll DISK Mode MODE Pad 3 He
161. aying back the same pad See STEP EDIT mode on page 47 for more info on the various Note Variation parameters Note Variation Value field In this field displayed to the right of the Note Variation field you can select the Note Variation Value D duration field You can specify how long a note is held length of a note In the MIDI standard pressing a key is called Note on releasing a key is called Note off In this field you will set the time from Note on to Note off V velocity field You can set the velocity of the note event In the MIDI standard the speed used to trigger a note is called velocity The velocity is shown in 127 steps with 127 the maximum Editing in GRID EDIT mode You can edit events in GRID EDIT mode as well as in STEP EDIT mode B F1 T C Button This button works the same as the F1 T C button on the MAIN page It allows you to select the Timing Correction For more information see the section entitled Timing correct on page 26 E F2 TRACK Button Holding in this button displays a window which will allow you to choose a different track to edit When you have made your selection with the DATA wheel simply let go of F2 TRACK This way you can select a track without having to switch back to the MAIN page E F3 EDIT Button Pressing this button will display MOVE EDIT COPY and PASTE on F2 F5 buttons as shown here The function of these w
162. ays the current value 02 Turn the DATA wheel or press the WINDOW button UOI PEREI ERI GER The TIME SIGNATURE window will be displayed Est nb The upper part of the screen indicates the number of bars The currently selected 4 2 6 Di time is displayed below it 4 4 4 03 Select the desired time signature and set to this 4144234 Select the bar to change the time with the right left cursor keys and change the time Seauence Lenath 48 with DATA wheel CANCEL 04 Press F5 DO IT KEEN DO IT meres That changes the time signature of the bars and closes the window Note if a bar becomes lengthened due to a time signature change blank space is added to the end of the bar If you decrease the length of a sequence the last bars of the existing sequence are not played but unlike previous MPC s these bars are NOT truncated This means that the length of a sequence can be adjusted without losing the end bars of your sequence 30 The Sequencer E Setting Tempo You can set the beats per minute or tempo in the MAIN page by selecting the BPM field You can set the BPM for a sequence between 30 0 and 300 0 beats per minute When the MPC5000 is set to follow an external source via MIDI clock the BPM field will display EXT along with the tempo being received in brackets for external EPM 126 0 tempo You can change the BPM after you create the sequence or change the BPM anywhere in a sequence by inserting
163. be displayed 04 In the Song field below select a song that you wish to copy the selected song to 05 Press F3 DO IT The MPC5000 will start copying the song To cancel the operation press F4 CANCEL instead E Deleting a song To remove the selected song from the memory of MPC5000 proceed as follows 01 In the Song field of the SONG mode select a song that you wish to delete 02 Press WINDOW The Song window will be displayed 03 Press F2 DELETE The Delete Song window will be displayed 04 Press F5 DO IT This deletes the selected song and changes its name to unused 64 SONG Mode E Deleting all songs You can delete all the song data in the memory at one time Proceed as follows 01 In the SONG mode select the Song field and press WINDOW The Song window will be displayed 02 Press F2 DELETE The Delete Song window will be displayed 03 Press F3 ALL SG The Delete ALL Songs window will be displayed 04 Press F5 DO IT All the songs will be titled unused E Setting all sequences to the same tempo Each sequence has its own tempo When you are creating a song in the i EE a pnn Song mode it is useful to change all the sequences to have the same f EROR mes Pree O tempo at once With this feature you can change all the sequences that you are using for a song to the same tempo at once 01 In the Tempo field of the step list press WINDOW Fix tempo 128 hbr
164. ble Sine A very pure and simple tone with very little overtones Mellow sounding SawTri This waveform has a shape varying from a triangle wave to a saw wave depending on the setting of the SHAPE control which is located on the VCO page A Triangle wave has a fuller sound than a sine wave but still has very little overtones A Saw wave a harsh aggressive sounding wave with lots of overtones When this wave is selected an additional knob becomes available called SHAPE This knob controls the shape of the waveform A setting of zero is a true triangle wave Increasing this value changes the shape of this waveform adding overtones until it reached 100 which is a true Saw wave Pulse Ranges from a square wave to varying degrees of pulse widths Generally a more hollow sound approaching nasal a nasal like quality as the wave gets thinner When this wave is selected an additional knob becomes available called SHAPE This knob controls the shape of the waveform A setting of zero is a very thin and nasal sounding wave increasing this value changes the shape of this waveform adding overtones until it reached 50 which is a true square wave Increasing this further decreases overtones again yielding a very nasal sounding wave at 100 WNoise PNoise RNoise Three different flavors of noise are available White Pink and Red Each has it s own sound white being the most content rich and coldest sounding
165. bo jacks allowing either type of connector to be used The input level for this jack is controlled using the REC GAIN knob Input sources can be monitored using the Input Thru feature See page 92 for more information Additionally these sources can be used for Hard Disk Recording See page 67 for more information on Hard Disk Recording NOTE The input sensitivity of these jacks are determined by the LINE MIC switch Setting this switch incorrectly can cause clipping and distortion Be sure to determine whether your source is line level or mic level before connecting your device 12 Introduction 02 Connect the output of a turntable to the PHONO IN jacks This will allow sampling from vinyl If your turntable requires a preamp make sure the LINE PHONO switch is set to PHONO If the turntable requires grounding connect the grounding wire to the PHONO GROUND nut E Digital Connectivity Example uU ECT Wu com 9000000000909 Q Q9 O e AA D 2 E Se o Y 23 9 ee 01 Connect the DIGITAL IN OUT jacks to a digital recorder This connection is a 48 kHz S PDIF type digital audio signal NOTE The S PDIF jack on the back of the MPC5000 looks like a standard RCA connector but you should not use ordinary audio cables for this connection S PDIF requires special 75 ohm digital audio cables to work properly and will most likely result in very loud white noise if you use the wrong type of cables If you re hear
166. by clicking on the Safely Remove Hardware button at the bottom right of your computer s screen Windows Vista Users Once the MPC5000_OS bin file has been copied to the Compact Flash Card Safely Remove the MPC5000 s Compact Flash Card drive from the computer by clicking on the Safely Remove Hardware button at the bottom right of your computer s screen Macintosh Users Once the MPC5000_OS bin file has been copied to the Compact Flash Card eject the MPC5000 s Compact Flash Card drive from the computer by dragging it s icon from its place on the desktop into the trashcan in the dock at the bottom of the screen or by highlighting the item on your desktop then pressing Apple E on your keyboard 12 Disconnect the USB cord from the MPC5000 Updating the MPC5000 01 Power off the MPC5000 leave the CF card in the MPC 02 Press and hold down the 2 and 3 buttons on the MPC5000 03 While you continue to hold down the 2 and 3 power the MPC500 back ON this will launch the OS Bootloader The MPC5000 screen will read Load Code through CF card Validating code image file Boot Version 1 02 The MPC should now start the OS update it will first erase the Flash ROM and then write the new OS to Flash ROM Once the OS Update is completed the MPC5000 screen will read Notice New firmware has been loaded Please power off then power on to restart system 04 Power off the MPC5000 and wait 10 seconds 05 Power on the MPC5000 while
167. by pressing the PLAY START button while holding the REC button This deletes the previously recorded performance data and starts a new recording 12 To add to the already recorded performance press the PLAY START button while holding the OVERDUB button This will play back the currently recorded performance and you can add the new performance by playing the pads Tip If you select another sequence in the Main page you can record a new performance separately By playing back those sequences you can create an entire song Tip By default the MPC5000 is set to load a demo sequence automatically when you turn it on If you wish to remove the demo sequence and start from scratch see Deleting All Sequences section on page 33 ll Record Ready Mode New to the MPC5000 is Record Ready Mode When only the REC button is pressed and released the RECORD light will blink indicating that the MPC5000 is in Record Ready Mode The MPC5000 will now wait for a MIDI START command To use Record Ready mode do the following 13 Press and release the REC button The MPC5000 s RECORD light will blink indicating it is now in Record Ready Mode 14 When you are ready press Start on the master device Recording will start E Step Recording The MPC5000 allows step recording right from the MAIN page When you hit a pad or when the MPC5000 receives MIDI data from an external device the MPC records the event in the cur
168. can give you the best possible service And since the MPC5000 s operating system is upgradeable check the site once in a while for late breaking news Future versions of the operating system will include things like new features requested by our users as well as improvements to existing features Also you might want to check for new beats and samples every once in a while We hope your investment will bring you many years of creative enjoyment and help you achieve your musical goals Sincerely The MPC5000 Team Overview In this chapter we ll go over the basics of the MPC5000 including the name and function of each button slider knob and jack Next we ll also cover how to hook up your MPC5000 to the rest of your studio Finally we ll review the basic MPC related concepts and terminology that is found throughout this manual Note that in this manual the names of buttons knobs sliders and input output jacks are found in brackets and in all caps as follows NAME Names of different operating modes are displayed in all capitals such as PROGRAM mode Fields and parameters on the screen will be indicated by single quotes such as copy sequence il Top Panel Most of the MPC5000 s controls are located on the top of the unit These controls are as follows Baie EELECT ae 1 MAIN VOLUME Knob This knob controls the loudness level of the PHONES and STEREO OUT jacks on the rear of the MPC5000 Use this knob to control the v
169. chine Control MMC The MPC5000 is capable of sending and receiving MIDI Machine Control or MMC MIDI Machine control is a standard protocol for transport controls The MPC5000 sends and receives the following Send a sem MMC Deferred Play Play Start MMC Locate Zero followed by Deferred Play MMC Stop lt gt Step lt lt Bar gt gt MMC Locate Receive MMC Command sent MPC equivalent MMC Deferred Play MMC Locate Zero Deferred Play Start Play MMC Stop MMC Locate MMC Record Strobe Record MMC Pause E Sending MMC to a device To send MIDI Machine Control to a device such as a Computer DAW do the following 01 Connect MIDI out A of the MPC5000 to the MIDI in of the selected device 02 Press MODE PAD8 MIDI SYNC The MIDI SYNC page will be displayed 03 Press F2 SYNC to select the Sync tab 04 Set the Sync out parameter to A Master 05 Set the Send MMC parameter to ON 06 Configure the device to be controlled to receive MMC as per the instructions in the device s manual 07 Press PLAY on the MPC5000 The slaved device will start playing along with the MPC5000 E Receiving MMC from a device To receive MMC from a device connect the MIDI out of the selected device to the MIDI in of the MPC5000 To receive MIDI Machine Control from a device such as a Computer DAW do the following 01 Connect MIDI in 1 of the MPC5000 to the MIDI out of the selected device 02 Press MODE PAD8 MIDI SYNC
170. city ratio on the selected Track while the sequence is playing Select the VELOCITY field in the MAIN page and adjust the Velocity ratio by turning the DATA wheel from 1 to 200 Welocitys 168 Note Changing the VELOCITY has no effect while recording sequence data it will only affect the playback of a sequence If the velocity is set to 127 maximum any setting over 100 will have no effect B Track Mute You can set the mute for each track independently For example let s assume you Mute OFF have recorded a Piano solo on track 1 and another piano solo on track 2 By setting either track to mute you can compare these two piano solos and choose the better one If you set the mute ON for a track the MPC5000 won t play back that track Tip using TRACK MUTE you can set the track mutes with a pad For more information see the Muting Sequence Tracks with Pads section on Page 80 E Setting the MIDI Output Channel You can set the MIDI output channel for each track independently You need to set the output channel when you use the MPC5000 to play an external MIDI sound module You do not have to set this when you are using the internal sampler The MPC5000 has four MIDI outputs Channels 1A through 16A will be sent out via MIDI OUT A MIDI channels 1B through 16B will be sent out via MIDI OUT B MIDI channels 1C through 16C will be sent out via MIDI OUT C and MIDI channels 1D through 16D will be sent out vi
171. ck field Pad Bai Merce ELETEL s RETE COPY el 03 Choose the pad you wish to have play continuously The selected pad will play as a continuous sample Tracks set to Continuous will be displayed as a in the Track Status field For more on the Track Status field see page 22 E Selecting a Track with Function Keys You can quickly switch tracks using F3 TR button and F4 TR buttons With F3 TR TR and F4 TR buttons you can easily select a track without moving a cursor to the Track field E Soloing a Track When you are working on a sequence that has many tracks it is useful to use the solo function to play back only the selected track For example when you are recording various instruments on SOLO several tracks you can check the contents of each track with this feature 01 In the Track field in the MAIN page select a track you wish to play back 02 Press F6 SOLO button and start recording playback of the sequence The F6 SOLO button will be highlighted and the MPC5000 plays back only the selected track and mutes all the other tracks All Track Indicators in the Track Status field in MAIN Mode will have an x except the select track to indicate the SOLO feature is on For more information on the Track Status field see page 22 03 To cancel the solo press F6 SOLO button again The MPC5000 plays back all tracks 38 The Sequencer MIDI Sequencer Features
172. cks by using the Q LINK controls For more information on using the Q LINK with MIXER Mode see Using Q LINK Controls with MIXER Mode on page 91 E Setting the Level and Pan of a Pad 01 Press the MODE button and then the PAD 7 MIXER 02 Press F1 PrgMix to select the Pad Mix page In this display each column indicates pad 1 though 16 starting from the left and the currently selected pad is highlighted The bar display on the bottom indicates the current level Longer bars indicate higher levels Note Different pad banks can be selected by pressing the corresponding PAD BANK button 03 Hit the desired pad The column of the selected pad will be highlighted You can select several pads by hitting pads while holding in the SHIFT button You can also select all pads in the PAD BANK by pressing a PAD BANK button while holding in the SHIFT button Tip When you select several pads and change a parameter Level or Pan the parameter on each pad will be changed relatively with keeping the balance 04 Adjust the PAN value in the PAN row The fourth row down is labeled PAN Here is where the pan setting of individual pads are set The knob graphic indicates the pan setting The location of the line within the circle indicates the current pan setting 05 Adjust the Level value in the LVL row The bottom row is labeled LVL Here is where the level setting of individual pads is set The dark line in each column
173. controls the release time of the Amp Envelope FX SEND This controls the FX Send level for the selected pad 07 In the Range field set the upper and lower limit of the slider or knobs The value of the controlled parameter is determined by the value set here The value range depends on the type of the parameter selected in the Parameter field TUNE 120 120 This controls the sample pitch with 10 equaling a semitone 181 LEVEL O 100 This controls the sample volume level CUTOFF 100 100 This offsets the cut off frequency of the filter The value set in the PROGRAM mode is used as 0 RESO 100 100 This offsets the resonance of the filter The value set in the PROGRAM mode is used as 0 LAYER O 127 This value switches layers instead of Velocity ATTACK O 100 The attack time of the envelope will be replaced with this value DECAY O 100 The decay time of the envelope will be replaced with this value FX SEND 0 100 This controls the FX Send level for the selected pad 08 Press F4 CLOSE to return to the Q LINK page Resetting the Q LINK slider knob value You can reset back to the Original value the altered value of Q LINK QS 20FF li 20FFI011 20FFI012 s FF Example When you control the Tune of the Pad Event with REAL TIME Tune Tune Tune Ture the Tune will keep the changed value after you change the Q LINK slider 2 sUFF Ue UFF ii UFF ie 0FF If you
174. ct ON If you set the Monitor field to ON you can hear your performance from the OUTPUT of the MPC5000 06 Play your instrument and check the level meter You can adjust the recording level using the REC GAIN knob Note When you select DIGITAL in the Input field you cannot adjust the recording level with the REC GAIN knob The level meter moves according to the input level If the meter goes too far to the right the sound will be distorted but if the sound level is too low the sample will gain a lot of noise Set the level as high as possible without reaching the right edge clip Note In Direct recording the threshold Time fields are not available Note In Direct recording the MPC5000 keeps recording to the maximum time of the free memory and stops the recording when you press the STOP button Setting the Time fields will have no effect The Direct Recording feature will allow you to record a signal from RECORD IN while the sequence is playing back This makes it much easier to ensure the sample you record will match the Tempo of the sequence Because a sample by Direct Recording is recorded to the internal RAM memory the recording time is dependent upon the internal memory capacity 100 Sampling E Starting the recording Tip The recorded sample will be assigned to the pad in the Program which is currently selected in the MAIN page It will be useful to make an empty Program to assign the recorded s
175. ction on Page 20 04 Press F4 CLOSE button This will close the window and goes back to MAIN page E Changing the Default Name for a Sequence Usually when you create a new sequence the name will be set to the default name as Sequence wil be the sequence number automatically You can change the default name 01 In the MAIN page select the Sequence field 02 Press the WINDOW button The NAME SEQUENCE window will be displayed Default Hame Seauence BB 03 In the Default name field enter the new name For more information for setting the name see the Setting the name section on Page 20 04 Press F4 CLOSE button This closes the window and goes back to the MAIN page E Copying a Sequence You can copy a sequence to another sequence ans 3 DESCEND 1 1 E oU eMe ete eS E 01 In the Sequence field in MAIN mode select a sequence to f COpy 02 Press the WINDOW button Seauence l Tor Gun The SEQUENCE WINDOW will be displayed COPY 03 Press F3 COPY button Sequence Bi Taor Gun The COPY SEQUENCE window will be displayed as shown E PHFEHMSWENSIEINZER D IT E 04 In the Sequence field below select the sequence number you wish to copy the selected sequence to If the selected sequence number is not blank the name of the sequence will be displayed 05 Press F5 DO IT button Copying the sequence will start To cancel the operation pre
176. d while detecting an attack Selecting a Phatlral neue LEFT smaller value will make the detecting process more sensitive towards EE S350 Pedion varying attack levels 04 Press F5 DO IT rid The MPC5000 will start dividing the sample then go to the Chop Shop page The TH ul MPC5000 divides a sample into several regions by automatically detecting the attack part of the phrase The next step is to adjust the divided regions Go to the Adjusting the Start End Point of the Region section for more information RMEI amp MziB EHBP 8B B8 CONURTIIRECHOR EDIT E Dividing a Sample into Regions of Equal Length EQUALLY 01 In the Sample field within the TRIM page select a sample you wish to edit You can set the sample range you wish to edit by adjusting the start end point For more information about adjusting the start end points see Setting the Start End Points on page 101 02 Press the F5 CHOP button The Chop Shop window will be displayed 03 In the Mode field select EQUALLY Number of Region MAN ieu Set the number of regions you wish to divide the sample into Usually d a 14 841 Resion sixteen is a good start for a single measure loop 04 Press the F5 DO IT The MPC5000 will start dividing the sample and then go to the Chop Shop page The MPC5000 will divide a sample into separate regions of equal length MELLE ON Go to the Adjusting the Start End Point of the Re
177. da 3 dh This field sets the cycle speed of the LFO When the Sync field is set to ON this setting value is based on the Beat and Tick For example if you wish to set the cycle of the LFO to one beat of the sequence you would set this value to 01 00 if you want to set the cycle to an 1 8 note set it to 00 48 and so on The cycle speed will be amas m TT changed with the tempo of the sequence SSS 1t LO ter When the SYNC field is set to OFF the LFO will free run without syncing to the sequencer Delay field You can set the delay time the time before starting the LFO When Sync is set to ON this will be displayed in Beat and Tick For example if you wish to start the LFO after one beat from starting from the point of triggering a sample set it to 01 00 When the SYNC field is set to OFF the Delay field will not sync to the sequencer Sync field This field sets whether the LFO will sync to the sequencer Pitch field 0 100 This field sets the amount the LFO will be sent to the pitch of the selected pad yielding a vibrato type effect The lower the value the less pitch variation you will get and vice versa the higher this value the more pitch variation Filter field 0 100 This field sets the amount the LFO will be sent to the filter cutoff of the selected pad This will add a sweeping wow sort of effect The lower this value the less the wow becomes and vice versa Level field 0
178. dge clip 06 Select the Threshold field and set the threshold level to start the recording Input ANALOG Moder5 When the MPC5000 is in record enable mode it starts the recording automatically when the level of the incoming source exceeds the threshold level If you set the threshold level too high the MPC5000 may not start the recording when you play the input source or the beginning of the recording may be missing If you set the threshold level too low the MPC5000 may start the recording before you play the external source Set this to the appropriate level using the level meter The threshold level will be indicated as shown in the figure to the right 96 Sampling 07 Select the Time field and set the recording time The MPC5000 will record for the time set in this field We recommend you set the time a little longer than the actual recording time You can finish the recording manually ll Starting the recording 01 Press F6 RECORD button Inrut HHHL G Mode STEREO Monitor OFF Threshold SEE Time eiiis The MPC5000 will be in the Record Ready mode and the bottom of the screen will Level Meter change as shown on the right This indicates that the MPC5000 is waiting for the incoming signal It starts the recording when the input signal exceeds the threshold level Pressing the F5 CANCEL button cancels the record ready mode and resets the MPC5000 Pressing the F6 START button starts the r
179. different edit functions 1BBJE are explained individually below Start End iii CANCEL DO IT E default to what was set on the TKVIEW or ZOOM pages but can be further adjusted here This is the start and end point for the edit function to be applied This will 71 The following edit functions are available to be applied to recorded audio tracks E Gain ipsu di Audio Edit e This function will increase or decrease the amount of volume for the 1 2 selected tracks and ranges Press F5 DO IT to execute the selected it edit function Press F4 CANCEL to close the AUDIO EDIT page without 661 681 6068 affecting the audio 461 61 608 cBBadB Up to 18dB or gain can be added or subtracted to a track at once E Fade Linear Fade In Out This function sets an automatic fade in or out to an audio track The following fade types are available Linear Fade In Out This selection fades in or out the audio with a linear curve A linear curve will go from start to end with no curve creating a straight line Logarithmic Fade In Out This selection fades in or out the audio with a Logarithmic curve A logarithmic curve will quickly rise and then even out for the middle section surging quickly again as it nears the end Exponential Fade In Out This selection fades in or out the audio with an Exponential curve An exponential curve will slowly rise in the beginning and then quickly rise for the middle section
180. ding down the NOTE REPEAT button the bottom of display is changed as shown on the right You can change the Timing correct value directly with pressing the F1 through F6 button The selected Timing correct value is highlighted You can select triplets of each timing correct value by pressing F6 E Note Repeat Hold You can also latch Note Repeat by holding down the NOTE REPEAT button and then pressing SHIFT Pressing NOTE REPEAT again will unlatch the Note Repeat feature B Locate The GO TO button is used to move to a specific position within a sequence You can memorize up to five locate points Saving a Locate point 01 In the MAIN page press the GO TO button while the sequence LOCATE 1 LOCATE z is stopped LOCATE 2 LOCATE 4 LOCATE 3 CAPT LP a ee DII IT E 29 The Locate window will be displayed as shown on the right In the Go to field the now time in the MAIN page is displayed You can enter the locate point you wish to save by using the numeric keys or the DATA wheel 02 Move the cursor to a one of the Locate fields and press the F2 CAPTUR button Locating to a saved Locate point 01 In the MAIN page press the GO TO button while the sequence is stopped The Locate window will be displayed 02 Move the cursor to one of the locate fields Locate 1 Locate 5 and press the F5 GO TO button The Now Time instantly changes to the saved Locate point Detailed Inf
181. dividual reverberations that will be contained in the affected output Controls how much the reverberations will increase as the sound decays Decay Sets how long the reverb effect will take to stop Removes low frequencies from the affected output Removes high frequencies from the affected output Reverb Large This is a spatial effect designed to sound as if the input is being played in a large hall WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Predelay sets the amount time before the sound enters the reverb room Early Sets the amount of initial reflection the sound will have Dnsity This setting controls the amount of individual reverberations that will be contained in the affected output Controls how much the reverberations will increase as the sound decays Decay Sets how long the reverb effect will take to stop Lo Cut Removes low frequencies from the affected output Removes high frequencies from the affected output Reverb Large 2 This is a less CPU intensive spatial effect designed to sound as if the input is being played in a large hall WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Predelay sets the amount time before the sound enters the reverb room Sets the amount of initial reflection the sound will have Dnsity This setting controls the amount of individual rev
182. dly enter the number of copies in the Copies field You can copy it repeatedly with one operation 08 Press the F6 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start copying the bars E Inserting a bar INSERT To insert empty bars in the sequence proceed as follows 01 Select the Edit field in the BARS page of the SEQ EDIT mode and select INSERT The various fields necessary for inserting bars will be displayed 02 In the Sequence field select the sequence that you wish to insert the bars 45 03 In the After bar field select the location to insert the bars in The selected bars will be inserted at the end of the bar set here Meza 04 In the Number of bars field set the number of bars to insert sewuence Gi Tos Gun 05 In the Time signature field select the time signature of the es IT After bar bars to insert yt armes 06 Press the F6 DO IT button I ys P The number of empty bars selected will be inserted at the selected location E Deleting a bar DELETE To delete the selected bar s in the sequence proceed as follows 01 Select the Edit field in the BARS page of the SEQ EDIT mode ccarenees sic res and select DELETE Pressina DO IT First bar The fields necessary for deleting the bars will be displayed will DELETE 02 In the Sequence field select the bars to delete mue 03 In the First bar field specify the first bar to delete 04 In the Last bar field specify the last bar t
183. ds always play back at their maximum volume Pads will be recorded at Maximum MIDI velocity 127 When the button is disengaged the pads can be played using their entire dynamic range with the pads getting quieter as you hit softer Pads will be recorded using the entire MIDI range of velocity 0 127 7 16 LEVEL Button This button allows you to use all 16 drum pads to play one sample with increasing velocity increased filter effect or play a single sample at 16 different pitches In other words if 16 LEVEL is set to Velocity all of the pads play one sample but the velocity of that sample increases as you move from PAD 1 to PAD 16 See page 79 for more about this feature 8 TRACK MUTE Button This button calls up the TRACK MUTE page where you can mute or solo your sequence s individual tracks using the pads or mute individual pads in the current program For more on Track mutes see page 80 For more information on Pad mutes see page 82 9 NEXT SE Button This button calls up the NEXT SEQ page where you can switch sequences by pressing a pad For more information see the Selecting a Sequence to Play with Pads section on page 84 DATA SAN y hU 766 M LIEN E ARASA Doo e anal A gg LALA be i Jr gesa uu PACO TAP Ties 6 e 10 NUMERIC KEYPAD These buttons are used to enter numeric data directly Enter numbers with these
184. e you set the MIDI channel to send the MIDI data on Set the same channel as the one on the sound module Tip By default the MPC5000 s input MIDI channel is set to receive all MIDI channels so you don t have to set the channel to the keyboard s MIDI channel 05 Play the keyboard to make sure the sound module works If you don t hear any sound check the connection and make sure you have the correct settings for the keyboard and the sound module 06 Press the PLAY START button while holding the REC button The recording starts after 4 counts 07 Play the keyboard in time with the click sound By default sequence is set to 2 bars After recording for 2 bars the MPC5000 will start playing back the recorded performance If you make another performance with pads you can add the performance to the currently recorded one This is called overdub 08 You can stop overdub by pressing the STOP button 09 Press the PLAY button to play the recorded performance 10 If you don t like the performance you can start the new recording by pressing REC and PLAY START This cancels the currently recorded performance data and starts the new recording Edi To add the recording to the already recorded data press the PLAY START button while holding OVERDUB button This plays back the currently recorded performance and you can add the new performance by hitting pads Handling the Sustain Pedal In this section you will learn how
185. e 01 Track 01 PIANO Mute OFF The MPC 5000 has two types of tracks sequence tracks and Hard Disk recording Track 02 BASS Mute OFF tracks Sequence tracks are found within sequences A sequence has 64 tracks Track 03 SYNTHi Mute ON and each track can record a performance For example you can record the verses for a song on track one while recording the choruses on track two Alternatively you can record different instruments on each track E Tracks Track 64 GUITAR Mute OFF Note that your performances are recorded as MIDI events and the actual digital audio is not recorded onto a track Because of this you can edit your performance many different ways once the performance has been captured See the section below entitled Note number velocity and length below for more on this Hard Disk recording tracks are recorded in song mode Using Hard Disk recording you can record a live performance such as vocals or guitar and have these tracks play back with your song The MPC5000 can have up to eight Hard Disk tracks Two can be recorded simultaneously ill Song Step 001 Sequence 03 As we stated above under the Sequence description the MPC has a special Step 002 Sequence 21 SONG mode that allows you to arrange different sequences together to form a song Each time a new sequence is added to a song we say a new step is Step 003 Sequence 07 created within the song You can use song mode to arrange different sections
186. e EFFECT SELECT window where a list of effects is displayed 06 Choose Reverb Small from the list and press F5 SELECT This brings you back to the EFFECT EDIT window 07 Press F4 CLOSE to exit the EFFECT EDIT window 08 Press F6 GO2MIX i Reverb Large 2 ee iio E 09 Press the F1 PrgMix button The PAD MIX page will be displayed 10 Hit the desired pad This pad will be selected and its display will be highlighted 11 Select the FX column Here the different effect busses can be selected The following are available No effect will be applied to the pad 1 4 The buss effect corresponding to the selected number will be applied to the pad For this example select 1 12 Select the Send column and adjust the Effect Send level This controls the amount of effect will be heard when the pad is struck For our example set the knob to about 5096 Note You can also adjust the send level by using the corresponding Q LINK knob See page 91 for more information 150 Effects 13 Play the pad The effected sound will play from the STEREO OUT Tip You can apply the effect to several pads The effect of the FX 1 is applied to all the pads whose FX SEND are set to 1 in the FX SEND page of the MIXER mode Tip You can adjust the send level column to adjust the amount of the reverb for each pad Tip You can edit the effects in detail For more information about detailed editing of each effect see the Editing Effects
187. e any samples assigned To play the program you need to assign samples to the pads In the Sample page of PROGRAM mode E Assigning Samples to Pads A Sample Program consists of Samples assigned to individual pads In this section you will learn how to assign samples to a Sample Program s pads and how to control how the samples are played 01 Press the MODE button and then the PAD 6 PROGRAM BEBEILIMH A l v gizi ino samrle When you press the MODE button its LED will blink When you press the PAD 6 Frino sample with the MODE button s LED blinking you will enter PROGRAM mode Pressing the F1 SAMPLE button displays the SAMPLE page The Pgm field in the upper left corner displays the name of the currently selected program You can change the 6 Woices POL Pam Tune 88 db selected program in the Pgm field Mute Geoues OFF 02 Hit the pad you wish to assign a sample to Mute Target DPP OFF OFF OFF The pad number will be displayed in the left The pad number will change according to the pad you hit 120 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs 03 Select the first sample field labeled as 1 and select the sample to assign to the pad In the example shown the sample DJ RUBS is displayed in the first sample field You can select any sample currently stored in the MPC5000 s RAM by turning the DATA wheel You can assign samples by selecting 2 through 4 fields If you assign samples to 2 through 4 f
188. e can be edited Es ca Other Modulations involving volume and panning controls can be found gzzzczm Stereo Keu LEO here To enter the VCA page do the following Pan h i Fan Fan ar 01 From the MAIN screen select a track that uses a synth program enue Env You can also create a new synth program as detailed in the previous section P xs 02 Press MODE and PAD 6 PROGRAM This will bring you into PROGRAM mode where you can edit different parameters of your program Note You can also use the SYNTH button as a shortcut to jump to the last Synth program you edited 03 Press the F4 VCA button This will display the VCA page Here the output levels and amp envelope can be edited Each parameter can be selected by using the CURSOR to select each field and then turning the DATA wheel 04 Edit the parameters of the Volume page as desired The following parameters are available to be edited Program Level Controls the overall volume of the current program This field also appears on the Basic page See page 135 for more information Vel gt Amp Sets how much velocity will affect the volume of the program The corresponding Q Link AFTER button toggles whether the effect of this modulation will be positive or negative Key gt Amp Sets the amount that the volume of the program will track the keys The corresponding Q Link AFTER button Ome toggles whether the effect of this modulation will be pos
189. e change press the UNDO button again 06 In the Sample field select the sample you wish to normalize 07 Press F6 EDIT The Sample Edit window will be displayed 08 In the Edit field select NORMALIZE 09 Press F5 DO IT Normalizing will start It may take some time to process depending on the length of the sample E REVERSE This function allows you to reverse the selected sample Tips If you do not like the results of your sample edit the edit can be undone by pressing the UNDO button To redo the change press the UNDO button again 01 In the Sample field select the sample you wish to reverse 02 Press F6 EDIT The Sample Edit window will be displayed 03 In the Edit field select REVERSE 04 Press F5 DO IT The MPC5000 will begin processing the sample It may take some time to process depending on the length of the sample ill TIME STRETCH With the Time Stretch function you can lengthen or shorten the selected sample without changing the pitch This is useful when you want to match one sample to another which has different tempo 01 In the Sample field select the sample you wish to TIME STRECH 02 Press F6 EDIT The Sample Edit window will be displayed 03 In the Edit field select TIMESTRETCH 04 In the Original tempo field set the sample s original tempo By default the tempo of the selected Sequence is displayed If you do not know the tempo of the selected
190. e display press the right cursor button several times or turn the DATA wheel and move the cursor to the position of 001 04 00 The vertical marker moves and the display in the Now field becomes to 001 04 000 Next move the cursor to the PAD A03 row by pressing the down cursor button The display will looks like this T C TRACK EDIT CELE The event will now be displayed as a white i symbol within the Now Time marker Now the event in the grid is selected In the Event area you can select several pads and regions by pressing the SHIFT button and moving the cursor button When the cursor is in the event area pressing the WINDOW button will display the Events window The selected Pad Events are displayed in this window If you select several grids all the Pad Events in the grid will be displayed 490 Pie 3697 60D 189 U 76 Tick field left side This shows the tick value of the Event It cannot be edited P pad or N note field E You can select the Pad Number or Note in this field a PLOY AAA ELE TE ii In the above picture the area that displays T is the Note Variation field You can select the type of note variation Tip Note variation data which is used for the Q LINK sliders or 16 LEVELS function is the information used to control the sound of a pad and is saved in the track along with the pad event With the note variation data you can switch the sounds of the pad even when you are pl
191. e name and a number 114 Sample Editing TRIM Mode For Example Sample01 gt Sample01 01 Sample01 02 Sample01 03 E Converting PATCHED PHRASE 01 After adjusting the parameters within each region in the CHOP SHOP Page press the F4 CONVRT button The Convert window will be displayed 02 In the Convert to field select PATCHED PHASE eases Convert E This sets the length that is added to the release after dividing a sample If you set this to larger value the release of the divided sample will be long and the sample data will be larger in size as well ES Convert to iS Original Tempo 30 0 300 0 a eT This sets the original tempo for the patched phrase In the Original tempo field the automatically calculated original tempo is already displayed If you know the original tempo of the sample you should enter it Orisanal Temro 06 The Patched Phrase sample is each region sample and the trigger timing of the sample together If the original tempo setting is not correct it may not work correctly Wiews BOTH 03 After adjusting each parameter press F5 DO IT The MPC5000 will start processing the PATCHED PHRASE and then the TRIM page with the new sample will be displayed The new name of the patched phrase sample will be the original sample with PP added to the end For Example Sample01 gt Sample01PP You can assign the patched phrase sample to a pad in a program as well as an ere ordin
192. e o e ER de le E PE E o ut viele pec ec Desde 51 PANES T m 51 Copying Pasting an EVeDE essen aw RRRWERE aV HACER GR WR RR AS aa D L MOVING aM EV GR Gy csv duricsiddi eu od Deletinig aD e Ventana AAA AO A Step RecordIN O ina EAS A Detailed setting for step Feco FAA iii az Ato Step mcrenical Ad O e td 52 Duration of recorded NOTES Held cote reca EAE T sealed ova E EA AO lesse E E a aE 52 Inserting an event areenaa E A A es tla E des ta scd lien alc 32 Track Loc A a lace 53 Chapter 6 GRID EDIT Mode iii OO ADOHE Grid Edit asesan SEG P EI Des a O DRUM Vie Ire Bo DVM NC po A E eee enn eu AC MEL iu IU I I A M t A 55 W SUCIA MAR 55 LHonzontib Markets be de ttt Eie ANS eee dta fasst ae A 55 Event Ranes feld ssenari eium Pee leva ei vds c obla aoi Dati Le fi lashes te seine uua o p Ate feEiucco raptu 55 ENCUADRE DIAS AAA AA EES 55 Basic oper atiO Mh ssp oa GR XC RONER CREER ROC O O Operation inthe B Vent Aled uec das melee teins tuta did 56 Relationship of Grid Value to Timing Correct Lu tert tica 56 Selecting aile A A A es eL e oA cuve euh utn 56 Editing in GRID EDI mode 4a 3a quU OEia IAS VEsR VETE v EAR UT uaa QUI VELAMEN vRaa VIT iv vea MU NEUES QU EENEXKDEKEDT MERE D A ARS QS We GLO NN RO RET A 57 E2 ATRA CK BONON st tp vos abet nome etta A anne eer ort MU 57 FSE DITI BOUON recnici
193. e samples used for the program as well Normally select this option CLEAR ha RM OO IT PROGRAM ONLY j The MPC5000 will load only the program file It does not load the samples Select this option when you wish to create a new program by assigning different samples to the saved program 03 If you selected WITH SAMPLES in the Load field make settings in the Replace same samples in memory field You can set how to handle the file when you already have the data with the same name as the file that is to be loaded NO The MPC5000 will not load the sample with the same name YES The MPC5000 will overwrite the data with the new data 173 04 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start loading the data E Deleting All Programs and Samples in Memory Before Loading When you press the F2 CLEAR button instead of the F5 DO IT button in step 4 you can clear the MPC5000 s memory Programs and Samples and load only the selected program in the memory 01 In the step 4 press the F2 CLEAR button instead of the F5 DO IT button The CAUTION window will be displayed If you press the F5 DO IT button the MPC5000 will start loading the program after it clears all its loaded programs and samples Note If you do this operation all programs and samples in memory will be deleted E Loading a Sequence You can load sequence files individually 01 Select the sequence file and load it The LOAD A SEQUE
194. e to which you wish to record your performance You can select any sequence for recording a performance but here select a sequence that says unused Unused indicates that the sequence is not used 04 Select the TRACK field and select an unused track Your performance will be recorded on the track you select in the Track field You can select any track but here select the first unused track i e 01 unused 05 In the Program field select the program to play Select the Program field and scroll with the DATA wheel until the desired program is displayed You can select any program currently in RAM in the Program field by turning the DATA wheel 06 Hit pads to check the sounds that are assigned to the pads This will play the program selected in the Program field 07 Press the PLAY START button while holding the REC button The recording will start after 4 counts 08 Play the pads to record your performance 23 By default the sequence is set to 2 bars After recording for 2 bars the MPC5000 will start playing back the recorded performance You can add to your original performance by continuing to play the pads when the track loops The MPC5000 automatically switches to overdub recording and adds to the performance 09 Stop overdub recording by pressing STOP button 10 Press the PLAY button to play your recorded performance T1 If you do not like the performance you can start a new recording
195. e will be opened 03 In the Function field select AUTOLOAD 04 In the Autoload field select OFF 05 Press F6 DO IT The next time the MPC starts nothing will be preloaded Formatting You can format either the hard drive or the memory card Please note that if you format a drive all the data in the card will be deleted 01 02 03 04 05 06 Press the MODE and PAD 3 DISK Press the F3 UTILIT button The UTILITY page will be displayed In the Function field select FORMAT Select the desired device to format Press the F6 DO IT button The CAUTION window will be displayed Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start formatting the card B Auditioning Synth Programs To audition a SYNTH Program select the program in DISK Mode and press F5 PLAY The note played when auditioning samples can be set in OTHER Mode B Quick File Browser Movements While browsing files you can jump through the list by typing a letter using the Numeric Keypad Pressing a key will jump you to the first sample in the list with the corresponding letter as its first character Additional presses will cycle through the letters on the selected key This also works in most other pages where there is a long list SHIFT UP CURSOR now brings you to the top of the list SHIFT DOWN CURSOR now brings you to the bottom of the list SHIFT LEFT CURSOR brings you to the top of you file directory to browse you
196. ecording even when the incoming signal does not exceed the threshold level aitins for input sianal PANCELILSTART Note If you press the F6 RECORD button when the external source is higher than the threshold level the MPC5000 will start the recording right after you press the F6 RECORD button 02 Play the external source Inrut ANALOG Mode STEREO Monitors OFF The MPC5000 will start the recording automatically when the level of the input Threshold BERR Time emeis signal exceeds the threshold level During the recording the bottom of the screen Level Meter will change as shown on the right The MPC5000 stops the recording at the time set in the Time field You can stop the recording manually before the time set in the Time field by pressing the F6 STOP button To cancel the recording press the F5 CANCEL button After the MPC5000 ends the recording the Keep or Retry window will be displayed 03 Check the recorded sample by pressing F4 PLAY button Fecordins If you press the F4 PLAY button you can play back the recorded sample until you release the button If you do not like the recording you can remove the recording and return to the SAMPLE page by pressing the F2 RETRY button If you like the recording and Hew Hame Samrle AAG decide to keep it proceed to the next step 04 Select the New name field with the cursor and set the name for ii m the sample In
197. ect STEREO MONO L or MONO R 05 In the Time field set the recording time CD drive operation Track This shows the selected track number of audio CD Time This shows the play time on track PLAY START This key plays the Audio CD from the beginning of the track PLAY This key plays the Audio CD from the current time position STEP This key will Rewind Fast forward the Audio CD BAR This key selects the track in Audio CD STOP This key stops the Audio CD 06 Select the track you wish to record with the BAR buttons and then press the PLAY button 07 Press the F6 RECORD button The MPC5000 will start the Audio CD recording For the next steps proceed as described in the Starting the recording section on page 96 Note When CD is selected you cannot adjust the recording level You cannot start the recording by exceeding the threshold level You must start the recording by pressing the F6 RECORD button Hint In the LOAD page you can load a track from the audio CD into the internal memory For more information see Saving and Loading DISK Mode on page 165 Other Features E Monitoring feature In the Monitor field of the SAMPLE page you can determine if you want to monitor the input signal output the signal from the STEREO OUT in SAMPLE mode or not ON You can monitor the input signal This is useful when you record sounds directly from the CD player OFF You cannot monitor the input sig
198. ed step recording 01 In the STEP EDIT mode Press REC or OVERDUB The LED of OVERDUB will be lit which indicates that you can now enter events by hitting a pad 02 Move through the list with the up down cursor buttons or select the Now field to select the time position to insert event 03 Hit a pad The event of the pad will be recorded 04 Press STOP The LED of OVERDUB will be turned off and you can finish the step recording Detailed setting for step recording Pressing WINDOW in the STEP EDIT mode brings up the Step Edit Options window where you can make various settings for the step recording E Auto step increment field If you select YES the MPC5000 will automatically update the sequence according to the setting of the timing correct when it receives a pad event or a note event Use the STEP and STEP buttons to skip a note and move to the next position B Duration of recorded notes field You can determine how the length that a pad MIDI keyboard is pressed affects the event to record during step recording AS PLAYED The length that a pad MIDI keyboard is pressed will be applied to the event When you hit a pad or play a MIDI keyboard the metronome sound will start automatically Refer to the metronome sound to set the length to press a button When you release a pad MIDI keyboard the length that a key was pressed will be entered in the D duration field e CLOSE TC VALUE
199. ed track The column for the selected track will now be highlighted You may also select each track by using the CURSOR buttons 03 Select the desired output in the OUT row You can use the CURSOR buttons to move to each field in MIXER mode and you can adjust each level with the DATA wheel The following choices are available ST The track will be sent to the STEREO OUT The track can be panned 1 2 to 7 8 The track will be output to the corresponding ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT The track can be panned 1to8 The track will be output in MONO to the corresponding ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT output Panning is disabled Tip You can also easily change the settings for tracks by using the Q LINK controls For more information on using the Q LINK with MIXER Mode see Using Q LINK Controls with MIXER Mode on page 91 Track Matrix The Track Matrix shows which track the left and right inputs are armed as set in the RECORD page allowing for quick reference E Setting the level and pan of a Track 01 Press MODE PAD 16 HD RECORD to access the HD RECORD mode 02 Press F3 TRKMIX to access the HARD DISK TRACK MIX page 03 Hit the pad corresponding to the desired track The column of the selected track will be highlighted You can select several tracks by hitting pads while holding down the SHIFT button Tip When you select several tracks and change a parameter Level or Pan the parameter on each pad will be changed r
200. eguente in A RAE dr Mcd A rd 22 E Track Td a A E A AA E 22 NM Deck Stops Ie daa da td EEE 22 Recoraing the Performance iieri ac a RERO CHEER ROC ER WR ER VR WO VER Vv EVE E T VR VOV ER VV RM VER GU ER EO DE EKEE RENE E Record Reddy MOG rc ii 23 MF ON m PE 23 EH Playine Back SEQUE ueri Lun Ua aise a eased ee Not d Gin cun Us A oi ds CDS du SS AGER Deos 23 W Playing Several Sequences in Series ssssassatascsssasdvannsanssaniadavsandeatsadasdsacaestanasdnindusugedsahsaanaesvseeeidaabeiaesaunasdealandeaaaniveeatanansosh 23 NH Punch a Pn Cli UE do O 24 Other Useful Features for Recording Sequences NE Undodgmbhedoueusefosrsc ation fot rear trent VETER TMT a ete easet ELE E TTY Ne day 24 EA sna cx EL Se E ec MI MME I DL P E SIME CE RESI CIR ODER RI C P E PEE Ee e UEM H D letng In Real Dimeurssss ced pov e eL LLL lace eL DEL D DEDE Nall 29 E Deleting Brom the Erase iO 25 TIMING COITOCLU is axes vera lecd Az O m Realtime timing correction esos iub n Ee haa ce dca datus E hed tonc A du bn ened y uta tope tese pecu ta es Ne 26 AA IN II A TR 26 E Correcting the timing of recorded events a A A AS AMA AS 26 m AN dio o 27 MEE Hn up 27 B Streng tierse A 27 b pui Por 27 CHEK METRONOME isiesiesatasusaiga EE cal Note Repeat ii ZO M Note Repeat Hold dc a UA dut 28 E RR 28 Detailed Information on the Sequence Feature
201. elative to the current setting 04 Adjust the PAN value in the PAN row The fourth row down is labeled PAN Here is where the pan setting of each track is set The knob graphic indicates the pan setting The location of the line within the circle indicates the current pan setting 05 Adjust the Level value in the LVL row 75 The bottom row is labeled LVL Here is where the level setting of each track is set The dark line in each column represents the relative level of each track much like faders on a mixing board You can use the CURSOR buttons to move to each field in MIXER mode and you can adjust each level with the DATA wheel Tip You can also easily change the settings for tracks by using the Q LINK controls For more information on using the Q LINK with MIXER Mode see Using Q LINK Controls with MIXER Mode on page 91 E Assigning effects to a Track With the MPC5000 you can route HD tracks to any of four 4 internal FX buses In this section we will discuss routing tracks to the FX buses Note Each FX bus can be assigned to a separate output allowing for the dry signal and the affected signal to be routed independently For more information see page 162 01 In HD RECORD mode press F3 TRKMIX The TrkMix page will be displayed Each column indicates tracks 1 though 8 from the left to right and the currently selected track is highlighted 02 Hit the pad corresponding to the desired track The colum
202. elect the desired pad by hitting it PAD llas E The note number of the selected pad will be highlighted Bank Les ILB2 LAL ol 03 Select the note number with the DATA wheel Edi Bbi G i1 In the upper right corner of the screen the MIDI GM standard name of the drum which represents the selected note number is displayed To reset the setting to the default press the F6 RESET button All the notes assigned to the pads will be Eizlula LLFO reset to the default setting E Changing the Default Note Number Assignment Normally when you hit a pad the MPC5000 will output the MIDI note data assigned to the pad in the program However when the selected ram However 2 E BL Es track does not have any program assigned hitting a pad sends out the ASE default MIDI note number instead of the number set in the program PAD EN EN a fs When you create a new program this setting will be used as the default EBHE dE ER E ibd i B El Bbl 5 11 01 Press the MODE button and then the PAD 8 MIDI SYNC al Sloe le The MIDI SYNC page is displayed MIDI SV HC RESET 02 Press the F3 NOTE button The NOTE page will be displayed 03 Select the desired pad by hitting it The note number of the selected pad will be highlighted 04 Select the note number with the DATA wheel In the upper right corner of the screen the MIDI GM standard name of the drum which represents the selected note number is displayed To r
203. ent to the sampler section with the pad event and the TUNE value will be changed according to the pad you played During Sequence recording the Note variation data will be recorded with the note event and you can play back the sequence exactly what was played The note variation value is also used for the Q Link slider function Muting Sequence Tracks with Pads Track Mute You can mute unmute sequencer tracks in real time during playback by hitting the pads This is useful when you have several instruments assigned to different tracks so that you can play a song and switch tracks on off using the pads while playing back your sequence 01 Press the TRACK MUTE button 02 Press F1 TkMUTE This brings up the Track Mute page Now field El Ps dE ale ir ie d gt Cumnused Like the Now field in the MAIN page this field displays the current time position of the sequence Sequence field Like the Sequence field in the MAIN page you can select a sequence in this field Track list The track list is displayed under the Now field and the Sequence field The track list displays the first 8 letters of the track name The tracks are displayed according to the position of the pads Track 1 on the lower left and track 16 on the upper right You can display 16 pads at one time but you can display 1 to 64 tracks by switching pad banks The track whose track mute is set to off will be highlighted E Operation Hitting a p
204. equence s tempo but can be user set as well E 02 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will restore the Patched Phrase sample to a normal sample again 116 Sample Editing TRIM Mode Setting the loop The loop feature plays the sample repeatedly With the loop feature you can play the sample from the loop point to the end point repeatedly To activate the loop feature turn on the loop field which is located in the upper right corner of the LOOP page When the loop feature is on the MPC5000 first plays the part from the start point set in the TRIM page to the end point and then plays the part from the loop point set in the LOOP page to the end point repeatedly Note If you set the pad to ONE SHOT in the PROGRAM mode the MPC5000 will play the sample assigned to that pad like when the loop is off even when the loop feature is on When you use the loop feature set the pad s play mode to NOTE ON For more information see the Note On vs One Shot section on page 120 E Adjusting the loop point 03 In TRIM mode press the F2 LOOP button The LOOP page will be displayed 04 Select the Sample field and select a sample you wish to edit The Sample field is located in the upper left corner of the screen which displays the sample name It displays the waveform of the selected sample 05 Select the Lp loop field and adjust the loop point You can change the loop point by turning the DATA wheel If you
205. erb that has an additional control The reverb effect is cut off when the output drops below the level set in the OutGate parameter WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected PreDel Predelay sets the amount time before the sound enters the reverb room Early Sets the amount of initial reflection the sound will have Dnsity This setting controls the amount of individual reverberations that will be contained in the affected output Diffus Controls how much the reverberations will increase as the sound decays Decay Sets how long the reverb effect will take to stop Lo Cut Removes low frequencies from the affected output 162 Effects Removes high frequencies from the affected output OutGate Sets the volume the effect output has to drop down to before the reverb effect is cut off Decimator A Decimator downsamples the incoming signal by simply removing bits The difference between decimation and resampling is that the decimator does not use any filtering to attempt to mask or correct digital artifacts The result is an effect ranging from mild to almost pure digital distortion depending on the Decim setting and the source material WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Controls the amount of decimation Resampler The Resampler is similar to the decimator in that it removes bits from a
206. erberations that will be contained in the affected output Controls how much the reverberations will increase as the sound decays Decay Sets how long the reverb effect will take to stop 161 Removes low frequencies from the affected output Removes high frequencies from the affected output Reverb Spacey This is an unusually spatial effect designed to sound as if the input is being played in a very large cavern WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected PreDel Predelay sets the amount time before the sound enters the reverb room Early Sets the amount of initial reflection the sound will have Dnsity This setting controls the amount of individual reverberations that will be contained in the affected output Diffu Decay Lo Cut Hi Cut Reverb Gate In This is a hall reverb that has an additional control The reverb effect is cut off when the input drops below the level set in the InGate parameter WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected PreDel Predelay sets the amount time before the sound enters the reverb room Early Sets the amount of initial reflection the sound will have Dnsity This setting controls the amount of individual reverberations that will be contained in the affected output Diffu Decay Lo Cut Hi Cut Incate Reverb Gate Out This is a hall rev
207. erent sound To use the MPC5000 as a multitimbral sound source you need to set the MPC to receive midi Multitimbrally The MIDI output of the MIDI Sequencer will be sent to one of the MPC5000 s MIDI IN s For information on setting up your sequencer see the sequencer s operation manual 01 Select the MIDI SYNC mode by pressing the MODE button and hitting the PAD 8 MIDI 02 Press the F1 MIDI button The MIDI page will be displayed 03 Select the Active Track Receive Channel field and select MULTI This will allow the MPC5000 to play a different sound for every incoming MIDI channel E Setting MIDI Channel To set which track plays which sound do the following 01 Go to MAIN mode 02 Assign the first program you wish to play to TRACK 1 03 Assign the MIDI parameter to the desired MIDI channel and MIDI IN The MPC5000 can up to 32 sounds Multitimbrally Setting MIDI A01 A16 will receive the corresponding MIDI channel through MIDI IN 1 Setting MIDI BO1 B16 will receive the corresponding MIDI channel through MIDI IN 2 Tracks set to MIDI CO1 D16 will ignore incoming MIDI Select Active Track or Sequence with a Program Change The Sequencer s Active Track can be selected by sending a Program Change message from an external MIDI source To turn on this ive Track Receive Channel ALL option set the MIDI Program Change Field to TRACK as shown on the right Soft Thru AS TRACK You can also select sequences with Prog
208. ern C3 E3 G3 E3 While holding down the above if you were to add a D4 the MPC would then play the following C3 E3 G3 D4 G3 E3 Random The notes being held will play in a completely random pattern 146 Arpeggiator 06 Set the desired octave range in the Octave field Up to three octaves up or down can be set For example if the Arpeggiator is set to an up pattern and you have the Octave field set to 1 if you held down the notes C3 E3 and G3 the arpeggiator would play the following repeating pattern C3 E3 G3 C4 E4 G4 The original octave is always played first To illustrate this building on the example above if the pattern was set to down then the following pattern would play G3 E3 C3 G4 E4 C4 07 Adjust the Step field to set at what increments the Arpeggiator will play The following steps are available 1 8 1 8 3 1 16 1 16 3 1 32 1 32 3 1 64 1 64 3 Note Unlike Note Repeat this is independent of Timing Correct allowing for Note Repeat and the Arpeggiator to play different patterns independently 08 Adjust the Gate field to set how the Arpeggiator will play the notes This parameter determines how long each note will play represented by a percentage of the Step time In other words if Step is set to 16th notes and Gate is set to 5096 each note will be played for half the length of a 16th note 09 Adjust the Note Order field as desired The following op
209. eset the setting to the default press the F6 RESET button All the notes assigned to the pads will be reset to the default setting Chapter 14 Arpeggiator The MPC5000 s Arpeggiator is a powerful new feature that lets you play repeating patterns in perfect time much like Note Repeat simply by holding down one or more notes This is very useful feature because it allows you to play extremely complex or repetitive passages of music with ease Editing the Arpeggiator To use the Arpeggiator try the following 01 02 03 04 05 From the MAIN page select a track you wish to use with the Arpeggiator Track BHi kick amp Rim Prosram Tor 5et Each track in a sequence can have an arpeggiator or Arp for short assigned to it Arpeggiators work best with synth type programs or external MIDI devices but using one on a drum program can yield unusual and exciting rhythms as well Pattern My Ster 116th Gate Press either MODE PAD 10 or the ARPEGGIATOR button Hote Order Standard Culrmaz This will open the ARPEGGIATOR page as shown on the right Note that the current WERDE he ee E Sa track and the current program are displayed in the Track and Program fields respectively Press the ARP ON OFF button to turn on the Arpeggiator Press and hold down three or four pads or hold a few notes on your external MIDI controller The MPC5000 will play the notes you ve selected in a pattern defined by the
210. et as the new length for the sequence This is useful when you do not know how long the part you are composing will continue E Changing the Default Settings Some settings for a sequence such as number of the bars time tempo and loop are automatically set to the default setting when you create a new sequence You can change the default settings for your convenience 01 In the MAIN page set the Loop Time Sig and Bars fields as you like 02 Select the Sequence field and press the WINDOW button The NAME SEQUENCE window will be displayed as shown 03 Press F5 USER button The USER DEFAULT window will be displayed as shown 04 Press F5 DO IT button The values currently set in the Loop Time Sig and Bars fields in the MAIN page will be saved as default The next time you create a new sequence these values will be applied to it E Changing the Sequence Name 01 In the Sequence field in the MAIN page select a sequence that you wish to change the name of 02 Press the WINDOW button The NAME SEQUENCE windows will open Press incedec or move dial to change name Sequence Hid Default Hame E a USER K TES E User Default Pressing DO IT will memorize the seturs of this seauence as the default zetur CANCEL Sequence Hame Mapa 32 The Sequencer 03 In the Sequence name field enter the new name For more information for setting the name see the Setting the name se
211. f selected file About the View field The View field of the LOAD page is normally set to ALL FILES to display all types of the files in the Directory field You can change the setting of the View to display only the selected type of files It is useful when you need to find a file from a large list Select the View field and select the file type to display by turning the DATA wheel E Loading a Sample You can load a sample file one by one You can also assign that sample to the pad When loading a sample all other samples assigned to the selected pad are shown 01 Select a sample file and load it The LOAD A SAMPLE window will be displayed You can listen to the sample by pressing the F2 PLAY button To cancel loading the sample press the F4 DSCARD button 02 Select the pad to assign the selected sample to by hitting it When you hit the pad the pad number will be displayed in the Assign to pad field If you do not wish to assign the sample to any pad select OFF by turning the DATA wheel to the left 03 Press the F5 KEEP button The loaded sample will be assigned to the selected pad Tip You can load snd files This includes files from MPC3000 2000 2000XL 172 Saving and Loading DISK Mode E Create a New Program When Loading a Sample When loading a sample the MPC5000 has the option to create a new program at load time To create a new program when loading a sample do the following l Assia
212. f the parameter that you wish to play in 16 levels You can select the following parameters VELOCITY The MPC5000 will play the velocity in 16 levels TUNE D o Hssisn 16 Levels Pad T9rFe The MPC5000 will play a single pad in a sample program by varying pitch in 16 levels by semitone FILTER The MPC5000 will play the filter cutoff value in 16 levels LAYER The MPC5000 will play the layer value in 16 levels DECAY The MPC5000 will play the decay value in 16 levels ATTACK The MPC5000 will play the attack value in 16 levels DJ 5Hz WELOCITY CAMCELE When TUNE is selected the Original key Pad field will be displayed In this field you can specify the pad that plays the original key pad 04 Press the F5 TurnON button 80 Functions of a Pad AAA e o _Q Q_ The window closes and the LED of the 16 LEVELS button is turned on which indicates you can play in 16 levels Pressing the 16 LEVELS button turns its LED off and deactivates the 16 levels function Tip When you select VELOCITY in the Type field the velocity of the pad event can be played in 16 levels but if you select an option other than VELOCITY the note variation value will be played in 16 levels The note variation data can change the value of a specific parameter when you play the pad s sample For example if you select TUNE in the Type field when you hit the pad the note variation data of TUNE will be s
213. ful functions when playing with pads E Switching pad banks The MPC5000 has 16 pads but you can play up to 64 samples by switching between the four pad banks The LED of the currently selected pad bank from banks A through D is turned on By pressing the desired PAD BANK button you can switch pad banks E Full level function FULL LEVEL button You can control the level of the sound by the velocity used to hit the pads but if you press the FULL LEVEL button the MPC5000 will play the sample at the maximum level regardless of the velocity If you press the FULL LEVEL button the LED will be lit and the full level function will be activated To deactivate this function press the FULL LEVEL button again E 16 levels function 16 LEVEL button P gt LOOP PAD 13 LA STEP EDIT gt P TO PAD 14 2 GRID EDIT when hit In this section JES PAD 15 15 SONG PAD 16 HD pnt Li a OTHER PAD 10 4 PAD 11 EFFECTS SEQ EDIT n PAD 6 4 PROGRAM PAD 8 Lus PAD 4 REC SAMPLE PAD 2 4 You can play a sound using 16 parameter levels assigned to the 16 pads 01 Hit the pad that you wish to play in 16 levels 02 Press the 16 LEVELS button The Assign 16 Levels window will be displayed The Pad field displays the pad you selected in step 1 03 In the Type field select the type o
214. g Nw Bll Gl BoE 01 From the MAIN page select the MUTE field 02 Press WINDOW Record Track Mute Events 0FF The MUTE EVENTS window will be displayed prisa rack Mute Evente FF 03 Select the Instant Track Mute field and select the desired option Instant Track Mute Mad ON Ge Tracks will be muted instantly by sending MIDI Volume OFF Tracks will be muted like legacy MPCs by ignoring Note Off events ll Setting the Track Mute in Solo Mode Solo function switches the track mute setting temporarily Turning off the solo function resets the track mute settings for each track to the same status as before the solo function was activated However you can also turn off the solo function while keeping the track mute setting unchanged With this feature you can make a performance starting with many tracks followed by only a simple rhythm track and then gradually add tracks Operation When the solo function is on press F6 SOLO while holding the SHIFT button The Solo function will be deactivated and the mute setting for the track set to solo will be turned off The setting for other tracks will be turned on E Recording Track Mutes The MPC5000 has the ability to record track mute events Track mute recording is off by default To turn on track mute recording do the following 01 From the MAIN page select the MUTE field 02 Press WINDOW The MUTE EVENTS page will open Record Track Mute Events D0F
215. gion section for more information CANCEL HEP a ICONURT RECHOP EDIT The next step is to adjust the divided regions UiewibEFT LEFT E Adjusting the Start End Point of the Region End ICO 329 Region A Region is each part of a sample that is divided with the AUTO or EQUALLY feature You can adjust the start end point of each region within the CHOP SHOP Page 01 After dividing a sample using the AUTO or EQUALLY function the CHOP SHOP Page will be displayed In the CHOP SHOP Page hitting Pad 1 12 will trigger the selected region CANCEL SHA al B CONURTIRECHOP EDIT Tip If you want to retry dividing a sample press the F5 RECHOP button The Chop Shop window will be displayed and you can set it again If you want to stop the Chop Shop feature press the F1 CANCEL button The display will go back to the TRIM page 02 In the Region field select the region number you wish to adjust the start end point In the image above region 1 is selected 03 In the St field adjust the start point of the region You can change the start point by using the numeric keys directly or by turning the DATA wheel button If you press the left right cursor key while holding the SHIFT button you can select individual digits to change with the DATA wheel Note Each start point of a region is same as the end point of the previous region If you change the start point of a region the end point of the previo
216. h of a note In the MIDI standard pressing a key is called Note on releasing a key is called Note off In this field you will set the time from Note on to Note off 49 V velocity field You can set the velocity of the note event In the MIDI standard the speed used to trigger a note is called velocity The velocity is shown in 127 steps with 127 the maximum ll Pitch Bend Event H You can set the pitch bend Normally this event is used to control the pitch in real time E Control Change Event EEEBERNERE CC 8 UW The control change which is used for various applications is the most versatile event in the MIDI standard The control change event consists of a control number which determines the type of the control change and the control change value CC field You can select the type of the control change in this field and the control change value in the field on the right E Program Change Event You can set the program change This event is normally used to switch the sound of an external sound module If program numbers are assigned to programs in the internal sampler section you can switch the programs that are assigned to the track within the sequence E Channel Pressure Event Sees CH PRESS lU H You can set the channel pressure Normally a Channel pressure event is used for aftertouch This feature allows you to control the sound depending on the pressure used to press the keyboard E P
217. h that a pad MIDI keyboard is pressed affects the event to record during step recording AS PLAYED The length that a pad or MIDI keyboard is pressed will be applied to the event When you hit a pad MIDI keyboard the metronome sound will start automatically Refer to the metronome sound to set the length to press a button When you release a pad MIDI keyboard the length that a key was pressed will be entered in the D duration field TC VALUE When this is selected the duration of events recorded in Step Record mode will be automatically set to a percentage of the Timing Correct Setting For example if Timing Correct is set to 1 8th notes a TC VALUE of 50 will set the duration of each event to one half the length of the Timing Correct setting In this case the length of each recorded event will be 16th notes Setting a TC VALUE of 10096 will insert events equal to the Timing Correct length Real time recording In the GRID EDIT mode you can record the sequence data in real time by pressing REC or OVERDUB and pressing PLAY at the same time Note The event you recorded by real time recording displays on the grid after stopping the recording E Track Lock Individual tracks in a sequence can be locked for editing This will allow data on that track to be protected when performing global functions and protects from accidental adding deleting or changing the information on the track pol 280 vliswiREH leu
218. h the pads and by playing back the recorded data you can reproduce your performance The actual performance will be recorded on a track within a sequence For more information on sequences and tracks see the section entitled Basic Concepts and Terminology on page 14 The performance data you made by hitting the pads will be recorded on a track as events A track can contain other events such as Q LINK controller information tempo change etc When you are using the MPC5000 with an external MIDI device you can record the data from the external keyboard as MIDI events Main Page This is the page where you record playback sequences This is the MPC5000 s main operation mode and unlike the other pages you can display this page by pressing the MAIN button at any time B Now The Now field which is located in the upper left corner of the screen When you record playback a sequence the display updates constantly to show the current position of the sequence When the sequence is stopped you can move the cursor to the Now field to set the time manually The Now field displays time in two ways Bars and Beats Bars and Beats will display the current time of the sequence by bar beat and tick from left to right For example 002 03 000 means the third beat in the second bar When you record playback a sequence the display updates Now H24 H2 7 58 constantly to show the current position of the sequence a IP A7 A
219. h will not change with velocity The larger you set the value the higher the pitch will be E Playing several samples with one pad You can assign up to 4 samples to one pad When you assign more than one sample to a pad you can play several samples by hitting one pad 01 In the Sample page of PROGRAM mode select the desired pad The pad number display in the left of the screen will change according to the pad you hit The Pgm field in the upper left corner displays the name of the currently selected program You can change the currently selected program in the Pgm field 02 Select the 1 field and select the sample to assign to the pad You can select the samples currently saved in the MPC5000 s memory by turning the DATA wheel 03 Select the 2 field and select the sample to assign it to the pad When you hit the pad all the samples assigned to the selected pad will play simultaneously 04 Repeat step 03 for fields 3 and 4 Up to four samples can be played per pad E Assigning One Sample across All Pads Auto Chromatic Samples can be automatically assigned chromatically to the drum pads The 64 drum pads PAD A01 D16 will correspond to a note range of 35 98 on a MIDI keyboard This allows you to easily play a melody with a single sample To assign a sample chromatically do the following PILL HPHP Pii 00s AN 01 Press MODE PAD6 program y 02 Press a pad 03 Assign the sample you wish to chrom
220. hapter 10 MIXER Mode In this section you will learn about the mixer feature In the MIXER mode you can edit several settings while checking the status of the pads graphically This is done in the MIXER mode which can be accessed by hitting the MODE button and then the PAD 7 MIXER The screen will change depending on the type of program on the current track being Sample Program Keygroup Program or Synth Program Sample Programs Synth and Keygroup Programs our 1 2 3NEL FL R L RLR LR LR LRL FSLRSLRILRSLRSLRILR mr E Se A OOOO CO OOO Synth Mixer IMPUT GO02FX Each pad is assignable to a different output ds and effects Since synth programs are assigned chromatically across the bus and can have its own level and pan settings pads each parameter is globally assigned Ekesarour Mixer INFOT IUTFX Since keygroup programs have chromatically assigned samples across the pads each parameter is globally assigned Note For more information about connecting to the external effects processor or mixer and about the operation of them see the operation manual of these devices Program Mixer The MPC5000 has 8 outputs assignable mix out as well as the stereo out Entire tracks of a sequence can be sent out of these outputs Additionally Sample Programs can have their individual pads sent out of any one of these outputs individually as a mono signal or a stereo pair Here we will discuss setting the outputs of
221. he Simultaneous Play tab j Ha S CLAP_1 03 In the Pad field select the pad you wish to use to trigger other Dii TOPBASS pads i AB TOPEFF You can select different pads by selecting the pad with the DATA wheel or you Hd BANGLE 1 can select a pad by hitting it while the cursor is in this field 04 Select the field Simult1 Select the first pad you would like to be triggered simultaneously with the pad selected in step 03 05 You can select the pad to be played by turning the DATA wheel or by hitting a pad while the cursor is in this field Repeat the process for Simult numbers two through four Now hitting the pad selected in step 3 will play the pads listed in Simult 1 4 as well as its own sound Note that if one of the other pads are struck the other pads do not play Only the pad selected in step 3 will trigger the other pads This can be used to play extremely difficult percussive parts with ease E Setting Envelopes You can set the envelope for the samples assigned to the pads The MPC5000 has two envelopes per pad for sample programs one is the Amplitude Envelope which controls volume and the other is the Filter envelope for controlling sound character Amplitude Envelope 01 In the Sample page of PROGRAM mode select the pad you wish to make a setting by hitting it 02 Press the F5 softbutton AmpEnv The Amp Envelope window will be displayed This window is also available by selec
222. he Time fJ Htt B U Hmount B U Frea B field ae CLOSE Delay field This field sets the amount of time that will elapse before the envelope will affect the filter the larger the value the longer the delay Attack field You can set the filter s attack time in this field The larger the value the longer it will take for the filter to change Fade in Decay field This field sets how long a filter will fade out before the filter enters the Sustain part of the envelope Sus LvI Sustain Level field This parameter is the level that the sample reaches when the decay portion is finished This parameter has no effect on samples set to ONE SHOT Sus Dec Sustain Decay field This parameter determines the time it takes for the Sustain Decay stage to drop to zero If this parameter is set to 100 the envelope will sustain for as long as the key is held down This parameter has no effect on samples set to ONE SHOT Release field This sets the amount of time the envelope will take to get from its current level to zero after the note has been released The higher the number the longer it will take to fade out V gt Time field You can control the filter envelope time by velocity If you set this field to a value the time will be closer to the time set in the Time field with higher velocity If you set this field to a value it works exactly opposite If you set this field to O the time is co
223. he available outputs Applying Effects to a Pad In this section will demonstrate how to assign an effect to a pad Here let s apply REVERB to an individual pad 01 Press the MODE and PAD 11 EFFECTS The EFFECTS page will be displayed In this page the signal paths of each effects Effect Set Bl Effect l B e peat TR ARE buss are displayed Two effects can be assigned in series per buss Busses 1 and 2 are displayed on the first page as FX1 and FX2 Press F2 BUS3 4 to view busses 3 and 4 Busses 1 and 2 and busses 3 and 4 can be routed together to allow up to four effects per bus FRISFR2 OFF Direct N 02 Press the F1 BUS1 2 button This will make sure that busses 1 and 2 are displayed CPU 28 Direct OH 03 Move the cursor to the first effects block in FX1 mv BUS 1 2 iz ARE Pass 6021 Each effect slot is displayed as a block When the effect is bypassed the block will A appear above the signal path line Each block can be selected using the CURSOR F Effect Edit buttons Fe 1 Block A HSS letra Prebel Early Dnzita 04 Press the WINDOW button or turn the DATA wheel T l l x This will display the EFFECT EDIT window as shown on the right This is where different aspects of the effect can be edited For more information on editing effects POUL IESU Lr uL see page 151 4 56 isa Disg caa 05 In the FX 1 Block A field scroll with the DATA wheel This will open th
224. he sample name 01 In the Sample field in the TRIM page select a sample that you Ej wish to change the name of um Samrle Hame 02 Press the WINDOW button Tune 06 db The Sample window will open Poot Mate C Zt ED 03 In the Sample name field enter the new name For more information for setting the name see the Setting Names section on Page E um 20 A COPY KE 04 Press F4 CLOSE button It closes the window and goes back to TRIM page E Changing the pitch of a sample In the Tune field you can set the sample s pitch The 2 digits in the left is semitones the 2 digits in the right is cents 100 cents 1 semitone You can change the pitch in the PROGRAM mode as well The changes you made in the Sample window will be applied to the actual sample So if you assign one sample to several pads or use one sample in several programs the change will be applied to all of them To change the sample of a specific pad use the PROGRAM mode E Copying a sample You can copy a sample and create a new sample 01 In the Sample field in TRIM mode select a sample to copy IL COPY 02 Press WINDOW Hew Hame Samrle mui The Sample window will be displayed CLOSE T p 105 03 Press F5 COPY The Copy Sample window will be displayed In the New name field set the name to the newly created sample For more information for setting the name see the Setting Names section on P
225. he tuning the sample assigned to that key will be pitched down When TransrPose pressing a key and adjusting the transpose the note being played will Fitchbend Fanas change To change the keygroup or tune do the following Moduwheel LFO Hrtertouch Filter 01 in PROGRAM Mode press the F3 PGM button 02 Select the Transpose 03 Each Keygroup Program can be transposed by up to 36 Semitones 3 octaves 04 Select Tune and adjust the tuning of the keygroup as desired Each Keygroup can be tuned by up to 36 Semitones 3 octaves Ca B Pitchbend Modwheel Aftertouch The Pitchbend Range Modwheel Depth and Aftertouch amount can be set in the PGM page To access the PGM page press F3 PGM in Program Mode Transrose Pitchbend Pitchbend Ranae Hodwheel LFO Pitchbend responds to MIDI Pitchbend and can be set to have a range of HFtertouch Filter 0 12 semitones Modwheel gt LFO The Modwheel controls the LFO Depth and can be set from 0 100 effect The LFO on the MPC5000 can control 4 different destinations pitch filter cutoff level and panning You first have to make initial settings to one or more of these destinations in the Keygroup Program FItLFO page to be able to make use of your modwheel When the LFO Depth setting in the FItLFO page to one of those 4 destinations is O Modwheel LFO won t have any effect for that destination no matter the setting in the PGM page With a LFO Depth setting
226. his brings you back to the EFFECT EDIT window 05 Press F4 CLOSE to exit the EFFECT EDIT window 06 Select the DIRECT field The following selections are available ON The dry signal of the source is sent to the output along with the effect OFF The dry signal is not sent to the output 10096 of the source is sent to the effect For our example set this field to OFF 07 Press F6 GO2MIX This is a shortcut to take you into MIXER mode You can also get to MIXER mode by Pressing the MODE and PAD 8 MIXER 08 Press the F1 PrgMix button The PAD MIX page will be displayed 09 Hit the desired pad This pad will be selected and its display will be highlighted 10 Select the FX column and set the FX to 2 151 This will assign the desired pad to effects buss 2 Note that the Send Column s control for this pad has now disappeared This is because as the signal diagrams on page 150 show when DIRECT is set to OFF the effects buss acts as an insert and 100 of the dry signal is automatically sent to the effect E Adding additional Effects to the Effects Buss Each effects buss can have two effects assigned to it This can allow for extremely complex wild sounding effects As an example continuing from our example on page 149 let s add a delay to the Reverb on Buss Effect Set 81 Effect l 1 Hone L R 01 Press the MODE and PAD 11 EFFECTS then Press the Fi FeleFses OFF Direct UM BUS1 2 butto
227. holding down the ERASE button this will reinitialize the MPC Note Do not turn off the MPC5000 while it is updating the Operating System 200 Other Settings Specifications E General Display Memory Card Slot Dimensions Weight Power Requirement E Sound Generator Sampling rate Memory capacity Recording time Memory expansion slot Data format Polyphony Dynamic filtering Filter types Preset sound memory Number of programs E Effects Effects Master effect ill Sequencer Maximum events Resolution Sequences Tracks per sequence MIDI output channels Song mode Drum pad Drum pad banks Sync mode Transport Controls 240 x 128 dot graphic LCD w back light Compact Flash The size of the compact flash card that MPC5000 can handle is from 32MB to 2GB 18in x 16 1 16 x 3 3 8 6 7 8 with screen at max 18 2 lbs 50w 44 1kHz 64MB standard expandable to 192MB 12m 48sec 64MB MONO 38m24sec 192MB MONO 1 x for optional EXM E3 16 bit linear 64 1 State Variable Filter per voice up to 8 pole depending on type LOW PASS BAND PASS HIGH PASS BAND BOOST BAND STOP ANALOG MODELING VOCAL FORMANT 16 MB 128 4 stereo busses with 2 stereo effects per buss and Master effect 4 band EQ Compressor 100 000 notes 960 parts per 1 4 note 99 64 64 16 channels x 4 outputs 20 songs 250 steps per song 16 velocity and pressure sensitive 4 MIDI cl
228. ich is set in the TRIM page If you change the end point in the LOOP page the end point in the TRIM page will be changed as well E Zooming In Out of the Waveform With the Loop Fine window you can zoom into a part of the waveform and edit the part in details Press the WINDOW button in the LOOP page when the cursor is either in the Lp loop or End field and the Loop Fine window will be displayed The waveform of the end point is displayed in the left of the waveform display and the waveform of the loop point in the right so you can adjust the loop and end points while checking the relationship of the waveform If you press the F2 ZOOM button the waveform will be zoomed out if you press the F3 ZOOM button it will be zoomed in 117 BE LINEAR and LOGARITHMIC Displays The vertical axis indicates the waveform s level Normally the waveform display is set to LINEAR which displays the sample level as it is However some parts fade out part etc may not be displayed as the waveform if the level is too low In this case you can switch to the LOG logarithmic display by pressing the F5 LOG button and you can see the parts whose level is low When you switch to the LOG mode the display in the F5 button will change to LINEAR To switch back to the LINEAR mode press the F5 button again E Linking the Loop Point to the Start Point When you loop the whole sample ex loop the phrase sample to the rhythm it
229. ield to ON by turning the DATA wheel FX1 will be routed to the input of FX2 About CPU Usage The MPC5000 has a dedicated processor for effects Each effect on the MPC5000 uses a certain percentage of this CPU s power Some effects such as flangers choruses etc use very little power Others like Ix reverbs and delays take substantially more power When adding effects it s a good idea to keep watch of the CPU meter Editing Effects In this section you will learn how to edit effects When you scroll with the DATA wheel on an effects block or press the WINDOW button while an effects block is selected the EFFECTS EDIT page will be displayed Here you can edit the effects selected in each effect block 152 Effects E Effect List Below is a brief overview of each effect type Flanger Flanger Sync Flanger is an effect that uses a delay line to emulate the classic warbling effect produced using two analog tape machines together This effect is best used as an insert by turning DIRECT off See page 150 for more on this WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Controls the speed of the flanger effect Feedbk Controls how much of the output signal is fed back to the input creating a more pronounced effect Both positive and negative feedback is available Width Controls how much of the frequency range of the incoming signal is effected Contro
230. ields you can play several samples at once For more information on loading and saving samples see Saving a Sample on page 166 ll Note On vs One Shot When you play a sample by hitting the pad the sample will be played to the end This is useful when you want to play short drum sounds However when you play a long sample such as a phrase sample it is better to set the MPC5000 to play the sample only while you hold the pad In this section you will learn how to play the sample only as long as the pad is pressed 01 In the Sample page of PROGRAM mode hit the pad you wish to change m T Play Mode The pad number display in the left of the screen will change according to the pad payout 3 ABI Ambient Kick 02 Select the 1 field and press the WINDOW button F fone Plas VELOCITY The PLAY MODE window will be displayed P Layer 1 ME Par E OWE SHOT Fan 03 In the 1 field select one of the following ONE SHOT Pan X ONE SHOT Par ONE SHOT m CLOSE The MPC5000 plays the sample until the end regardless of how long you hold the pad NOTE ON The MPC5000 plays the sample only while you hold the pad 04 Select fields 2 4 to adjust each sample assigned to the pad individually Note When you loop the sample set the play mode to NOTE ON When you select ONE SHOT a sample will NOT loop even when the sample s loop is set to ON E Volume and Tuning For a Sample You can set volume and tuning for samp
231. ignal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Autowah This effect is a lowpass filter modulated by an envelope The envelope is triggered by the incoming audio signal and the amount of effect the envelope has on the cutoff frequency can be controlled by the incoming audio signal s amplitude This yields a classic funky wah wah type sound WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Res Sets the amount of time the envelope takes to reach its maximum value Slower attacks will yield a string like attack Faster attack times will give you a more quick punchy type sound Sens Controls how dramatically the autowah effect will respond to volume changes Set this to a lower value for louder sources and a higher value for quieter sources HP LP Filter This effect is a static filter without modulation Controls the frequency at which the filter will affect the incoming signal Controls the emphasis of the frequency at the cutoff point 154 Effects HP LP Shelving Filter This filter differs from the standard filter type in that all frequencies affected by the cutoff point are attenuated equally Controls the frequency at which the filter will affect the incoming signal Res Controls the emphasis of the frequency at the cutoff point Adjusts the level of the output signal 2 Band 2 shelf PEQ This effect is a combination of a two ba
232. ill be discussed in the next section E F4 DELETE Button You can delete a selected Event by pressing this button E F6 PLAY Button This button allows you to play the selected event as it was recorded This is useful for auditioning specific notes in a complicated recording Copying and Pasting an Event To copy the selected Event and paste it to another location proceed as follows MONDE EDIT J COPY FASTE 01 In the Event list select the grid and the range that you wish to copy You can select several Pads by pressing the up down CURSOR buttons while holding in SHIFT You can then select several Grids by pressing the right left CURSORS or turning the DATA wheel while holding SHIFT 02 Hold down F3 EDIT and then press F4 COPY When you press F3 EDIT the display of the F4 and the F5 buttons will change to COPY and PASTE respectively until you release the button 03 Move the cursor to the Grid or select the Time Position in the Now field you wish to paste the event to 04 Press in and hold F3 EDIT and then press F5 PASTE The selected Event will be pasted Moving an event You can move an Event to another position After moving the Event it does not remain at the original position which is different from copying pasting an Event 58 GRID EDIT Mode 01 In the Event list select the Grid and the Range that you wish to move You can select several Pads by pre
233. ime you hit a pad one of the four assigned samples will be randomly chosen to play To enable Random Zone Play do the following 04 From PROGRAM Mode select any sample on the pad you wish to assign Random Sample Switching 05 Press WINDOW 06 Set the Zone Play field to RANDOM 122 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs E Per Sample Panning Samples slots can be individually panned To adjust the panning of a P rmirm b iert Kiti sample do the following 5 Play Mode f 01 Select the sample slot you wish to pan ia Ani nba el zZ Play VELOCITY 02 Press the WINDOW button nee ose The PLAY MODE window will be displayed Each sample slot is represented by Laver 1 GS Pan the corresponding number i ONE SHOT Pan OWE SHOT Pan 03 Adjust the Pan Field to change the stereo position of the OWE SHOT Pan sample within the selected sample slot CLOSE E Changing Pitch with Velocity You can control the sample pitch by velocity how hard you hit the pad 01 In the Sample page of PROGRAM mode hit the pad you wish to edit m pad number display in the left of screen will change according to the pad you 3 It 02 Select the Tune field 03 Press the WINDOW button The PITCH FUNCTION window will be displayed J Fitch 04 Select the V gt Pitch field 05 Adjust the field to the desired value while checking the level by CLOSE hitting the desired pad If you set this field to 0 the sample pitc
234. in a folder into a new program do the following 01 In DISK Mode select a folder to load 02 Press DO IT to load the folder The LOAD A FOLDER window will appear as shown on the right 03 In the LOAD field choose SAMPLES INTO NEW PROGRAMS Note that you can also CLEAR or REPLACE same files as well p Rerlace same files i in memor HO 04 Press DO IT The Samples contained in the selected folder will be loaded into a new Program If there are more than 64 samples in the folder additional Programs will be created to accommodate them E Loading a Folder after Deleting All Data in Memory When you press the F2 CLEAR button instead of the F5 DO IT button in step 3 you can clear the MPC5000 s memory and load the selected folder 01 In the step 3 press the F2 CLEAR button instead of the F5 DO IT button The CAUTION window will be displayed If you press the F5 DO IT button the MPC5000 will start loading the folder after it clears all its internal memory Note If you do this operation all the data in memory will be deleted Note If the folder has several ALL file the MPC5000 will load only one of them E Loading a Project When you use SAVE ENTIRE MEMORY mode to save the data the MPC5000 will load the project file that was created When you load a project file all the data currently saved in the unit will be overwritten by the data that the project file will load 02 Select a project file and
235. in data starting from 2 59 This parameter will allow for up to one second of recording time to be cached This is great for sampling on the fly to make sure the beginning of for example a bass hit isn t cut off when recording live Largest recording time This shows the largest amount of time a single recording can be This is especially useful when the 192MB expansion is installed The EXM E3 adds a second chunk of 128MB of sample recording time which totals 192 when combined with the built in RAM This allows a sample totaling 128MB in size or over 24 minutes of mono sampling time for a single sample Total free memory time This field displays how much recording time is left in RAM This will also tell you how much RAM is installed in your unit Direct Recording feature Recording a live performance while listening to a sequence E Preparing the recording 01 Connect the external device to the RECORD IN which is located on the MPC5000 s rear panel 02 Press the MODE button and then PAD 4 REC SAMPLE 03 Select the Input field and then select the recording source ANALOG The MPC5000 will record the incoming signal from the RECORD IN on the rear panel DIGITAL The MPC5000 will record the incoming signal from the DIGITAL IN on the rear panel In Direct Recording the MAIN OUT CD are not available For this example please select ANALOG 04 In the Mode field select STEREO or MONO 05 In the Monitor field sele
236. in the New Sample field al PLAY VOUER WY RETRY Y KEEP JE 108 Sample Editing TRIM Mode NW PITCH SHIFT Changing the pitch of the sample With the Pitch Shift function you can change the pitch of the selected sample without changing the length This is useful when you want to change the pitch of the phrase sample in the sequence without changing the tempo 01 In the Sample field select the sample you wish to PITCH SHIFT 02 Press F6 EDIT The Sample Edit window will be displayed 03 In the Edit field select PITCH SHIFT 04 In the Pitch field set the pitch amount you wish to change Pitch 12 00 12 00 This determines the amount of the pitch shift in semi tone and cent step For example if you enter 1 00 the sample will pitch up one semi tone If you enter 12 00 the sample will pitch up one octave 05 Set the Preset field and Adjust fields if necessary Preset The MPC5000 uses 18 preset algorithms to carry out the pitch shift process so you should select a preset that closely resembles your sample s content If you are not happy with the results try experimenting with different presets A Standard quality pitch shift with fast processing B Better quality pitch shift with slower processing C Highest quality pitch shift with even slower processing Time stretch Presets 01 FEM VOX Female Voice 02 MALE VOX Male Voice 03 LOW MALE VOX Low Male Voice 04 VOCAL 05 HFREQ RHY
237. ined with no gap between them Tips If you do not like the results of your sample edit the edit can be undone by pressing the UNDO button To redo the change press the UNDO button again 01 Adjust the start end points Set the range that you wish to delete with the start end points 02 Press the F6 EDIT button The Sample Edit window will be displayed 03 In the Edit field select DELETE 04 Press the F5 DO IT button The section between the start and end points will be deleted with no gap between Silencing Part of a Sample SILENCE The Silence function will remove the section between the Start and End points leaving silence in its place Tips If you do not like the results of your sample edit the edit can be undone by pressing the UNDO button To redo the change press the UNDO button again 01 Adjust the start end points Set the range you wish to silence with the start end point 02 Press F6 EDIT The Sample Edit window will be displayed 03 In the Edit field select SILENCE 04 Press F5 DO IT The section between the start and end points will be deleted and a section of silence equal in length to the selection will be put in its place Saving part of a sample as a new sample EXTRACT You can extract the part of the sample set with the Start End points as a new sample For example you can extract the snare sounds from the recorded drum loop and save it as a new sample to use it separ
238. ing clicks pops or white noise when using S PDIF your cable is the likely culprit 02 Connect the ADAT output to a Digital Recorder This optical digital output supports 8 channel ADAT format See Setting the ADAT Digital Output on page 195 for more information on configuring ADAT output ll USB Connectivity To connect your computer to the MPC5000 use a standard USB cable For more information on USB mode and connecting your MPC5000 to your computer see Connecting the MPC5000 to Your Computer on page 191 13 il MIDI Connectivity Ms alid da To connect your MIDI devices to the MPC5000 do the following 03 Connect the MIDI output of your MIDI device to one of the MIDI IN ports of the i MPC5000 TO MIDI IN 04 Connect the MIDI input of your MIDI device to one of the MIDI OUT ports on the TO MIDI OUT MPC5000 For more information on connecting MIDI devices to your MPC5000 see Using the MPC5000 with External Devices on page 185 E Footswitch Headphone Connectivity 01 Connect a footswitch to each FOOTSWITCH jack Footswitches will allow you to start and stop your MPC punch out or do many other functions See page 195 for more information 02 Connect headphones to the PHONES input This will allow you to monitor the output of the STEREO OUTS The level of the headphones is controlled with the MAIN VOLUME knob 14 Introduction Basic Concepts and Terminology Please t
239. ing signal Depending on the LFO shape this can vary in sound from a circular waving effect to a stuttering ON OFF effect This effect is best used as an insert by turning DIRECT off See page 150 for more on this WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Controls the speed of the LFO 153 Controls the shape of the LFO varying between a TRIANGLE 0 and a SQUARE 100 wave Phaser 1 Phaser 2 Phaser Sync The Phaser is a classic effect that is created by ganging multiple all pass filter stages to create notches or sharp dips in the frequency spectrum The frequencies of these all pass filters are usually modulated by an LFO to create a dramatic sweeping sound This effect is best used as an insert by turning DIRECT off See page 150 for more on this WetDry 1 2 Sync Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Rate 1 2 Sync ontrols the speed of the LFO Depth 2 Sync Controls the amount of the phaser effect Reso 2 Sync Controls the resonant peaks of the notch filters Stages 2 Sync This selects how many all pass filter stages and thus notches are used LP HP Filter Sweep Sync This effect is a filter with the frequency of the filter modulated by an LFO Both Highpass and Lowpass filters are available WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed s
240. io 44 Inserting a Das INSERT aient odeovada tet dan 44 Deleting a bar DBLDEBLT E 4 ote aaee raa A E de ee A A teca test ri dete tls 45 Changing the order of tracks TRACK MOVE 222 nennen nh nnn huh unn A Chapter 5 SIEP EDIT MOGOO ua A Note about Playing EVE at A a etel ibat tal ied tecta olore coca uci e tuse 47 PID as eg ar hah aac lh ac de MM Mut 47 NON o e PRA RUN 47 Even m T 47 Basic operatio iaa Event SNR UR CT 47 A A RU dM stet assem ca ad d 47 IEZA TRAC QM P bac 48 loue ms T 48 AUTREMENT TT LYONS I TRECE o A ui AM i ML IS M CAL I M ELI 48 DNOIETBVOb oues otis are 48 PAC HV Benno Ey liio dientes E EA AAN EIA 49 Control Change BVeti gon aea orto a ocios 49 Program Change Event susct t etudes eee detouve dee idos 49 Channel Pressure B Veub si o RS RH RUE ts M EIE DAMM I DELI D DD LI I LUE DIDI D EIDtC LETS UE 49 Poly Pressure E VONE used oia este dedu dd cas a 49 Exclisivo Data SS RIT m 49 Editing the exclusive dilata liane tia sata recle eade uf se roni ac E uiis UE n es ch coris DELE ea dica 49 Effect e O E 50 Tempo AA A TEE 50 Real Time VCO AAA DET 50 ESC UL OLA LION VINE cates ac tops toties cae desse nca t cer ME MU LU DUE IM I b Aes d ALS 51 Track Mute Event usns cet tede d er Ee et sui ae
241. ired The following parameters are available to be edited Voice Mode MONO POLY Voice Mode selects whether the synth program will play polyphonically or monophonically Selecting this parameter Polu oO will toggle between MONO and POLY When set to MONO the program will only play one note at a time This is useful for bass or lead style playing When set to POLY many notes can be played at once Note The MPC5000 has 64 notes of polyphony meaning that it can play up to 64 notes at once Trans Transpose sets the base pitch of the program in semitones A program can be transposed up or down to four TESHE t octaves 48 semitones E Legato Lesato E When legato is turned on playing a pad and pressing another pad will change pitch to the newly pressed pad without retriggering the envelopes This is useful for lead style programs Glide i E Lesato E This selects the Glide time of the program Glide will lag the change in pitch from one note to another when a Glide 5 second note is played This parameter selects how long it takes to glide from one note to another This is useful for a lead type sounds and sound effects when the program is set to MONO When a program is set to POLY new notes will glide from the last note released 142 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs Random Range Controls the amount of random detuning for the VCOs This is good for simulating older less stable analog style
242. itive or negative m 140 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs LFO gt Amp The knob sets the amount the selected LFO will affect the volume creating a tremolo effect The corresponding Q LFO El Link AFTER button toggles whether the effect of this modulation will be positive or negative Hmr Program Pan Prost am Pan Ty This parameter controls where the program s sound will play in the stereo field 50 is center O is panned hard left SA and 100 is panned hard right Stereo Spread Steren This parameter sets the stereo position of the individual VCOs A setting of zero will have all 3 oscillators play panned center As the value of this parameter increases VCO1 remains in the center VCO2 pans further to the El left and VCO3 pans further to the right Key gt Pan Ku A This selects whether keytracking will have an effect on pan When set to 0 no panning will take place When set to Pan e 100 the highest and lowest notes will be panned across the stereo field The corresponding Q Link AFTER button B toggles whether the effect of this modulation will be positive or negative LFO Pan LFOS m The knob sets the amount of effect the LFO will have on panning creating a Leslie or rotary speaker type effect Fan The corresponding Q Link AFTER button toggles whether the effect of this modulation will be positive or negative B ENV2 These parameters control the various aspects of Envelope 2 This Env Env
243. ive you an idea of the vast variety of sounds that Synth Programs are capable of producing E Note Number Velocity and Length When you are recording a sequence every time you tap a pad three key pieces of data are recorded on a track The note number i e which pad you struck The note velocity i e how hard you struck the pad The note length i e how long you held the pad down Once this information is recorded the MPC can playback your performance exactly as it was recorded You can also do things like edit or delete notes overdub add more notes to an existing performance tighten up your timing through the Timing Correct feature and much more These various functions are covered in detail in The Sequencer on page 21 If you are familiar with MIDI sequencing the terms and concepts described above may already be familiar to you If you re new to MIDI sequencing don t worry the MPC5000 handles most tasks automatically All other tasks that require user input are covered throughout this manual E RAM RAM Random Access Memory is a space where you can temporarily load audio and MIDI song data The MPC5000 ships with 64MB megabytes of RAM and can hold about 768 seconds over 12 minutes of mono sound The EXM E3 expansion module raises your memory to 192MB and increases your total recording time to over 36 minutes Note that RAM contents are deleted when the MPC5000 is turned off If you wish to keep your work you must s
244. l be displayed 04 Press F5 DO IT button Pressing DO IT will Will erase ALL seauences EEEEZMDO Mba That deletes all sequences Sequence numbers will display unused as a name until new data is recorded E Handling the duration the length of a note at the loop boundary When you are recording a sequence in the loop mode you can specify how the MPC5000 should operate when it reaches the boundary of the loop it reaches the end of the sequence and jumps back to the beginning while you are holding a pad To set this go to OTHER mode and select the Truncate Duration Field This setting allows you to choose how note lengths are handled at the end of the sequence TO SEQ LENGTH The MPC5000 records a note as played up to sequence length In other words if the sequence is two measures long the longest note that would be recorded will be 2 measures as well This is useful when a note is intended to cross from the end of the sequence to the beginning and still continue playing TO SEQ END The MPC5000 cuts the note at the end of the sequence even if you hit Master Level Sus Pedal to Duration Truncate Duration Record Pad Aftertouch Tar Average Flash Temro LED Mute Stor of One Shot THROUGH ADAT Chan 1 2 MAIN OUT L amp R Prosram Audition Hate C 3 607 OTHER ized the pad You cannot record beyond the loop This is useful for making sure all notes end exactly on the beat at the end of the sequence
245. l for the live performance where you wish to change the phrase according to the response of the audience 01 Select the next sequence with the pad and press the F5 HOLD button The button will be highlighted and the MPC5000 will keep playing back the current sequence instead of switching to the next sequence If you press the F5 HOLD button again the Hold function will turn off and the MPC5000 will switch to the next sequence after it finishes playing back the current sequence Tip If you press the F4 SUDDEN button when the hold function is on the MPC5000 will switch to the next sequence right away Next Sequence for Next Bar Changing sequences in NEXT SEQUENCE Mode can be switched at the Ta ESTES beginning of the next bar arl minia 541 13 Sa 14 Sa 13 Sa 16 In NEXT SEQUENCE Mode switch to the next sequence on the next bar drumbresdrunbreaSrock sbrmini ak ELLE by doing the following hee E Dee ees ar i nire 01 While the MPC is playing hit the pad corresponding to the Gaye Sa m5 Sa OF Sa 63 Sequence you would like to switch to p cali vocals ambient Frontlin The Sequence Selected will be indicated in the lower left of the screen as shown to dum annie Esse epi the right 11 1 4 TEAR 02 Press the F3 NXTBAR button woolecar TRIERISISUDDEN LHOLE CLEAR The NXTBAR Button will darken to indicate that it is active The MPC5000 will change sequences at the top of the next bar C
246. l start recording when a MIDI or MMC Start command is received To enter record ready mode simply press and release REC The LED will start to blink indicating that the MPC is in Record Ready mode The MPC will start recording upon pressing PLAY or receiving a MIDI start command See page 23 for more about Record Ready mode Another new function added to the MPC5000 is the ability to perform step recording from the MAIN page by holding down either the REC or OVERDUB button For more information see page 23 22 OVERDUB Button This button is quite similar in function to the REC button The only difference is that OVERDUB lets you add events to an existing sequence overdub instead of overwriting existing events in the sequence Press OVERDUB PLAY START or OVERDUB PLAY to begin overdubbing a sequence To perform a punch in press PLAY OVERDUB while the sequence is playing Press OVERDUB to punch out while recording 23 STOP Button This button stops playback and recording Quickly pressing this button three times sends an all notes off MIDI command stops all sounds from playing back 24 PLAY Button This button starts playback of a sequence or song from its current position 25 PLAY START Button When looping is disabled this button will play a sequence from the beginning Press PLAY START to start from the beginning of the sequence regardless of whether looping is enabled or di
247. laps the sound MONO The MPC5000 does not overlap the sound If you select MONO when you hit the pad several times only the last pad that was hit will be played E Mute Target feature Mute Target works similarly to Mute Group The main difference is that UL Tune i Range Mute Target can be set to work in only one direction Hil kLMH BDimf mxz rth samPle For example you can use Mute Target to have Pad AO1 Mute Pad A02 Zeno sample The advantage of this is that when Pad A02 is played Pad A01 will not be muted Woice POLY Fam Tune 88 dh You can set a maximum of four mute targets per pad Mute Grour 3 Mute Target OFF OFF OFF E Low Frequency Oscillators LFO You can set the LFO on the pad sample in the Program By using the LFO you can get a more powerful sound For example if you set the Pitch in the LFO page the pad sound can have the vibrato effect and if you set the Level in the LFO the pad sound can have the tremolo effect The MPC5000 can set the Filter or Pan in the LFO page as well as the Pitch or Level 01 In the PROGRAM mode press the F2 FItLFO button The FItLFO page will be displayed In the Pgm field you can select the Program you wish to edit 02 Select the desired pad by hitting it In the Pad field the selected pad will be displayed Wave field This field sets the wave for the LFO from TRANGLE SINE SQUARE SAW SAW DOWN or RANDOM Lol Pass 2Pole Res Rate field f
248. lay is set to LINEAR which displays the sample level as it is However some parts fade out part etc may not be displayed in the waveform if the level is too low In this case you can switch to the LOG logarithmic display by pressing the F5 LOG button and you can see the parts whose level is low When you switch to the LOG mode the display in the F5 button will change to LINEAR To switch back to the LINEAR mode press the F5 button again E Converting Divided Samples to SLICED SAMPLES 01 After adjusting the parameters within each region press the F4 CONVRT button The Convert window will be displayed Here you can select two different ways for converting the divided sample SLICED SAMPLE or PATCHED PHRASE 02 In the Convert to field select SLICED SAMPLES Release This sets the length that is added to the release after dividing a sample E M MM If you set this to larger value the release of the divided sample will be long and the sample data will be larger in size as well x Create New Program E Convert to HERA If you set this to YES the MPC5000 makes a Program where each region is assigned to pads from PAD A01 A16 in order T Release 1B 03 After adjusting each parameter press F5 DO IT F Create new Program The MPC5000 will process the SLICED SAMPLES and then the TRIM page with Ed CANCEL the divided sample will be displayed The new sample name of the divided sample will be the original sampl
249. layed in HLL the Notes field You can select several pads If you hit a different pad by mistake you can cancel the selection by hitting the pad again To restart the pad selection turn the DATA wheel to the left The value in the Note field will be reset to ALL so that you can select the pad that you want from the beginning When MIDI track is selected The display changes to show the selected region by note number You will set the upper limit and the lower limit of the note in the field The MPC5000 will edit only the events within the note numbers set in this field E Copying events COPY You can copy events within the selected region to another place The source data will remain in the original location 01 Select the Edit field in the EVENT page of the SEQ EDIT mode ti NE From and select COPY Sa 61 Tor_Gun 461 681 8068 Tk 61 Track l The various fields necessary for the copying will be displayed 002 01 AAG A O ac IO 02 In the Range field and the Pads Notes field select the region 531 61 Tor_Gur and notes that you wish to copy as l EP REPLACE 03 In the From sq field and the Tk field in the right select the Starts 661 61 000 source sequence and track Tapies 1 04 In the To sq and the Tk field in the right select the destination sequence and track 42 Editing Sequences 05 06 07 08 In the Mode field specify how to copy the data to the destina
250. ld Like the Now field in the MAIN page this field displays the current time position of the sequence Prg Program field This displays which program is being affected with pad mute Trk field Displays which track number is currently being affected The 16 blocks displayed represent the pads The pad whose sample mute is set to off will be highlighted Using the Trk field it is possible to have the same program muted different ways for multiple tracks E Operation Hitting a pad when the pad mute page is displayed switches the pad mute setting from off to on for that pad on the selected track instead of playing the sound E Pad Mute Groups Pads can be grouped together so hitting one pad will affect the other pads in the same group PAD MUTE GROUPS are accessed by pressing F4 PHGRP from the Track Mute page To add a pad to a group do the following 03 Press a pad For an example press PAD A01 How BERTI 81 888 Psm Prosram 441 The mute group selection for PADO 1 is selected f E Ala All 04 Change the selection from OFF to 1 05 Press another pad For example press PAD A02 A The mute group selection for PADO2 is selected OFF OF 06 Change the selection from OFF to 1 07 Press F3 PdMUTE to return to the PAD MUTE page TEMUTE UAE a a S PGP 08 Play PAD AO1 Notice that now PAD A02 mutes along with PAD A01 Up to 16 different mute groups can be created Note When a pad is pressed while
251. ld the selected data 04 Press F6 DO IT to write the selected data to the disk The WRITE CD R RW window will be displayed Write CD R RW 05 Press F5 DO IT The MPC5000 will begin writing the data to the CD The data will be automatically written to the ROOT of the CD If you write a folder to the CD additional files and folders within the selected folder will be copied within that folder maintaining the directory structure You may repeat the above process until the disk is full or you ve added all the files you wish to have on your CD Once you are satisfied with the content of your CD the CD will need to be closed This will finish the CD and allow it to be accessed on a computer or another CD equipped MPC See the section titled Close Session on page 176 for more information 176 Saving and Loading DISK Mode E Erasing CD R Ws The major advantage CD RWs have over standard CD R s is the ability to erase and rewrite data to the disk before it is closed Once a CD RW is closed a CD RW like a regular CD R will be able to be played in any compact disk player but unlike a CD R a CD RW can be erased and used again To access the ERASE CD RW function do the following 01 Press F3 UTILIT The UTILITY page will be displayed Tia OPERATION WILL TOTALLY WIPE 02 Select ERASE CD RW in the Function field MES PIG t 03 Press F6 DO IT to erase the CD RW The ERASE CD RW page will be displayed EN
252. learn about the SEQ EDIT mode where you can edit entire regions at one time SEQ EDIT Mode can be accessed by pressing the MODE button and then PAD 12 Selecting a region for the editing In the EVENTS page there are six different editing options in the Edit field COPY MOVE TRANSPOSE SHIFT TIME VELOCITY and DURATION The procedure to select the editing region is the same for all six options Let us begin with the selection of the editing region Tips see page 25 for information on how to ERASE E Setting the Range Select the Range field in the EVENTS page of the SEQ EDIT mode In the Range field you can set the start and end points of the editing Sates BB81 81 888 region For example to edit the first bar of a 2 bar sequence set this To 604 61 006 field to 001 01 000 002 01 000 In this case the event at the 002 01 000 point will not be edited If you set the end point 002 01 000 like in this picture the area right before this point will be included in the area E Setting the pad note number 01 Select the Pads field in the EVENTS page of the SEQ EDIT mode The display of the Pads field depends on the type of the track that you have selected When DRUM track is selected By default the field is set to ALL which means the MPC5000 will edit all the pads If you wish to edit only a specific pad position the cursor inthe Fads Pads field and hit the desired pad The pad number will be disp
253. lected event and paste it to another location proceed as follows Ol In the event list select the event that you wish to copy 96l 6l 600 WiewiBLL e Bl PiAbe 3582T D oou 565 You can select several events by pressing the down cursor button while holding the amp a1 m1 229 PsQa d S257 60 asl 43 SHIFT button 01 02 0090 P A82 Z623T 48D 186 58 HALAS 248 P HBizc dz5T BD 1120 60 When you press F3 EDIT the display of the F4 and F5 buttons will change to 881 602 486 P HH s 463T D Sailr 55 COPY and PASTE respectively until you release the button ddi d3 BBB P ASE HaT BD liil 35 661 083 6606 Piaget d45Ts 80 Lisl 35 03 In the Now field select the time position that you wish to 881 093 248 PrHBec 3SS2T 60 isi 31 paste the event to MOVE EDIT j COPY l FASTE 04 Press F3 EDIT and F5 PASTE button at the same time The selected event will be pasted Moving an Event To move the selected event to another location proceed as follows This differs from the Copy Paste command in that the selected event is a deleted from the original location after the Move function 01 In the Event list select the Event that you wish to move You can select several Events by pressing the down cursor button Times 661 61 668 while holding the SHIFT button i Move To 661 061 068 02 Press F3 EDIT and F2 MOVE at the same time When you press F3 EDIT the dis
254. les that are assigned to a pad 01 In the Sample page of PROGRAM mode hit the pad you wish to edit The pad number display in the left of the screen will change according to the pad Pam Hmb Pm Kit you hit 02 Select the Lvl field Ru see iE gi no samrle 03 Adjust the volume to the desired level faith samrle You can audition the level changes by hitting the pad as you set the level 1 mE 06 BD 04 Select the Tune field Mte dis ES po cane Mute Target OFF OFF OFF OFF The Tune field has two fields divided by a decimal point The 2 digits on the left set tuning by semitones The 2 digits on the right change the tuning by cents 100 cents 1 semitone 05 Set the tune to the desired pitch offset You can audition the tune changes by hitting the pad as you adjust the pitch E Velocity You can control the sample volume by velocity how hard you hit the pad With this feature you can play the pads like real drums when you hit the pad strongly the sound will be loud and vice versa 01 In the Sample page of PROGRAM mode hit the pad you wish to edit The pad number display in the left of the screen will change according to the pad you hit 02 Press the F5 softbutton AmpEnv The Amp Envelope window will be displayed This window is also available by selecting the L VL Field and pressing the WINDOW Button 03 Select the V gt Level field UL ul l88 121 04 Adjust the field to the desired va
255. lize LOCATE 4 Introduction 18 STEP Buttons And gt These buttons will step you through a sequence according to the value of the timing correct setting See STEP EDIT Mode on page 47 for more about this 19 GO TO Button This button displays the locate window Entering a locate point and then pressing F5 GO TO will move you to the selected position in the sequence LOCATE 1 LOCATE 2 You can also memorize a locate point Select a point in your sequence LOCATE 3 and press the GO TO button Select number you want to memorize LOCATE 4 Hl ae and press F2 CAPTUR to memorize this point LOCATE 5 Bl 1 CEP TUE d CLOSE NE 1T 20 BAR Buttons lt lt And gt gt These buttons let you move through your sequence by bars See STEP EDIT Mode on page 47 for more about this gt 1 J k i pS Gir 01 EE CEXE OF 0i Baas yl BEEBE SEE 111 dod nans A FU E BI OF BD pr 21 REC Button This button enables recording of your performances Pressing REC PLAY START or REC PLAY will begin recording to a sequence Any existing events in your sequence will be overwritten by your new performance You can punch in by pressing PLAY REC during playback and punch out by pressing the REC button a second time See page 24 for more about punching in and out on your MPC New to the MPC5000 is Record Ready mode When in Record Ready mode the MPC wil
256. ll be positive or negative a Vel Cutoff Sets the amount of effect velocity will have on filter cutoff The corresponding Q Link AFTER button toggles HE whether the effect of this modulation will be positive or negative EV Eri En 1 En1 Eri These parameters control the various aspects of Envelope 1 This Attack Decas 1 Sust kel l envelope affects the filter and is used for various modulation routings E 31 Attack This parameter determines how long an envelope will take to reach maximum level when a pad is struck Sounds ranging from a slow swelling violin to drum like attacks are possible by adjusting this parameter This field also appears on the Basic page See page 135 for more information Decay This parameter determines how long the sound will take to go from the attack phase to the sustain portion of the envelope This field also appears on the Basic page See page 135 for more information Sust This sets the level at which the filter remains while the pad is being held after completion of the decay phase See page 135 for more information Rel Sets how long a sound will decay when the pad is released This field also appears on the Basic page See page 135 for more information E VCA Paros nE BA ue AS Prosram Wel gt kes El LFO gt W VCA stands for Voltage Controlled Amplifier This page is where in depth 57 y ame Ty Ane o Amp Q controls for the output volume and the amplifier envelop
257. ll learn how to name these items Select a field which you wish to name with the cursor and turn the DATA wheel The Name windows will appear Note In this window the cursor is displayed as an underscore instead of highlights You can enter the name either by using the keypad or by using the DATA wheel E Entering letters with DATA wheel You can change letters selected with a cursor by turning DATA wheel in the Name window Move the cursor with RIGHT LEFT cursor button and enter letters You can enter letters using both DATA wheel and pads E Entering letters with the Numeric Keypad Much like a telephone three or four letters are assigned to each number on the keypad By hitting a number the corresponding letter is entered Below we will describe how to enter Bass O1 instead of Sequence O1 01 Press the UP cursor button to make the first letter capitalized Pressing the UP cursor button allows you to enter a capitalized letter 02 Hit 2 two times Hitting 2 once enters a twice enters b three times enters c four times enters 2 03 Press the RIGHT cursor button and move the cursor to the right If you enter the next letter using a different button the cursor will move to the right automatically However when you enter the letters which are assigned to the same button you need to press the RIGHT cursor button to move the cursor manually In this example A and B are assigned to the same but
258. ls how much the outputted wet signal will be offset from the original input signal Chorus 4 Voice 2 Voice A Chorus effect uses an LFO to modulate the pitch of the input signal which is then added back to the dry signal In small doses this will create the illusion of multiple voices playing at once Turn up the Feedback and Depth for more pronounced shimmering and watery sounds This effect is best used as an insert by turning DIRECT off See page 150 for more on this WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Delay Controls how much the outputted wet signal will be offset from the original input signal Amount This adjusts the magnitude of the LFO modulation Width Controls how much of the frequency range of the incoming signal is effected Feedbk Controls how much of the output signal is fed back to the input creating a more pronounced effect Controls the speed of the LFO Autopan Autopan BeatSync This effect uses an LFO to move the incoming signal back and forth across the stereo field creating a rotating effect This effect is best used as an insert by turning DIRECT off See page 150 for more on this WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Controls the panning speed Tremolo Tremolo BeatSync This effect uses an LFO to raise and lower the volume of the incom
259. lue while checking the level by hitting the desired pad If you set this field to 0 the sample will be played back at the maximum level regardless of the amount of pressure The larger you set the value the bigger the difference of the level will be 05 Press F4 CLOSE to return to the Sample page You can set more detailed settings for sample volume by using the other parameters in the Amp Envelope window For more information about setting them see the section entitled Amplitude Envelope on page 123 Velocity Cycle Random Sample Switching Zone Play Samples assigned to the pads can be switched to play in three different ways depending on your desired play mode E Velocity Sample Switching When you assign more than one sample to a pad you can switch between samples by how hard you hit the pad T Play Mode E Abi Ambient Kick 01 In the Sample page of PROGRAM mode select the desired pad by cone Plau VELOCITY EPIS A Layer 1 Fan 02 Assign the samples to the 1 field and the 2 field ONE SHOT Pan OWE SHOT Fan 03 Press WINDOW OHE SHOT Pan x CLOSE This will open the PLAY MODE Window 04 In the Zone Play field select VELOCITY Note VELOCITY is the default setting for pads 05 Press F4 CLOSE to exit the PLAY MODE window 06 Select the Range field in the same row with the 1 field and set the velocity range to trigger the sample assigned to the field The Range
260. m The Tempo Change window will be displayed Prezzina DO IT will fix tempo of all 02 Press F5 FIX F sequences 7 The Fix Tempo window will be displayed d CO IT ARM E 03 In the Fix tempo field select the desired tempo 04 Press F5 DO IT All the sequences used in the song will be set to the tempo that is set in the Fix tempo field E Ignoring tempo change events in a sequence You can set the MPC5000 to ignore tempo change events that are set in a sequence 01 In the Tempo field in the step list press the WINDOW button The TEMPO CHANGE window will be displayed 02 Select a setting in the Ignore tempo change events in sequence field NO The MPC5000 will execute the tempo change events in the sequence YES The MPC5000 will ignore the tempo change events in the sequence 03 Press the F4 CLOSE button This closes the window E Converting a song to a sequence You can convert a song to one long sequence You can record or overdub to the converted sequence in the MAIN mode like other sequences You can also edit the sequence in the STEP EDIT mode or the SEQ EDIT mode Judd uo NE E 01 In SONG mode select any sequence shown in the Step List and press WINDOW The CONVERT SONG window will be displayed Sona E 5aonasBz 02 In the Song field select the song that you wish to convert rauen en E Scd 03 In the Sequence field select the destination sequence Track status REFERENCED TO 1S
261. mage to the right The MPC5000 will switch to the EN Se aue 41 IHETEBRISLIBDEHI HOLE l CLEAR next sequence after it plays the current sequence to the end Tip You can change the next sequence by hitting the pads until the current sequence ends Tip When no other sequence is selected the MPC5000 will continue to playback the current sequence over and over Tip You can cancel the next sequence that is displayed below the sequence list by pressing the F6 CLEAR button E SUDDEN Button Normally the MPC5000 will switch to the next sequence after it plays the current sequence to the end However you can also switch to the next sequence before the MPC5000 finishes playing back the current sequence by pressing the F4 SUDDEN button It is useful for the live performance where you need to switch to the next phrase at a certain cue 01 Select the next sequence with the pads and press the F4 SUDDEN button The MPC5000 will switch to the next sequence at the point the button is pressed Tip If you press the pad while holding the F4 SUDDEN button the MPC5000 will switch to the next sequence at the point the pad is hit E HOLD Button Normally when the next sequence is selected the MPC5000 will switch to the next sequence after it finishes playing the current sequence If you press the F5 HOLD button the MPC5000 will keep playing back the current sequence until you press the F5 HOLD again It is usefu
262. me name the File Exists window will be displayed For more information about the File Existing window see the Saving a Sample section on page 166 E Saving all Programs and Samples You can save all the programs and the samples in the MPC5000 at the same time 01 Select the destination folder for the files to be saved See page 165 for more information on selecting destination folders 02 In the Type field select SAVE ALL PROGRAMS amp SAMPLES 03 Press the F6 DO IT button The SAVE ALL PROGRAMS window will be displayed 04 In the Save a Program window make the settings for each field Make new folder field When you save the data you can create a new folder inside in the current folder and save the data in the new folder When you use SAVE ALL PROGRAMS amp SAMPLES a lot of data may be saved With the Make new folder option you can easily create a folder for the data you wish to save NO The MPC5000 will save the data in the selected folder A new folder is not created YES The MPC5000 will create a new folder and save the data in that folder If you select NO the Replace same files field will be displayed If the destination folder already has the file with the same name select NO to cancel the operation and select YES to replace the file with the new data When you select YES the Folder name field will be displayed Enter the folder name in this field 05 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will sta
263. me window and press the F5 ENTER button the MPC5000 will start to save the data E Saving a Synth or Sample Program You can save a synth program or a sample program and all the samples UMS ese eee used for that program by doing the following E 01 Select the destination folder for the program to be saved n SAMPLES See page 165 for more information on selecting destination folders AS E 4 Rerlace same files YES 02 In the Type field select SAVE A PROGRAM I Prosram format MPDCSaBO 03 In the Item field select the program to save You can select any program in memory by turning the DATA wheel 04 Press the F6 DO IT button If the program is a Synth Program the program will be saved If the program to be saved is a Sample Program the SAVE A PROGRAM window will be displayed 05 In the Save a Program window choose the settings for each of the following fields Save You can choose whether or not to save the sample data sounds with the program data WITH SAMPLES The MPC5000 will save the program data and the samples used for the program Normally you should select this option When you load the saved program the MPC5000 will load the samples automatically PROGRAM ONLY The MPC5000 will save only the program data It does not save the sample data When you are sure that the samples used for the program are in the selected folder you can reduce the time to save the data by selecting this opera
264. module The MIDI output of the MPC5000 will be sent back to the MIDI keyboard which will plays the keyboard s sound module For more information about the setting of your MIDI keyboard s local control see the keyboard s operation manual If your MIDI keyboard does not have a local control setting deactivate the MPC5000 s soft through function In this case the MPC5000 will output only the data that is recorded on the track not the incoming MIDI signal MPC5000 MIDI KEYBOARD 01 Select the MIDI SYNC mode by pressing the MODE button and hitting the PAD 8 MIDI 02 Press the F1 MIDI button The MIDI page will be displayed 03 Select the Soft thru field and select OFF The soft thru field determines how to output the incoming MIDI signal You can select the following options OFF The MPC5000 will not output the incoming MIDI signal AS TRACK The MPC5000 refers to the MIDI channel setting of the sequence s track The channel information of the incoming MIDI signal will be replaced with the MIDI channel selected the track OMNI A The MPC5000 will output the incoming MIDI data as it is from MIDI OUT A OMNI B The MPC5000 will output the incoming MIDI data as it is from MIDI OUT B OMNI C The MPC5000 will output the incoming MIDI data as it is from MIDI OUT C OMNI D The MPC5000 will output the incoming MIDI data as it is from MIDI OUT D OMNI AB The MPC5000 will output the incoming MIDI data as i
265. mphasis to be applied to the cutoff frequency of the filter This field also appears on the Basic Filter page See page 135 for more information Res n B Type Selects the type of filter to be used This field also appears on the Basic page See page 135 for more information The following types are available LoPass This filter cuts out the high frequencies and passes the low frequencies HiPass This filter cuts out the low frequencies and passes the high frequencies BPass Band Pass Filter This filter passes the selected frequencies and cuts out the other frequencies BStop Band Stop Filter This filter cuts the selected frequencies and passes all other frequencies BBoost Band Boost Filter This filter boosts the selected frequencies and passes all other frequencies Model1 This is an analog style 4 pole filter modeled after a famous vintage semi modular synthesizer This filter will clip distort when fed a loud input level Model2 This is another analog style filter with a mellow resonance and slight fattening distortion in the lower frequencies Model3 This filter is a crazy analog modeling filter capable of howling piercing resonance and jaw rattling sub frequencies Watch your speakers Vocal1 This filter is a formant filter modeled on the human voice This 3 band 3 band pass filters version emulates the ah and oo vowel sounds Vocal2 A 3 band formant filter which emulates the oh and ee vowel sounds
266. n 02 Select the second effect block of FX2 03 Press the WINDOW butt turn the DATA wheel si da CC ress the utton or turn the wheel m l l M COMP This will display the EFFECT EDIT window 04 In the FX 1 Block 2 field scroll with the DATA wheel to choose delay and press F5 SELECT This brings you back to the EFFECT EDIT window 05 Press F4 CLOSE to exit the EFFECT EDIT window 06 Hit a pad assigned to buss 1 Notice that now there is a delay effect added to the reverb effect Tip Setting the send level high or setting this busses direct field to OFF and adjusting the relationship of each effect to one another using each effect s Wet Dry parameter can allow for even greater flexibility For more information on editing each effect individually see the section titled Editing Effects on page 151 Effect Buss Chaining Effect chaining allows for the output of one buss to be routed into the Effect Set Bi EfFFectal input of another Buss 1 can be routed through buss 2 and buss 3 can be routed to buss 4 This allows a program to be able to use up to four effects in series Fal2FA2 All Inputs sent to FX1 are first routed through FX1 then through FX2 um Inputs routed to FX2 will be sent through FX2 only To turn on Effects Chaining do the following Direct OH 01 Press MODE PAD11 EFFECTS to enter Effects Mode BIS 1 2 TER M COMP 02 Select the FX1 gt FX2 field 03 Change the FX1 gt FX2 f
267. n incoming signal The difference is that the Resampler applies a complex suite of filters and anti aliasing to attempt to retain the sound quality This is a method used by popular vintage samplers and sampling drum machines from the 80 s Using the Resampler effect can be effective at achieving a dirty sound on drum loops without the harshness of distortion Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effect Pate Determines the sample rate the resampler will reduce the source material to ped This acts the same as the Decimator shown above Routing Effect Buss Output to Individual Outs The effected output of each effects buss can be routed individually to the MPC5000 s individual outs This is useful for recording only the effected signal or to separate the dry and affected signal for live use To assign a Buss output to Individual Outs do the following 01 From the EFFECTS Mode select the desired Buss 02 Select the Buss Output Assignment Field as shown L R You can adjust each output with the DATA wheel The following choices are available L R The effect output will be sent to the Stereo Out 1 2 The effect output will be sent stereo to ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 1 2 3 4 The effect output will be sent stereo to ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 3 4 5 6 The effect output will be sent stereo to ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 5 6 7 8 The effect output will be sent stereo to ASSIGNABLE
268. n insert tempo changes in a track so that you can change the tempo within a sequence When you use the Tempo Change feature select the BPM field in the MAIN mode and press the WINDOW button to open the TEMPO CHANGE window and set the Tempo change field to ON When you turn the tempo change feature on the BPM field in the MAIN page will be displayed as below The tempo display on the left is the original tempo set for the sequence On the right the tempo you changed with the tempo change event will be displayed The sequence will actually be played at the tempo in the right To enter STEP EDIT mode press F2 EDIT while in the TEMPO CHANGE window BPM 163 8 gt 184 8 31 E Setting the Loop for a Sequence By default the MPC5000 has the sequence loop feature on It is useful when you create a short sequence With the sequence loop feature you can overdub a new performance on top of a previous performance allowing you to layer your tracks while playing back a sequence repeatedly However when you are working on a long song created as a single sequence it may be better to loop only the part of the song that you are working on Also when you wish to play freely without worrying about the bars or times it is better to turn the loop feature off In this section you will learn how to set the loop feature 01 In the MAIN page select the Loop field First Bar First Last Bar Bar Last Bar LI
269. n of the selected track will be highlighted 03 Select which FX Bus to send the track to To adjust this value simply move the cursor to the FX row and use the DATA wheel OF No effect will be used 1 to 4 The effect bus number selected 1 to 4 will be used The track sound will be sent to the selected effect section 04 Adjust the SEND level by selecting the control in the SEND row by turning the DATA wheel The display in the SEND row indicates the output setting The graphical knob display in the FX row indicates the current send level Increasing this level will increase the amount of effect for the selected track Note the SEND knob in the SEND row will be disabled if the selected FX bus has DIRECT OUT Disabled For more information on DIRECT OUT see page 150 Note Each FX bus can be assigned to a separate output allowing for the dry signal and the affected signal to be routed independently For more information see page 162 E Muting a Track Each Hard Disk track can be muted from TRKMIX mode To mute a Hard Disk track do the following 01 In the HD RECORD mode press F3 TRKMIX The TRKMIX page will be displayed Each column indicates track 1 though 8 from the left and the currently selected track is highlighted 02 Hit the pad corresponding to the desired track The column for the selected track will now be highlighted 03 In the MUTE row Displayed as M scroll with the DATA wheel to select one of the following
270. n the program file as the sample name If you change the name of the sample file the MPC5000 cannot find it when loading the program E Deleting a File To delete the files on the hard drive or memory card do the following Tare SAVE A SAMPLE 01 Press F2 SAVE to open the SAVE page Item SU KICK AAUTOLOAG 02 Select the desired file with the cursor You can move through the directories with left right cursor buttons 03 Press and hold the F5 EDIT button The Function buttons will change as shown 04 While holding in the F5 EDIT button press F2 DELETE The selected file will be deleted Note You can select a folder and delete it If you delete a folder all the files in that folder will be deleted E Copying Files Tyre SAVE A SAMPLE To copy files from one folder to another or from one drive to another do Item 2828 KICE the following AUTOLOAG 01 Press F2 SAVE to open the SAVE page 02 Select the desired file or folder to move with the cursor You can move through the directories with left right cursor buttons 03 Press and hold the F5 EDIT button The Function buttons will change as shown 04 While holding in the F5 EDIT button press F1 COPY 05 This will copy the selected file and open the COPY TO window 06 In the Directory List select the directory to paste the file to 07 Press F5 PASTE The selected file will be copied to the selected location
271. n to Pad 01 In DISK Mode select a sample to load E Pam IEEE PH one 1 Hrc 5Db82 5 Ul The LOAD A SAMPLE window will open as shown on the right d gone 2 Arc oSDbta3 5 ul one 3 FM Pta1 f Le one 4 FM Pray MH Ue He Poma 02 Press the F3 NewPgm Button This will open the NEW SAMPLE PROGRAM Window as shown on the right Here the program s name can also be set 03 Press DO IT A new program will be created Program BAd ASA CO IT E Loading Audio from the Internal CD Drive optional If you select CD in the Source field you can load audio tracks from the Audio CD in the internal CD drive optional as well as the sample file 01 In the File field select the track You can audition the selected track with pressing F4 PLAY button 02 Press the F5 DO IT The MPC5000 will start loading the audio track The maximum internal memory with the EXM E3 optional module installed is 192MB Approximately 18 minutes can be sampled in this manner as you will need approximately 10MB for each stereo track minute E Loading a Program You can load a program file one by one 01 Select a program file and load it The LOAD A PROGRAM window o HLE PILED will be displayed To cancel the operation press the F4 CANCEL button 02 In the Load field select if you wish to load the samples as well WITH SAMPLES Rerlace same files in memores HO The MPC5000 will load th
272. nal For example when you send the signal to the MPC5000 through a mixer both the source sound and the monitored sound may be sent to the mixer To avoid this you should set this to OFF E Peak hold Reset peak feature The level meter in the SAMPLE page has the peak hold feature This is a useful feature for adjusting the signal level during recording Normally the display of the level meter changes in real time according to the level of the incoming signal However the peak hold displays the maximum level and keeps the level even when the level decreases To reset the peak hold display press the F1 or F2 RESET PEAK button in the SAMPLE page 99 E RECORD INFORMATION Window Important information on your recording can be accessed while in REC ifs 45 CEHEGHMRENEME creii i BMR PR SAMPLE Mode via the RECORD INFORMATION Window To access the mas RECORD INFORMATION Window press the WINDOW button while in REC SAMPLE Mode J E E A N The following information and parameters can be accessed here Largest recording time 12m 40s Total free memory itime 2 l18m B2z Pre Record Time To avoid clicks pops or errors when recording the MPC5000 can 1S2ME installed cache the beginning of the recording When the recording starts the CLOSE cache is added to the beginning of the sample clint For example if you are recording from CD and you press the F6 RECORD button to start recording at 3 minutes sample will conta
273. nal osse east e peti a i 92 Chapter ld Samplilg stereo ida 95 Preparing the recoFdlilig ninia AAA AAA AAA 95 N EStartino the TECOS ddd Uddin ti ela ot 96 Sampling detailed InfofmatliON ees sese eo uu Eoo Sua SIC GOD pana CO OR GO RR ROO KG GE CORR GF GER CR Rr 97 Recording the digital signal 55 5 1x sns rau ERE wa QUE UvaE Uu as 97 E Prep ring the TECOS los Ma eed ben det tana 97 RECOFGING the MAIN QUE ini A A VY EM ME VENIENS SEINE NE 97 EH Preparation FOr RECOGIDO uoi ri sas 97 Recording the internal CD s sound eeeeereeeee rennen enun nnn a u uuu 97 m Preparation Fot Recordings scie ouo A DUE ote pe est a Ca istituti asd tee t A reu sia tL nie Seat Li eed 97 Other FOatures TEES LL ri I 98 E Monitoring Teatre ac erepto cile dated tisdale adds 98 NH Peak bhold Reset peak Tea tins conde sco A ET ntu tuta Pact crane n ett xir roti onesnt eeu u ie 98 BH RECORD INFORMATION WInDdOQW 1 itti nike cias eoi seen dd o Lex e d 99 Direct Recordmg TOUS a elec ee 99 E Preparing the TOeCOLGIBIg heieri teca Foe edat es da fa a tonta iria 99 E CI UIDAUCEISCOUDI NOTE 100 Chapter 12 Sample Editing TRIM Mode esee nnn 101 Setting tlie Stait End PONES i 5 siosuavo E icsaGuadusvRx va REDE UE E IGraZvRE KEEN DPI NES EQUES KM REDERU KENN RNEETENENES 101 MY XAboutthe Wavetortm lsplay arcada leidas 101 EH EBPISRIGHTISBOLH WavVerorm Vi a eomm
274. nal sound module such as a synth via MIDI E Sending MIDI Program Changes When you select No in the Program field the MIDI Program number field will appear in the right side of the Program field You can set the MIDI Program Number from 1 to 128 The selected MIDI Program Number will be transmitted from the selected MIDI OUT in MIDI field when the sequence is selected or the PLAY START button is pressed While selecting the No in the Program field pressing the WINDOW button will open the Program Change window You can set a MIDI Bank Select message to transmit together with a MIDI Program Change message in this window You can also set BGPA i PREI bi EHS whether a MIDI Program Change message recorded in the track is transmitted or not Transmit Program Changes Bank Select ON OFF in this track OFF Selects whether a Bank Select message is transmitted or not Transmit Bank Select Pros Chanse E MSE MSB LSB 0 127 evers loor E LSB Sets the MSB Control Change 0 and LSB Control Change 32 of a MIDI Bank Select message from 0 to 127 CLUS Transmit Program Changes in This Track Selects whether a MIDI Program Change message recorded in the track is transmitted or not Transmit Prog Change every loop Selects whether the sequence will send program changes whenever the sequence loops or only on start E Track Velocity Track Velocity allows you to adjust the Velo
275. nd Loading DISK Mode A AA A re ee 03 Press and hold the F5 EDIT button The Function row will change as displayed on the right 04 Press the F4 NEW button This will open the NAME EDIT window 05 Specify a name for the new folder For more information about setting the name see the Setting Names section on page 20 06 In the NAME EDIT window press the F5 ENTER button The new folder will be created in the selected directory In the Directory window the new folder is selected E Saving a Sample You can save samples one by one 07 Select the destination folder for the sample to be saved See page 165 for more information on selecting destination folders 08 In the Type field select SAVE A SAMPLE 09 In the Item field select the sample to save You can scroll through all samples in memory by turning the DATA wheel 10 Press the F6 DO IT button The MPC5000 starts saving the sample When the destination folder has the data with the same name If the destination folder already has the data with the same name the File Exists window will be displayed To cancel the operation press F4 CANCEL To overwrite the data on the memory card with the new data press the F2 REPLAC button The data in the memory card will be replaced with the new data Pressing the F5 RENAME button brings up the Name window where you can change the name of the file you are about to save When you enter the name in the Na
276. nd parametric equalizer and two shelving filters This effect is best used as an insert by turning DIRECT off See page 150 for more on this LowFreg Freql Sets the frequency of the first band of the parametric EQ Gain1 Sets the amount of attenuation or boost that will be applied around the frequency selected with Freq1 This parameter sets the width of the band that is being affected by Freq1 Sets the frequency of the second band of the parametric EQ Sets the amount of attenuation or boost that will be applied around the frequency selected with Freq2 This parameter sets the width of the band that is being affected by Freq2 4 Band PEQ This effect is a powerful four band parametric equalizer with four independent EQ points This effect is best used as an insert by turning DIRECT off See page 150 for more on this foe This parameter sets the width of the band that is being affected by Freq4 Q4 Gain1 Sets the amount of attenuation or boost that will be applied around the frequency selected with Freq1 Gain2 Sets the amount of attenuation or boost that will be applied around the frequency selected with Freg2 Gain3 Sets the amount of attenuation or boost that will be applied around the frequency selected with Freg3 Sets the amount of attenuation or boost that will be applied around the frequency selected with Freg4 155 Delay Mono Delay Mono BeatSync Delay takes the original signal waits a specified pe
277. ng a phrase sample Dividing a sample by detecting the attack part of the phrase Dividing a sample into regions of equal length po o po Page 100 Page 100 Adjusting the start end point of the region Page 101 Wi ew LEFT View LEFT uae n hatLrFalFFz Wiew LEFT lie LEFT TEE LEFT 438 TRIM MINNS SHAP CHOP EDIT P 102 Page 101 quedo 112 Sample Editing TRIM Mode E Dividing a Sample Automatically AUTO 01 In the Sample field within the TRIM page select the sample _ lms aman Miew LEFT you wish to edit Po SEE You can set the sample range of your edit by adjusting the start end points For more information about adjusting the start end points see Setting the Start End Points on page 101 02 Press F5 CHOP The Chop Shop window will be displayed 03 In the Mode field select AUTO TRIM LOOP SHAP 8 Recovery time 0 100 This sets the minimum time between the attack and the next attack If you set this time too long continuous attacks may not be detected Select a smaller value when the sample has a lot of attack parts E Mode Threshold 0 100 j Recovery Time Threshold This sets the detectable level of an attack The smaller the value the nca d Sensitivity more sensitive the detection will be so if you select a very low value everything will register as an attack Sensitivity O 100 This sets the sensitivity use
278. nico oak da te iini fana a Mole Lir rese 101 NH Adjusting the Start pol asada ed 101 NH Adj sting the end Pontarsais ioi e O a uet ai 102 E Snappinstothe Next Zero Crossing SNAP iu e eaten terii hate er OCHO s ac dado 102 LOOSE TAS AE cl a RE au qa stre I oc tu E ette 102 Adjusting the TRIM and LOOP Points at the Same Time LOCK 102 Deleting Unused Parts from a Sample DISCARD 103 Deleting a Section of a Sample DELETE eeeeeeeeeee 103 Silencing Part of a Sample SILENCE e e eeeeeee uuu uu uuu uuu uuu uuRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRA 103 Saving part of a sample as a new sample EXTRACT ssuus2 s 103 Converting a Stereo Sample to Mono STEREO TO MONO eene nennen nnn 104 Sample WINGOW features six eu ve Perge Ra ago OC MR REAL B BERN RE RR QD RC RC RR RR 104 E nar tn CS sample IEIme roe sce tie i Pa egies eee du uu tede IPLE Mb d TUS yes 104 E Changing the pitch of a Sample uui oto ni te a Seats dace i wa pee e eret ea tru e E oH WT Erga D dala AE cita 104 E Copying a uude eeen iar RTE EE EEE REE EEE EEEE EEE TETARA EERE AEE EEEE EEEE 104 W Deleting a sample sorire A te dit 105 NH Deletimoallsampliesunns na Ss ds E E a 105 E Assign a Sample to a Pad directly in TRIMEMOIS avoir A o
279. nsitivity and Velocity Curve cccccccccccssssccecessessscececcseseseeeeecsesesseeecessesaeesecsesesaeeeseseesesseeeeees 197 MSY STEM erre ccm 197 Mm Initialize Lo Factory JIDefault de Sites 198 MB Howto UppradedthelvIPC 3000 s A ettet lnk tea A tcc A A E A tet He 198 Specifications ei co aoc RO A A A AAA MEE CISCO E 200 LIMES iE Generato TT OU 200 N ER dai al T oM hasta eto M DN I m E Eo M sc eu am Lt 200 NW SOQqUeleet uses toa S Aor a ios ca 200 NH puts Outputssadonso O oto E c e i scc pp I A ene Tti 201 E Standard dceeSsSOPIes alos ici condos tetas c n todas b Fon di cauaa ead Ls decir AA atado 201 II RECI 201 NH Dala Compatible A Ai ted ashing 201 MIDI Implementation Cha lion E Aa Chapter 1 Introduction Thank you for purchasing the MPC5000 The MPC5000 is a powerful musical production tool and this manual describes how to use the MPC to its fullest potential We re sure you d like to jump in and start using your MPC5000 quickly To help you do this check out the MPC5000 s Quickstart guide The Quickstart guide is a separate manual that should have everything you need to start playing quickly Once you re ready for more in depth information this reference manual is for you This manual will describe the workings of every single feature and parameter on the MPC5000 and you should be able to find answers to all of your MPC5000 questions here Be sure to register your MPC5000 at our website www akaipro com so we
280. nstant by velocity V gt Amount field You can control the depth by velocity If you set this field to a value the beginning cut off frequency will start closer to the frequency set in the Amount field with higher velocity If you set this field to a value it works exactly opposite If you set this field to 0 the depth is constant by velocity V Freq field You can control the cut off frequency with velocity The higher the velocity the higher the cut off frequency If you set this field to 0 the cut off frequency is constant by velocity 125 E Using Filters with Sample Programs Each pad of a sample program has a Filter You can edit the sound of the sample by editing this parameter This is done in the FItLFO page of PROGRAM mode E Setting the Filter 01 In PROGRAM mode press the F2 FItLFO button The FItLFO page will be displayed You can select the program to edit in the Pgm field 02 Select the pad you wish to edit for the sound by hitting it Filter The Pad field displays the pad number of the selected pad To the right of the pad Level number the name of the sample assigned to the pad is displayed Fan 03 Select the Type field and select which filter type to use SAMPLE RRO HOTE 5 IMU Tiamat The MPC5000 has several types of filters to modify the sound With these filters you can cut or boost the specific frequency of the sound The following types are available
281. ntered using the NUMERIC KEYPAD Basic operation E Event List When the cursor is in the Now field or View field pressing the down cursor will move the cursor to the event list This is where the events in the track are listed You can select the events with up down cursor buttons and the field with the right left CURSOR buttons You can change the value in the field by turning the DATA wheel In the event list you can select several events at one time by pressing the down CURSOR while holding the SHIFT button B Fi T C This velocity works the same as the F1 T C button in the MAIN page For more information see the Timing correct section on page 26 The Timing Correct setting will determine the time division for Step Recording See page 52 for more on Step Recording 48 STEP EDIT Mode Bi F2 TRACK Pressing and holding this button displays the window to change tracks Using this button you can select a track without switching back to the MAIN page il F6 PLAY Pressing this button will audition the selected event Events E Pad Event This is the event that is recorded when you hit the pads in the DRUM track P pad field You can set the pad number in this field Note Variation field Velocity field In the above picture the area that displays T is the Note Pad field Variation field You can select the type of note variation data to record with the Q LINK sliders
282. ntinuous Controller information to control external MIDI devices See Program and FX Q LINK Controllers on page 179 for more about this 35 Q LINK Knobs 8 These knobs let you manipulate your sounds in real time The knobs can be assigned to control various parameters in SLIDER mode or to send MIDI continuous controller data to external modules See Program and FX Q LINK Controllers on page 179 for more about this 36 Q LINK Sliders 4 These sliders let you manipulate your sounds in real time The sliders can be assigned to control various parameters in SLIDER mode or to send MIDI continuous controller data to external modules See Program and FX Q LINK Controllers on page 179 for more about this ERASE NOTE REPEAT cu 9 9 37 ERASE Button Use the ERASE button to delete events within a track You can use this button in real time during recording or to delete events using the ERASE window For more information see page 25 38 NOTE REPEAT Button Holding this button down when you strike a pad causes the pad to retrigger the sample at a rate indicated in the Timing Correct Window F1 T C on the MAIN page Note Repeat allows for the playing of drum rolls hi hat runs with 8 Introduction varying amounts of swing and other fast percussive effects not easily played by hand For more information see the section entitled Note Repeat on page 28 E Front Panel
283. nv button button 04 Select the V Freq field The larger the value you set the more drastic a change you can make to a sample by how hard you hit the pad Refer to Filter Envelope on page 124 about the other parameters in the Filter Envelope window B Multi Pad Edit The MPC5000 now has the ability to edit multiple pads at the same time setting all pads to the same setting When Multi Pad Edit is active any change made to a pad will be made to all pads To activate Multi Pad Edit do the following 01 In PROGRAM Mode Select the Pad Number field as indicated on the right 02 Scroll with the DATA wheel to the left or press the button The Pad Number field will change to MULTI as indicated on the Right 03 When MULTI is selected all changes made to the selected pad will be applied to all other pads You can further specify what pads are edited by doing the following 04 With the Pad Number field set to MULTT press the WINDOW Button The MULTIPLE PAD SELECT Window will be displayed as shown on the right 05 Press the pads that you wish to exclude from editing The pads will be deselected as indicated MANO INN MOOM MOON MOON EEEE EEE MOON CLOSE 127 E Program Tune An Entire Sample Program can be tuned up to 36 00 Semitones To Transpose a Sample program do the following 01 In PROGRAM Mode select the Pgm Tune field as indicated on the right 02 T
284. o delete EVENTS 05 Press the F6 DO IT button The selected bar s will be deleted Changing the order of tracks TRACK MOVE When you are creating a song by combining several short sequences normally you would use the SONG feature to play back sequence in the specified order The MPC5000 can convert the song data with short sequences to one long sequence To do this you need to arrange the order of the tracks in each sequence In this section you will learn how to use the track move function to change the order of the tracks in a sequence You can move tracks in the TrMOVE Track move page of the SEQ EDIT TRACE MOVE mode which can be accessed by pressing the MODE button and then Eeauence the PAD 12 BH1 5ea uence zBi Track 01 In the SEQ EDIT mode press the F3 TrMOVE button The enel TrMOVE Track move page will be displayed B3 Track Bd Track 02 In the Sequence field select the track that you wish to change AS Track the order B6 Track Br Track 03 In the Reference Sequence field select the sequence to be used as the reference when changing the order For example if you want other tracks to follow the order in sequence 01 you should select sequence 01 in the Reference Sequence field 04 Using the down cursor key move the cursor to the track list 05 You can scroll through the list by turning the DATA wheel pine a Padi Lo a Bl Select the track that you wish to move O bo tH
285. o load the most frequently used programs or sequences automatically 01 Create a folder named AUTOLOAD on the desired device Furiceiong TELA For this example create a folder named AUTOLOAD on the Hard Disk The MPCSBBd will look to the selected device and automatically load the 02 Save any files you would like loaded on startup ewe of the folder named AUTOLOAD on startur This can include any of your favorite samples sample programs synth programs and sequences Autoload az ET 03 Press F3 UTIL 04 The UTILITY page will be opened LORD 05 In the Function field select AUTOLOAD 06 In the Autoload field select the device you wish to load from For our example choose Hard Disk 07 Press F6 DO IT Now when the MPC5000 starts up it will look to the ROOT of the selected device and search for a folder named AUTOLOAD When found it will automatically load the folder you created in step 1 E Restoring the Factory Autoload To restore the factory Autoload do the following 08 09 10 11 12 177 Press F3 UTIL The UTILITY page will be opened In the Function field select AUTOLOAD In the Autoload field select INTERNAL MEMORY Press F6 DO IT The next time the MP5000 is started the preset ROM will be loaded automatically ll Turning Autoload Off If you would prefer the MPC to start without loading anything at all do the following 01 Press F3 UTIL 02 The UTILITY pag
286. ob If the AFTER button is ON the LED is lit and you move the Q LINK slider or knob while playing back a sequence with Note Variation the Note Variation value will be replaced with the current position of the Q LINK slider or knob When REAL TIME is selected if the AFTER button is OFF the LED is off and you move the Q LINK slider or knob while playing back a sequence with Note Variation the recorded Pad s sound will be changed If the AFTER button is ON the LED is lit the recorded Q LINK Event 2 2 2 RA will be ignored and the current Q LINK slider knob position will be used 87 sPPrsts GER itii HRT al sit while playing back a sequence with Note Variation g y Proaram Prosram Bil While recording a sequence i Bp Link 01 Slider If the AFTER button is OFF when you move the Q LINK slider knob the new Q LINK Event will be recorded and added to the existing Q LINK i Events a Assign Al no sample Change HOTE OW Parameter TUHE Ctrl E E Range 128 gt 126 A CLOSE 182 Program and FX Q LINK Controllers If the AFTER button is ON when you move the Q LINK slider knob the new Q LINK event will be recorded and will erase any previous Q LINK Events Sending MIDI Continuous Controllers with a Q LINK The twelve Q LINK Controllers can also be used to send MIDI to external devices To configure a Q LINK to send MIDI Continuous Controller messages do the following 01 In Q LINK mode
287. ock MIDI Time Code MIDI Machine Control 201 E Inputs Outputs Record input L and R Max Input level Digital input Stereo output L and R Max output level 8 individual outputs Max output level Phones output Digital output MIDI inputs MIDI outputs USB Footswitches MIC 1 4 inch Combo x 2 balanced 40dBu input impedance 11k ohms RCA with PHONO preamp 10dBu RCA pin x 1 S PDIF 1 4 inch phone x 2 balanced 11dBu output impedance 1k Ohms 22dBu 1 4 inch phone x 8 balanced 11dBu output impedance 1k Ohms 22dBu 1 4 inch stereo phone x 1 200mW 100 ohms RCA pin x 1 S PDIF ADAT Optical x 1 8 Channels 5 pin DIN x 2 5 pin DIN x 4 Slave connector x 1 USB MASS STORAGE CLASS support Windows 2000 Me XP or later version or Mac OS 9 x 10 x or later version 1 4 inch x 2 E Standard accessories Standard accessories E Options EXM E3 CDM 25 Power cable Operator s manual 128MB expansion memory card Upgrades unit to 192MB total CDR DVD Drive E Data Compatibility MPC1000 MPC2000 2000XL MPC4000 MPC3000 Z4 Z8 5000 6000 S1000 3000 Other SEQ WAV PGM SEQ WAV SND PGM Most parameters of PGM file can be loaded SEQ WAV AKP Keygroup and Drum type SND THRU Computer WAV AKP Keygroup and Drum type WAV AKP as Keygroup Programs S1P S3P As Keygroup Programs S1S S3S as WAV AIFF various AIFF C CDA MIDI Implementation
288. of Une shot E gon the del ORBE OVI HDHT Chan 1 2 MAIN OUT L amp F YES Prosram Audition Hote C 3 642 The MPC5000 is set to convert the sustain pedal data to note duration OTHER fait MEL NO The MPC5000 records sustain pedal data as it is Recording Aftertouch Aftertouch also called Channel Pressure is a specific controller event which is generated when a pad is triggered and then pressure is varied by pressing heavier or lighter The pads on the MPC5000 are capable of sending aftertouch messages to both the MPC5000 s internal synth and to external devices via MIDI Whether this aftertouch information is recorded or not can be selected by doing the following 01 Press the MODE button and then PAD 9 OTHER Master Level Sus Pedal to Duration This switches the MPC5000 to OTHER mode Truncate Duration TO SEG LENGTH HO 02 Select the Record Aftertouch field Record Pad Aftertouch Tar Average Z 03 Use the DATA wheel to select yes or no to decide if the MPC Flash Tempo LED ALWAYS will record Aftertouch Hute Stor of One Shot THROUGH ADAT Chan 1 2 MAIN OUT L amp R Program Audition Hate C 34 6l Chapter 4 Editing Sequences There are two ways to edit sequences Using SEQ EDIT mode you can edit entire regions of events at one time with one sweeping action Using STEP EDIT and GRID EDIT mode you can edit your sequences in finer detail manipulating every event individually In this section you will
289. of a sample to the next zero crossing To do this do the following 01 02 03 With the Fine window you can zoom in to a part of the waveform and edit the part in detail Place the cursor in either in the St Start or End field displayed In the Fine window the waveform display varies depending on the location of the cursor When you select the St Start field with the cursor it displays the start point in the center of the window When you select the End field it displays the end point in the center If you press the F2 ZOOM button the waveform will be zoomed out press F2 LOOP while in TRIM Mode Select the start or endpoint of the current sample press the F4 SNAP 0 button The selected point will snap to the next zero crossing E Zooming in out and press the WINDOW button The Fine window will be if you press the F3 ZOOM button it will be zoomed in LINEAR and LOGARITHMIC displays The vertical axis indicates the sample s level Normally the waveform display is set to LINEAR which displays the sample level as it is However some parts fade out part etc may not be displayed in the waveform if the level is too low In this case you can switch to the LOG logarithmic display by pressing the F5 LOG button and you can see the parts whose level is low When you switch to the LOG mode the display in the F5 button will change to LINEAR To switch back to the LINEAR mode pres
290. of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Ratio This sets how much compression will affect the volume of the incoming signal For instance with a ratio of 4 1 the incoming signal would have to increase by four decibels in order to increase 1 decibel at the output Knee This sets whether the compression effect will be hard or soft A soft knee response will gradually slope to its maximum setting and a hard knee response will respond much quicker Output This sets the volume of the output signal Compressor Type VCA This compressor is more modern sounding with a more transparent effect A VCA Compressor tends to have quicker attack and release times than an Opto Compressor WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Sets the volume of the incoming signal Attack Sets how soon the compressor will start functioning after the threshold has been reached Sets how soon the compressor will stop functioning after the signal drops below threshold 159 Sets the level at which the compressor will start functioning Ratio This sets how much compression will affect the volume of the incoming signal For instance with a ratio of 4 1 the incoming signal would have to increase by four decibels in order to increase 1 decibel at the output This sets whether the compression effect will be hard or soft A soft knee
291. olume of the incoming signal For instance with a ratio of 4 1 the incoming signal would have to increase by four decibels in order to increase 1 decibel at the output Oldskool This parameter downsamples the output to 12 bits in order to emulate the output sound of many vintage samplers Output This sets the volume of the output signal Reverb Small This is a spatial effect designed to sound as if the input is being played in a small room WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Predelay sets the amount time before the sound enters the reverb room Sets the amount of initial reflection the sound will have 160 Effects Dnsity This setting controls the amount of individual reverberations that will be contained in the affected output Controls how much the reverberations will increase as the sound decays Sets how long the reverb effect will take to stop Removes low frequencies from the affected output Removes high frequencies from the affected output Reverb Medium This is a spatial effect designed to sound as if the input is being played in a medium room WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Predelay sets the amount time before the sound enters the reverb room Sets the amount of initial reflection the sound will have Dnsity This setting controls the amount of in
292. olume of your headphones or speakers 2 REC GAIN Knob This knob controls the gain level of the INPUT and PHONO jacks on the rear of the MPC Use this knob to set proper input levels before you begin recording your own samples 3 INPUT SELECT Switch This switch sets the source for your MPC5000 s INPUT THRU and record functions Set this switch to the PHONO position for sampling from the RCA jacks CD player DJ mixer Minidisk etc and to the MIC position for recording from the RECORD IN MIC 1 4 combo jacks 2 Introduction 4 INPUT THRU Button Using this button you can mix the input signal from the RECORD IN jacks to the STEREO OUT jacks This way an additional source can be monitored through the MPC5000 s outputs without the need for a mixing board You can also use the MPC5000 s internal effects on this signal The level of the input signal is controlled by the REC GAIN knob For more information see the Input Thru section at page 92 5 PAD BANK Buttons These buttons let you switch between pad banks A B C and D allowing you to have 64 total pads The currently active bank will be illuminated Vf Y PA SM M i p O oem E FULL LEVEL 18 LEVE TRACK MITE HENT SEG 99 a lO ESCE or or En DD DT p ENEE on or A ENZE D2P DbLb 6 FULL LEVEL Button When this button is engaged the MPC s pa
293. oly Pressure Event Sess POLY PRESS H C 26 B2 Ur The Poly pressure event is used for aftertouch much like the channel pressure event however the Poly pressure event can be set to different values for each individual note B Exclusive Data Event EXCLUSTUE 12 8Bute System Exclusive events are used by different manufactures to control a specific devices non standard functions such as different program parameters or to send preset editing data tuning information and so forth These commands are most typically device specific and not able to be edited using standard MIDI CCzs The MPC5000 can edit exclusive data in addition to record and play them back To learn what data is required for each of your devices please consult the devices user manual E Editing the exclusive data BP Wien ALL To Edit an EXCLUSIVE Event select the field as shown on the right and press the WINDOW button DP RUN C MEE UE The data of each byte will be displayed You can scroll through the display with right left cursor buttons Select the byte that needs change and change the setting with the DATA wheel or the buttons 24 245 249 2596 251 2392 255 254 255 256 To change the length of the exclusive data press the F2 F7 EOX key Pressing the F2 F7 EOX key enters F7 which indicates the end of the exclusive data to the selected byte Pressing the F5 SEND key sends out the currently set exclusive data When you finish editing
294. ome from 10 to 100 Out field Selects the output that the Metronome signal will be sent to The following outputs are available LR The Metronome will be output to the stereo out 1 2 The Metronome will be output stereo to ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 1 2 3 4 The Metronome will be output stereo to ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 3 4 5 6 The Metronome will be output stereo to ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 5 6 7 8 The Metronome will be output stereo to ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 7 8 1 8 The Metronome will be output in MONO to the corresponding ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT output Note Repeat If you press a pad while holding the NOTE REPEAT button the pad sound will be played repeatedly according to the value of the timing correct until you release the pad You can also control its velocity by changing the strength used to press the pad With the Note repeat feature you can record a difficult phrase to record in real time such as 16 beat hi hat snare rolls etc 01 Press and hold the NOTE REPEAT button during recording Mow BBH1 H1 BBH playback Sequence Br Sequence Br BPM 128 8 02 While holding the NOTE REPEAT button press the pad to play Time Six repeatedly The pad s sound will be played repeatedly according to the value of the timing m Track EMP Cunused correct until you release the pad You can also control its velocity by changing the Prosram Stone Basics strength with which you press the pad Tare Mute Welocityux BMIDI 03 While hol
295. on the right of the screen Both of these views share the following parameters TRACE EDIT DELETE PLAY E Now The Now field is displayed in the upper left corner on the screen The Now field always displays the current position of a sequence This is the same as the Now field on the MAIN page NOW field Time Ruler B Time ruler i This indicates the time axis of the track The pgioig 5 0 EX number in the ruler shows the bar number mm orizontal B Vertical marker Marker H b B L y El 1 This indicates the current location You can use it gt to select the editing region on the time ruler T TRACK EDIT DELETE PLAY B Horizontal marker Vertical Marker This selects the pad number or note that you wish to edit E Event Range field This displays the range of events being viewed This will change to show pad numbers note octaves or a 0 127 scale depending on the selected view E Event Area This area graphically displays the note events recorded in the track The unit of the grid for editing is changed by the Timing Correct parameter 56 GRID EDIT Mode Basic operation E Operation in the Event area When the cursor is in the Now field pressing the down cursor button moves the cursor to the Event area The cursor in the Event area is at the grid where the vertical and horizontal markers intersect Your editing operations will be affected in the selected grid You can move
296. on guitar WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Time Sets the amount of time between the original signal and the delayed signal from the first head Feedbk Sets the amount of times the delayed signal will be repeated This control is capable of self oscillation at maximum value Ramp Ramp time is the time it takes to change tempo This is like motor inertia At max it takes a long time and the tape stretch effect is heard most At minimum the motor s speed is instant Sets the volume of each tape head Careful Analog Tape Delays can feedback onto themselves when the heads volumes and feedbk controls are turned up Controls how dark the sound will be as the echo decays At 100 this control has no effect Controls the relational distance between each tape head Wow and Flutter This parameter sets the amount of inaccuracies in the sound produced by each tape head This can be used to simulate an older tape or more vintage tape machines Delay Ping Pong This delay is a mono delay which can be set to different delay times for the left and right sides of the stereo field WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Time L Sets the amount of time between the original signal and the delayed signal on the left side Time R Feedbk Sets the amount of time between the original
297. on will quickly bring you to the first synth track in your sequence bring you to the last synth program you edited or create a synth program on a new track It s best to think of the SYNTH button as a quick fix shortcut to quickly get into synth programming This mode can also be entered by selecting a track on the MAIN page that uses a Synth type program and entering PROGRAM mode Chapter 2 Basic Operation In this chapter we will describe the basic operation of the MPC5000 il MAIN Page oe pu HB1 B1 BBB This is the main screen of the MPC5000 where you record and play back c E l equence Hl Seauence Hi sequences You can go back to this page at any time by pressing the BPM 120 0 MAIN button If at any time you get lost while operating the MPC5000 Time Sia and want to go back to this page simply press the MAIN button You cannot go back to the MAIN page by pressing MAIN button while processing e g Recording loading saving etc m Tracks WHl tunused Prosram Program Bal Tare DRUM Hute E Cursor Cursor Buttons DATA wheel Masi Anc Ba CLEA e The highlighted reverse colored square on the screen is called the Cursor You can move the cursor on the screen using the four CURSOR buttons on e uences mBl Sesausnce the panel Usually they move to specific locations such as to the right of a colon Those locations are called fields and will be indicated in the EPI 124 5 manual by single q
298. ormation on the Sequence Feature E Setting the Length of a Sequence By default a sequence is set to a 2 bar length but you can set this length between 1 to 999 bars 01 In the MAIN page select the Bars field Mou BESOINS The Bar field displays the current sequence length 02 Turn the DATA wheel or press WINDOW button Current Lensth Hew Lenath The CHANGE SEQUENCE LENGTH window will be displayed as shown 03 In the New Length field select the new number of bars If you set a larger number than the current value empty bars will be added at the end of the sequence If you set a smaller number the bars in the end of the sequence will not be played CLOSE 04 Press F5 DO IT button That applies the new setting and closes the window Tip when you increase the length of the sequence blank bars are added at the end of your sequence If you decrease the length of a sequence the last bars of the existing sequence are not played but unlike previous MPC s these bars are NOT truncated This means that the length can be adjusted without losing the end bars of your sequence Tip In SONG mode you can also set a specific order for sequences playback For more information see SONG Mode on page 61 E Setting the Time Signature of the Sequence By default the time of a sequence is set to the 4 4 time but you can change the setting 01 In the MAIN page select Time Sig field The Time Sig field displ
299. ough the list with the up down cursor buttons Pressing the left cursor button in the Step field of the step list moves the cursor to the Now field 62 SONG Mode E Step field This field displays the step number You can scroll through the list by turning the DATA wheel ill Sequence field You can assign the sequences in this field by turning the DATA wheel E Reps field You can set the number of times to repeat the sequence E Tempo field This field displays the tempo of the selected sequence You can change the tempo of the sequence but if you are using the same sequence in another step the tempo of that sequence will be changed as well B Bars field This field displays the number of bars of the selected sequence This field only displays the number of bars you cannot make any changes in this field Creating a song 01 Press MODE and then PAD 15 SONG The SONG page will be displayed 02 In the Song field select a song whose name is unused 03 Move the cursor to end of song and select the sequence to play first using the DATA wheel Turning the DATA wheel creates the new step and you can select a sequence Then the new song will be created and its name will change from unused to Song indicates the song number 04 In the Reps field set the times to repeat a sequence The MPC5000 will repeat the sequence the number of times set here before starting to play the next step
300. p mode the MPC5000 will start playback at the current stopped position When you step on the switch in play mode the MPC5000 will stop playback PLAY START STOP When you step on the Footswitch in stop mode the MPC5000 will start playback from the beginning When you step on the switch in play mode the MPC5000 will stop playback REC PLAY The footswitch will act the same as when you press the REC button and the PLAY button simultaneously recording OVER DUB PLAY It works the same as pressing the OVER DUB and PLAY button simultaneously overdub REC PUNCH When you step on the switch in stop mode the MPC5000 will start playback When you step on the switch in play mode the MPC will start recording In RECORD mode the footswitch will start playback OVER DUB PUNCH When you step on the switch in stop mode the MPC5000 will start playback When you step on the switch in play mode the MPC will start overdubbing In overdub mode the footswitch will start playback TAP TEMPO Pressing the footswitch will work as if the TAP TEMPO button was pressed PAD 1 16 Pressing the footswitch will work as if the selected pad was played F1 F6 Pressing the footswitch will work as if the corresponding function button was pressed PAD BANK A D Pressing the footswitch will work as if the corresponding Pad Bank button was pressed NOTE REPEAT Pressing the footswitch will work as if the NOTE REPEAT button was pressed NEXT TRACK
301. play of the F2 F4 and F5 buttons will RECO IT change to MOVE COPY and PASTE respectively until you release the button SI 03 Move Event window will be displayed Time The selected event time the start point is displayed You can not change this value Move to You set the time where you wish to move the selected event 04 Press F5 DO IT The selected event will be moved Deleting an event To delete the selected Event proceed as follows 01 In the Event list select the Event that you wish to delete You can select several Events by pressing the down cursor button while holding the SHIFT button 02 Press the F4 DELETE button The selected Event will be deleted Note You can also delete the Event by pressing the Erase button in Step Edit mode After copying deleting an Event you can revert back the previous status by pressing the UNDO button 52 STEP EDIT Mode Step Recording In the STEP EDIT mode when you hit a pad or when the MPC5000 receives MIDI data from an external device you can record the event in the current time position the time displayed in the Now field Move the event to the desired time position by moving through the event list with the up down cursor buttons or by setting the time position in the Now field and you can add events to the desired time position one by one This method recording each event individually when MPC5000 is in the stop mode is call
302. plays which FX Bus the Q LINK Controller is set to Parameter Displays which effect parameter is to be edited with the selected Q LINK Feedback 02 Select one of the Q LINK controls When you move a Q LINK controller that controller will be highlighted You can also E x AE 2 select a Q LINK Control with the CURSOR a Fa G Link Edit This will open the FX Q LINK EDIT window as shown on the right Effect Bus Busi 04 Select the Effect Bus field and select the bus containing the E gabe a mene S ff wish ign the sel LINK to ie neue dne CEDE effect you wish to assign the selected Q to E Era fase RH You can select the bus containing the effect you wish to edit by scrolling with the gt Hi lee 168 DATA wheel If you do not wish to use the Q LINK function for any effect select OFF by turning the DATA wheel 183 05 In the Effect field select the effect you wish to edit You can select either of the effects contained in the Bus selected in the Effect Bus field 06 In the Parameter field select the parameter you wish to control You can select any of the parameters available in the effect selected in the Effect field 07 In the Range Lo and Hi field set the upper and lower limit of the slider or knobs The value of the controlled parameter is determined by the value set here The value depends on the type of the parameter selected in the Parameter field 08 Press F4 CLOSE to return to the FX Q LINK page
303. press the F5 ALL R button or the F6 RESET button the P DFF Q P FF Go PrOFF q P OFF ip changed value resets to its original value Tune Tune Tune Tune F5 ALL R 12 0FF 03 0FF 04 0FF er Porr psorr Porr All parameters changed with REAL TIME reset to the original value Tune Tune Tune ALL F FESET F6 RESET Only the parameter being displayed in Slider page resets to the original value Recording the slider knob value in a sequence When you use the Q LINK slider knob while recording a sequence the Note Variation data will be recorded into the track of the sequence When the NOTE ON is selected in the Change field the value of the Q LINK slider knob will be recorded as Note Variation information with the Pad Event When the REAL TIME is selected in the Change field the value of the Q LINK slider knob will be recorded as Q LINK event independent of the Pad Event E AFTER Button This button sets the operation of the Q LINK slider knob When a sequence is recorded the Note Variation data is played back The operation of the AFTER button is different with NOTE ON or REAL TIME When NOTE ON is selected if the AFTER button is OFF the LED is off and you move the Q LINK slider or knob while playing back a sequence with Note Variation the Pad s Note Variation is played as recorded If you hit a Pad during playback the Pad that you hit will have the effect of Q LINK slider or kn
304. processed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Controls the intensity of the distortion effect Controls the curve of the clipping above the waveform zero crossing Controls the amount of clipping applied to the waveform above the zero crossing Controls the curve of the clipping below the waveform zero crossing 158 Effects Controls the amount of clipping applied to the waveform below the zero crossing Selects how much the low frequencies of the signal will be affected by the distortion Selects how much the high frequencies of the signal will be affected by the distortion Output Controls the overall output of the distortion Distortion Grimy Selects how much the mid frequencies of the signal will be affected by the distortion This is a unique distortion effect that distorts a range of frequencies in a variably selectable band WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Compressor Type Opto A compressor is an effect that changes the dynamic range of a signal by automatically reducing gain The Opto Compressor is modeled after a vintage compressor that uses a small light to reduce the overall volume of the input signal This technique is usually associated with a soft and very musical attack and release This effect is best used as an insert by turning DIRECT off See page 150 for more on this WetDry Controls the ratio
305. puts to the MIDI input of an external device and one of the MPC s inputs to an external device s output 10 Introduction E Bottom Panel LITET Hii O e 54 Ram Expansion Slot This is where the optional EXM E3 RAM expansion module can be added This will increase overall sample time to over 36 minutes mono of which a single sample can be over 24 minutes long 11 Hooking Up Your MPC5000 The following diagrams will demonstrate how the MPC5000 can be integrated into your recording setup Note that the diagrams below use every connector on the MPC and that your setup may vary from the ones shown ll Output Connectivity Example E m m 0o0oo000000go Y a G ey MS A al j 01 Connect the STEREO OUT to Powered Monitors This will allow the main mix of your MPC to be heard 02 Connect the ASSIGNABLE MIX OUTS to a multi track Hard Disk recorder This will allow individual samples and sounds to be sent individually to be recorded Other examples of ways you can connect your MPC5000 s outputs include connecting the STEREO OUT to a mixing board to mix the MPC alongside other instruments and using the ASSIGNABLE MIX OUTS to send certain sounds to external effects processors 01 Connect a synthesizer or a Microphone to the RECORD IN jacks Sources plugged into the RECORD IN jacks can be sampled to be used in Sample Programs The RECORD IN jacks are 1 4 Mic com
306. r PADO1 is selected 02 Change the selection from OFF to 1 TkMUTEJ TKGRP RS te lee 82 Functions of a Pad 03 Press another pad For example press PAD A02 The mute group selection for PADO2 is selected 04 Change the selection from OFF to 1 05 Press F1 TKMUTE to return to the TRACK MUTE page 06 Play PAD A01 Notice that now PAD A02 mutes along with PAD A01 Up to 16 different mute groups can be created Note When a pad is pressed while holding the SHIFT button the track mute status of only the pressed pad is changed and mute group settings are ignored Track Mute Quantization Track and Pad Mutes can be quantized This will allow Mutes to occur in time with the sequence E TRACK MUTE Quantization To turn on Track Mute Quantization do the following iuda 01 Press the TRACK MUTE Button This will open the TRACK MUTE Page as shown on the right 02 Press the F1 TKMUTE button to select the TRACK MUTE Tab 03 Press the F5 T C button The F5 button will darken to indicate it is active as shown to the right 04 Press a pad corresponding to the Track you would like to mute The MPC5000 will mute the selected track on the next division of the T C setting For more information on setting the TC Value for Track and Pad Mutes see the next section E Changing the Timing Correct for Track Mute Quantization To change the Timing Correct value while in TRACK or PAD MUTE Mode press the WINDO
307. r drives Chapter 17 Program and FX Q LINK Controllers By using the Q LINK sliders and knobs you can control both Program and Effect parameters with the controllers E Program Q LINK programming Certain pad parameters filter tune etc can be controlled with a slider or knob There are two ways NOTE ON and REALTIME for controlling the sound by Q LINK NOTE ON The sound will be affected to the position of Q LINK slider knobs at the point the Pad is hit But the sound will not be affected by changing the Q LINK slider knobs after hitting the pad REALTIME You can change the sound during playing back by changing the Q LINK slider knob Alternatively Q LINK controllers can be set to send MIDI controllers to external devices In this section you will learn how to set the Q LINK sliders or knobs This is done in Q LINK mode which can be accessed by pressing the MODE button and then the PAD 1 Q LINK button Configuring the Q LINK Sliders amp Knobs 01 Press MODE PAD 1 to enter Q LINK mode and press F1 Prg Q or F2 FX Q to open the Q LINK page In case of F1 the screen shown to the right will be displayed Each of the following settings for each Q LINK is quickly displayed here MIDI CONTINUOUS CONTROLLER 0FF 12 0FF Ab Displays which MIDI Continuous Controller will be sent out when the selected controller is moved Pad P FP Al Displays which pad the Q LINK Controller is set to
308. r own synth programs Synth programs make sound by a method called subtractive synthesis From smooth whistling leads to huge booming basses to lush spacious pads synth programs can be used to create a vast array of sounds Pressing the SYNTH button allows for quick access to the synth program on the current track automatically add the first loaded synth program to the current track or if no synth program is loaded create a new generic synth program for you to work with It s best to think of the SYNTH button as a quick fix shortcut to quickly get into synth programming 32 ARP ON OFF This button allows you to turn on or off the arpeggiator quickly This button will light when the arpeggiator is on for the current track 33 ARPEGGIATOR New to the MPC5000 is the arpeggiator The arpeggiator will play in the order the pads being held down or any notes being held down on an external MIDI keyboard This will allow for rapid playing not always possible when playing manually This is similar to pressing NOTE REPEAT but the advantages of an Arpeggiator or Arp for short are that the notes play in a defined pattern For more on the Arpeggiator see page 145 34 AFTER Buttons 12 When these buttons are engaged during recording the Q LINK slider or knob associated with the selected AFTER button will overwrite any existing slider data on your track Additionally these buttons can be configured to send MIDI Co
309. r pad Pressing another key D4 for example would stop the previous 3 notes and start playing D4 only 06 Next press and release the keys or pads pressed in step 4 These will now play again in place of D4 07 Now press the three keys or pads pressed in step 4 and add another For example if C3 E3 and G3 are playing and you press these three keys again along with D4 all four would now play 147 Try experimenting further with the Arpeggiator along with latching You will find the Arpeggiator a powerful addition to the live performance aspect of the MPC5000 Using the Arpeggiator with Pre Recorded Tracks The Arpeggiator can also be used with previously recorded sequencer tracks To do so do the following 01 Select a track in the current sequence with previously recorded data For best results use a synth or MIDI program rather than a Drum type program 02 Press the ARP ON OFF button 03 The recorded data on the selected track will now play in an arpeggio pattern Chapter 15 Effects In this section you will learn how to select and edit effects The MPC5000 has four stereo effect busses and each buss can have two different effects assigned to it Busses can be combined in pairs to allow a total of four effects per buss Additionally a master EQ and compressor are available for the Stereo outputs Each pad can be routed to one of the four effects busses and each effect buss can be routed independently to any of t
310. ram Change messages by MIDI Frasram Change EE setting the MIDI Program Change Field to Sequence ad ta err 50 g oO And lastly you can logically select Programs with a Program Change E EOS PR JS message by setting the MIDI Program Change Field to Program MIDI Chapter 19 Connecting the MPC5000 to Your Computer The MPC5000 supports the USB mass storage class When you connect the MPC5000 to a PC that supports USB mass storage class the PC will recognize the memory card and the Internal Hard Disk in the MPC5000 as a removable media drives You can transfer the data between the recognized memory card or Internal Hard Disk and the PC You can save the data on the memory card or Internal Hard Disk to the PC or you can load the data from the PC to the memory card or Internal Hard Disk You need Windows 2000 ME XP or later version or Mac OS 9 x 10 x or later version Note The computer cannot recognize the MPC5000 s internal memory directly To save the data in the internal memory to the computer you need to save the data to the memory card or the Internal Hard Disk first Also the data from the computer will be saved to the memory or Internal Hard Disk first To use the data in the MPC5000 load the data from the memory card or Internal Hard Disk E Connecting the MPC5000 to a Windows based PC 01 Insert the memory card in the card slot of the MPC5000 USB TRANSFER MODE Disconnected 02 Press the MODE button
311. range is E Hote B 23 LEP CGE set to C 3 C 3 When MPC5000 receive multiple notes for example C 3 D3andE E i 3 then the range is set to C 3 E 3 A CLOSER CO IT i If you wish to delete all events leave it as ALL To delete only events on a specific pad hit the pad to delete You can select several pads If you hit a different pad by mistake you can cancel the selection by hitting the pad again To restart the pad selection turn the DATA wheel to the left The value in the Note field will be reset to ALL so that you can select pad from the beginning 26 The Sequencer 07 Press F5 DO IT The operation starts and the events of the selected pad within the selected area will be deleted Erase can also be used to delete events from tracks other than the currently selected track or to delete only specific types of events You can also specify only a certain time range from which to delete events Tip When you delete events with the Erase field set to ALL EVENT the MPC5000 will delete other events in the selected area as well as pad events When you delete events with the Erase field set to EXCEPT Note the MPC5000 will delete the other events other than the pad events in the selected area Timing correct When recording a pad performance it is hard to play the pads to the tempo By using the timing correct feature you can correct the timing of the pad event you recorded by hitting pads There are two ways to use this feat
312. ras POS uni a ate 132 BH Prtehbendy Modwheel ABertoleli usns di laa 132 Synth Programs iran aa M About Subtractive Synthesis odas tutti ds i 133 NH Playin aS yb Pro era A eve Ede i ceo ou v ac pod todo e o a ut cert du deua cv dO db aa Led dne 133 E Auditioning a Synth Pro Oram iso tet gee tiet ie A ata ducc Cini ita ad a itd ea ERY 133 NH The Synth BUttoN asada toic esci erede leti eon cR inane d acu am ab bara ida cit 134 E Creating SM oko tan T 134 NH iti wit OSETNE Cm tS a del 134 M Basic Editing ofa Synth Programi es c iet hotte c t iso ape utu a td cor ellen ea ie 134 JO mr O 136 EE 0 I0 do ti td loca 137 AER VEA rem 139 B EEO cT 140 E MASTER iise cos 141 Other Program Functions iria AA NW Changing the program TAN nt o d oce AAA AE AAA AAA Uus docs A it 142 E Co opyne a Nerea RT E TEE o EE 143 WU Deleting Prop Mrs sa aaa a i a A aa E ll aabt iaa 143 m Dele tim alr OSs it m 143 E Setting 4 Program Change Number zo eno eoa AA S 143 B Assigning MIDI Notes to Pads in a Sample Program cocoooooccncnononocnnnnonononnnnnoconnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncannnnnnnnnnnnns 144 NH Changing the Default Note Number Assignment ee aei ee t n edet ee i dl i e bv dedo 144 Chapter 14 ArDegglaltOE isso eeu into aure euro ato ote etse e 145 Editing the AFDego lato nia 145 Latching the Arpeggiator usse aid x OE Vbi a a a Rad an 146 Using the Arpeggiator with Pre Recorded Tracks r
313. rd drive space Unsaved audio will be deleted when you switch to a different song E About the RECORD Page Many recording functions are handled here on this page Track arming for recording selecting inputs and monitoring of levels are all done on this page Now This is a display of time This is the same as the Now field on the MAIN page PEINE 17 kili 36h Song This is where the name of the current song is displayed Pressing the WINDOW button on Sono3H 15Chanacter Hame this page will allow you to rename the song For more on naming see page 20 Source This parameter selects whether the recording tracks will use the analog RECORD IN jacks or the DIGITAL S PDIF input as a source You can also resample the MAIN OUTS or resample any pair of ASSIGNABLE MIX OUTS Rec In L R to Track Each of these settings determine which Hard Disk track will be recorded to for each input Any of the eight tracks are available for recording Level Meters These meters display the input level of the left and right inputs When the source is set to analog the overall input level can be adjusted using the REC GAIN knob 68 HD RECORD Mode F5 L ARM and F6 R ARM These buttons are used to arm the tracks for recording When selected the button will darken and the tracks indicated in the corresponding Rec In fields will be recorded to The incoming iJ L HRH R_ARH audio will be monitored through the STE
314. rding the changed data will be recorded into the sequence Track Mix levels will also be recorded The sequence wur 1 AMAL SL F L SL RAE REL RAE REL RLR LRLRLRLRLR GORE 92 MIXER Mode will be played with changing the Level or the Pan as you did during the recording when Play Track Mute Events is set to ON The mixing data recorded in the sequence is displayed in STEP EDIT page and you can edit it same as other MIDI event Note Level event shares with Level of Q LINK E Shortcut between MIXER and EFFECTS mode While in MIXER mode you can easily switch to EFFECTS mode by pressing F6 GO2FX While in EFFECTS mode you can easily switch to MIXER mode by pressing F5 GO2MIX Tip This is especially useful when searching for the right effect for the right sample Take Over Mode When Take Over Mode is active when on the TrkMIX PrgMIX HD MIX SYNTH and EFFECTS EDIT pages moving a Q LINK will only update when the current value of the control is crossed For example if a HD MIX Channel is set to a volume of 70 and the corresponding Q LINK is set to its minimum position if Take Over Mode is active the channel s volume wouldn t change until the Q LINK moves past 70 allowing for a smooth volume adjustment If Take Over Mode is off the control will change to follow the Q LINK immediately fnob Slider Take Over Mode OFF To activate Take Over Mode do the following 01 In MIXER Mode press F3
315. re you can access the various storage media available to you This is where files such as samples and sequences can be saved or retrieved and edited E REC SAMPLE Mode MODE Pad 4 Here is where you can record your own samples for playback on the MPC5000 s pads ll TRIM Mode MODE Pad 5 This is where you can edit individual samples deleting silence adjusting overall volume of recorded samples and so forth E PROGRAM Mode MODE Pad 6 Depending on if the type of program is Sample Keygroup or Synth this page will allow individual samples to be assembled into a group for playback on the individual pads playback of a sample over several pads or allow editing of a Synth program s virtual analog parameters il MIXER Mode MODE Pad 7 This mode is where the mixing of individual pads or complete sequencer tracks can be done graphically much like using an external mixing board Which output the signal is sent to and what effect bus and how much effect is used per sound is also determined here E MIDI SYNC Mode MODE Pad 8 Here you can sync up your MPC5000 with other devices and control different aspects of MIDI il OTHER Mode MODE Pad 9 Here you can find different settings that don t fit easily into other categories such as Master level pad sensitivity etc E ARP Mode MODE Pad 10 This mode allows you to edit the Arpeggiator This is mode can also be edited by pressing the ARPEGGIATOR
316. rent time position the time displayed in the Now field With Step Recording you can move to the desired time position by setting the time position in the Now field and you can add events to the desired time position one by one This method recording each event individually when MPC5000 is in the stop mode is called step recording This function allows for complex passages to be recorded with ease To Step Record from the MAIN page do the following 01 Stop the current sequence if it is running 02 Set the NOW to the time you would like to insert notes 03 Press and hold the REC or OVER DUB button 04 The MPC is now in STEP RECORD Mode for as long as REC or OVER DUB is held 05 Play a pad The MPC will record the note played in the current position There are several options you can set to fine tune your STEP RECORD performance Step Recording from the Main Page shares settings with STEP EDIT For further information on STEP EDIT see page 47 E Playing Back a Sequence You can play back a recorded sequence by pressing the PLAY START button The sequence will be played repeatedly until you press the STOP button If you press the PLAY button again the MPC5000 will resume the playback from where the previous play back was stopped E Playing Several Sequences in Series You can play back several sequences in a series by using the Next Sequence feature The Next Sequence feature allows you to select the next sequence
317. ri Em 179 Configuring the Q LINK Sliders amp Knobs cococccccccococononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn a Resetting the Q LINK slider knob value o sensn eeeee enne nnn uauuuun nnnm uua unn Recording the slider knob value in a sequence eeeeeeee A TADDLEBJBULUOD ede coco de ie Sd Er AS 181 Sending MIDI Continuous Controllers with a Q LINK eo oee nennen eee nn CONTIGUFING FX O LIDKS iss euo xuEs aua ERE UN KVREEE ERE AS ai DR ON OUR AAA ROC RR OR RR BW Configuring the FX Q LINK Sliders amp Knobs uu eie tret ea Lob of estera coe eoe ette a est eina ue pure eue Coto ane redde 182 Default O LINK MOGG cuina a ED EMEN NN NENNEN NE NW Bypassing Default Q LINK au poire o et tieu eco telles aceto ic 183 Chapter 18 Using the MPC5000 with External Devices MIDI ClOCK iisvessaudtusasas cria maa a data Rus tusauua M i DUE CENE ERE RPMCE VEU AR E MIDI Sync with the MPC5000 as the master oes Go Dod S ecco a achat d Pee m 185 NH MIDI Sync with the MPC5000 as the slave nora see NIE eR ete oec vedete betur eet tete SED eu 185 MIDI Time Code MTC E LHinecode DIsplayzaecessotestose tdi A AAA AAA bitu dad Lab dodo P PR Mina b uals 186 NH NPCS000 3S tlie AN C iescesiupmasudv ui euam asta nde Dou aa is 186 EH MPC3S000 asthe Master S eee do onde eme cm GR e aA teamed dA E Ls 186 NH MIDI Machine Control M
318. riod of time and then plays it back over and over Mono delay sums the signal input to mono before applying the delay effect The result is a less complex but more focused sound WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effect Sets the amount of time between the original signal and the delayed signal Feedbk Sets the amount of times the delayed signal will be repeated This control is capable of self oscillation at maximum value Cuts off the high frequencies of the delayed signal creating a darker sound Delay Stereo Delay Stereo BeatSync Stereo delay operates similarly to Mono delay only in true stereo The maximum delay time is less than that available to Mono delay WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Sets the amount of time between the original signal and the delayed signal Feedbk Sets the amount of times the delayed signal will be repeated This control is capable of self oscillation at maximum value Cuts off the high frequencies of the delayed signal creating a darker sound Delay LP HP The LP and HP Delay is identical to the Mono Delay except instead of using the damping control a resonant filter is used WetDry Controls the ratio of unprocessed and processed signal At 100 the signal heard will be 100 effected Sets the amount of time between the origin
319. rkMix page will be displayed Each column indicates track 1 though 16 from the left and the currently selected track is highlighted The row at the top is the OUT field where you where you will assign a specific track to a specific assignable output Note tracks 17 64 can be used by pressing the corresponding PAD BANK buttons 02 Hit the pad corresponding to the desired track The column for the selected track will now be highlighted 03 In the MUTE row Displayed as M scroll with the DATA wheel to select one of the following Track will play as normal Track is muted 91 In addition to the DATA wheel the Q LINK controls can be used to change settings within MIXER mode Tracks can be edited in groups of four Which four are editable with Q LINKS is determined by which pad is currently selected Pad 1 4 selected QLINKS control Tracks 1 4 Pad 5 8 selected QLINKS control Tracks 5 8 Pad 9 12 selected QLINKS control Tracks 9 12 Pad 13 16 selected QLINKS control Tracks 13 16 When in MIXER mode the Q LINK controls have the following functions E Using Q LINK Controls with MIXER Mode Q LINK Q9 12 AFTER BUTTONS These buttons correspond to the OUT setting for the OUT row Pressing this button repeatedly will toggle through each OUT setting for the selected column Q LINK Q9 12 KNOBS These knobs correspond to the FX SEND setting for the SEND row Q LINK Q5 8 AFTER BUTTONS These buttons correspond to the
320. rrre nnnm 147 Seueri rie EE UU C 149 Applying Effects to a Pad iniciada VERRE WEexEREEEVAN VICE VENE iiaa 149 NH Buss Eiee ys Iso pt ETIGOIS sea eric stated ies EI Un ocu Ana TOE As 150 NH Settingan bitectascandnsert soeur eu Se brin acc RR Mace Masa t DEED ac MIND LEM dL EMEN DU S Ue a LINER 150 NH Adding additional Effects to the Effects BUSS eor id 151 Effect BUSS CHAIN Grisin pinnana E NUS V SKOVERSVUMVUFMKEREN HU RERURM REESE MEE KEEN NM M ER EE 151 About CPU USAGE iniu aa 3 RO AAA CIR ER ENERO E RR RD 151 Editing Effects coca vec XO CGU AA a RERO RR D BR 151 ANE E i CoUE omm LR 152 Routing Effect Buss Output to Individual Outs eee 162 Using Master EIfecIs tinta 162 MEO S IPIS Master EAEC NN 163 Editing the Effect Seb oor UAE VANUS VO IUIE NAME UH EUREN NUI MU MERE VEVR E CNN ULREVEEREKMEEE UE 163 m Charnginp the fame ob the EMEC Seterra A Won itam adr eti a adiu b dut 163 m Op ye TNS CEC CU Seb T E 164 E RSC EINE he aus AAA TP wah maga Nail Aas aunt aed TENTPNN 164 Copy 7 Paste Swap Effect Settings evssosesp vua e osur Vs wa ass area ROC RUN RED 164 E E2 COR qr e TT 164 W ESI PASTE soanten ee E id bobo om det da cn 164 W ESI SMOD a teeters ett dete satt ica SAA b n doc uM du iUo RAS eels LL caosa ani 164 NH Easy Effect List NAVIBAtIQD osissiocci orte dues ree esses LARUM acaba 164 Chapter 16 Saving and Loading DISK Mode
321. rsor to higher points within the numeric display to allow for quicker value selection You can also enter the value directly with the numeric keypad Additionally the start point can be edited by moving the Q1 Q LINK slider while the field is selected Note only tracks selected for editing will be highlighted Selecting the View Range You can zoom in to get a better look and more accurately set start and end points for editing This allows you to view the entire song or just view a single bar EA To Select the View Range do the following 01 Press F5 RANGE The View Range page will be displayed 02 In the Number of Bars field select the desired view range lc E You can select a view range as small as one measure up to the entire range of the song 03 Press the F4 DO IT button emn COTOS This will return you to the Track View page with the selected range displayed Viewing Individual Disk Tracks You can zoom in on the waveforms for fine editing individual tracks to get a better look and more accurately set start and end points for editing To finely view a recorded track do the following 01 Select the Start or End field Fine View will zoom to the start or the end point depending on which you select n galg m aek J SE Bpl Eod 02 Press the WINDOW button The FINE page will be displayed 03 Zoom out or in by pressing the F2 ZOOM and F3 ZOOM 7 buttons respectively is 200M
322. rt saving the data E Saving a Sequence You can save sequences individually Note The MPC5000 saves it s sequences in standard MIDI format using metadata to save it s MPC specific parameters These files will be readable in other sequencers as standard MIDI Type 1 files but non MPC5000 s will not recognize MPC Specific information This includes Track and Pad Mute Q Link and Mixer Automation and 16 Levels Tuning 01 Select the destination folder for the sequence to be saved See page 165 for more information on selecting destination folders 168 Saving and Loading DISK Mode 02 In the Type field select SAVE A SEQUENCE 03 In the Item field select the sequence that you wish to save You can select any sequence in the memory by turning the DATA wheel 04 Press the F6 DO IT button The SAVE A SEQUENCE window will be displayed 05 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start saving the data E Saving All the Sequences and the Songs at the Same Time You can save all the sequences and the songs in the MPC5000 at the same time The MPC5000 will save the data as one file called ALL file which include all the sequence and the songs instead of saving individual sequences and song files When you load the ALL file you can reset all the sequences and the songs to the status when they are saved The ALL file includes the effect set data 01 Select the destination folder for the files to be sa
323. s choose channels 3 and 4 02 Arm the tracks by pressing the F5 L ARM and F6 R ARM buttons 03 Play the source you wish to record Adjust the GAIN knob to get the best volume level without clipping or distortion 04 Press REC and PLAY START This will start the recording process 05 Record your performance along with your song Press the STOP button to end the recording when you are finished 69 Viewing Recorded Tracks To view the tracks you ve recorded press F4 TkVIEW Here you will see each of the eight tracks and waveform data recorded to each track Like the RECORD page the Now and Song fields are available Edit How BgB4 01 1687 a1 Sons41 St 6463 61 AHA End 664 41 aaa This check box selects which tracks will be edited This selection can be navigated to by using the CURSOR buttons and checked or unchecked by turning the DATA wheel In the example to the right tracks 1 and 2 are selected for editing Arm This read only column shows you which tracks are set to be recorded in the RECORD tab ST and END Times SOMG This is where the range for selected edit functions are selected The time range selected will be displayed by highlighting in white For example in the picture shown the range of 002 00 001 to 003 00 000 is selected You can edit these fields by scrolling with the DATA wheel If you press the left or right CURSOR buttons while holding SHIFT you can move the cu
324. s the F5 button again Adjusting the TRIM and LOOP Points at the Same Time LOCK The selection on the Trim and LOOP pages can be linked This will allow adjustments on one page to be reflected on the other for easier editing To link TRIM and LOOP start points select the LOCK icon as shown on the right and turn the DATA wheel This will change the icon from SHARP GAUTO Ll EDIT 103 unlocked to locked indicating that TRIM and LOOP endpoints are now locked Deleting Unused Parts from a Sample DISCARD The MPC5000 plays back only the part of the sample from the start point to the end point The parts outside these points are not used for the playback With the Discard function you can delete these unnecessary parts to save memory Tips If you do not like the results of your sample edit the edit can be undone by pressing the UNDO button To redo the change press the UNDO button again 01 Adjust the start end points Set the points so that the MPC5000 plays back only the necessary part 02 Press F6 EDIT The Sample Edit window will be displayed 03 In the Edit field select DISCARD 04 Press F5 DO IT The data outside the start end points will be deleted The deleted data will be returned to the available memory Deleting a Section of a Sample DELETE The Delete function will remove the section between the Start and End points The parts of the sample outside of the Start End points will be jo
325. s three oscillators Voltage Controlled Filters VCF The sound produced by the oscillators is very raw and usually not suitable to be used directly in an instrument In order to bring out the sonic textures you have in mind you will typically want to dampen certain harmonics and boost others This is where the filter comes in The filter alters the frequency content of the signal and can have a drastic effect on the sound A filter typically allows you to adjust its Cutoff Frequency which represents the range of harmonics that the filter operates on as well as its Resonance which determines how much boost is given to harmonics around the cutoff frequency The MPC5000 has eleven different filter types each with its own character and sonic flavor LFO LFO stands for low frequency oscillator Unlike the normal oscillators however the LFOs are not designed for producing sound Instead their purpose is to tweak a program parameter according to a looping pattern For example if you are looking to add some vibrato to your instrument you ll need the pitch to continuously waver up and down An LFO is perfect for this application Simply hooking up an LFO to the oscillator pitch parameter will get you the effect you need Each of the MPC5000 s voices contains two LFOs Envelopes ENV If you hit a note on a piano you ll hear a burst of sound energy as the hammer strikes the string followed by lower level of loudness as you hold down the note
326. s to be sent through the ADAT OUT port E Program Audition Note The note played when auditioning SYNTH Programs when pressing the PLAY button in DISK Mode can be selected in OTHER mode Select the di acie l us Fedal to Duration Program Audition Note as shown on the right and select the desired Truncate Duration TO SEQ LENGTH note Record Pad Aftertouch HO Tar Average 2 Flash Temro LED ALWAYS Hute Stor of One Shot THROUGH ADAT Chan 1 2 MAIN Prosram Audition Hote mA OTHER aa E Using the Footswitches You can connect up to 2 foot switches to the MPC5000 and assign several functions ex Start Stop a sequence etc to them 01 Connect a foot switch to the MPC5000 FOOTSWITCH jack 02 Press the MODE button and then the PAD 9 OTHER to Foot Switch 1 enter OTHER mode Foot Switch 2 03 Press the F2 FOOTSW button This brings up the FOOTSW page where you can make settings for the foot switch OTHER FOOTSI 1 field and the function to assign to Footswitch 2 in the Footswitch 2 field 04 Select the function to assign to Footswitch 1 in the Footswitch You can select the following functions PLAY START The Footswitch will act the same as pressing PLAY START button 196 Other Settings PLAY The Footswitch will act the same as pressing PLAY button STOP The Footswitch will act the same as pressing STOP button PLAY STOP When you step on the Footswitch in sto
327. sabled A iP qi 26 Display This backlit LCD Liquid Crystal Display shows you the status of your MPC 27 DISPLAY CONTRAST Knob This knob will change the contrast of the LCD display This will allow the screen to be easily viewed at many different angles 28 F1 through F6 Buttons These buttons are used to call up pages at the bottom of the display or to execute the feature assigned to the button The available feature depends on the currently displayed screen 29 WINDOW Button Pressing this button will display a pop up window where you can see more details about the parameter selected on the screen and allows you to access more in depth editing of the selected function When there is more information or parameters available for a particular selection the WINDOW button will light This button also acts as a drive activity light when connected via USB When your computer is accessing the drive the WINDOW button s LED will flash repeatedly 6 Introduction 30 PAD1 Through PAD16 These drum pads let you trigger the samples in your MPC or play Synth Programs These pads also let you enter various modes choose sequences and mute tracks ci an VIRTUAL ANALOG SYNTHESIZER VCF ENV ARP SYNTH ON OFF ey e VCA ENV2 ARPEGGIATOR o 31 SYNTH to the MPC 5000 is a virtual analog synth with which you can create you
328. sample you can use the DETECT TEMPO page to find out the tempo Using the DETECT TEMPO l Set the start point and the end point of the sample to match the length of one bar at 4 4 I In the Sample Edit window press F2 TEMPO Il Press the F5 DO IT button 107 The window will go back to the Sample Edit window and the calculated tempo in the DETECT TEMPO will be set automatically in the Original tempo field Note Depending on the sample the DETECT TEMPO may not be able to accurately detect the correct tempo 05 In the New field set the desired new tempo Tip If you want to change the sample length with 96 you can use the following method For example if you wish to lengthen the sample by 20 you set the original tempo to 100 then set the new tempo to 120 Now you can get the 20 longer sample 06 Set the Preset field and Adjust fields if necessary Preset The MPC5000 uses 18 preset algorithms to carry out the timestretch process so you can select a preset that nearest resembles your sample s content If the results are not to your liking try experimenting with different presets Each preset is divided into A B or C A Standard quality timestretch with fast processing B Better quality timestretch with slower processing C Highest quality timestretch with even slower processing Time stretch Presets 01 FEM VOX Female Voice 02 MALE VOX Male Voice 03 LOW MALE VOX Low Male Voice
329. ses selected in the Value field from the note MULTI VAL Multiplies the Duration percent by the value in MIDI pulses selected in the Value field SET TO VALUE Sets the note to the duration in MIDI pulses selected in the Value field 05 Press the F6 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start processing your changes Selecting the editing region by bar You can edit the sequence by bar This is done in the BARS page in the SEQ EDIT mode which can be accessed by pressing the MODE button and then the PAD 12 E Copying bars COPY You can copy bars within the selected region to another place The length of the destination sequence will be extended to add the copied bars 01 Select the Edit field in the BARS page of the SEQ EDIT mode it ah and select COPY From Sequence To SeAUerIca H1 Tor_Gun 1 Tor_Gun The various fields necessary for copying will be displayed First bar After bar 02 In the From Sequence field select the source sequence 03 In the To Sequence field select the destination sequence Last bar Copies 04 In the First bar field select the first bar of the source sequence EVENTS 05 In the Last bar field select the last bar of the source sequence 06 In the After bar field select the destination The selected bars will be copied to the end of the bar set here 07 In the Copies field select the number of times to copy the data To copy the same phrase repeate
330. ss F4 CANCEL You can copy a sequence s parameters including the Loop Time Sig and Bars parameters to another sequence 01 In the Sequence field in MAIN mode select a sequence whose parameters you wish to copy 02 Press the WINDOW button The NAME SEQUENCE window will be displayed 03 Press F3 COPY button The COPY SEQUENCE window will be displayed 04 In the Sequence field below select a sequence to copy to 05 Press F3 PARAMS button Copying the sequence s parameters will start To cancel the operation press F4 CANCEL DERRZ RI ME E Deleting a Sequence You can remove a sequence from the memory of the MPC5000 01 In the Sequence field in MAIN mode select a sequence to delete Pressing DO IT will o erase this se uence 02 Press the WINDOW button The NAME SEQUENCE window will be displayed 03 Press F2 DELETE button ALLSECABS BB DO IT E 33 The DELETE SEQUENCE window will be displayed 04 Press F5 DO IT button This will delete the selected sequence and changes its name to unused E Deleting All Sequences You can delete all the sequence data in the memory at one time 01 In the MAIN mode select the Sequence field and press the WINDOW button The NAME SEQUENCE window will be displayed 02 Press F1 DELETE button The DELETE SEQUENCE window will be displayed 03 Press F3 ALLSEQ button The DELETE ALL SEQUENCES window wil
331. ssing the up down CURSOR buttons while holding in SHIFT You can then select several Grids by pressing the right left CURSORS or turning the DATA wheel while holding SHIFT 02 Press in and hold F3 EDIT and then press F2 MOVE When you press F3 EDIT the display of F2 will change to MOVE until you release the button 5s Time amp B8g1 B1 48B8 Move To 661 061 568 03 The Move Events window will be displayed Time The selected Event time the start point is displayed You cannot change iii this value i CLOSE ian B Move to You select the time that you wish to move the selected Events to 04 Press F5 DO IT The selected event will be moved Deleting an event To delete a selected Event proceed as follows 01 In the Event list select the Grid and the Range that you wish to delete You can select several Pads by pressing the up down cursor button while holding in the SHIFT button You can then select several Grids by pressing the right left cursor or turning the DATA wheel if you continue to hold in the SHIFT button 02 Press the F4 DELETE button The selected Event will be deleted After copying deleting an Event you can revert back the previous status by pressing the UNDO button Entering an event E Step recording In the GRID EDIT mode when you hit a pad or when the MPC5000 receives MIDI data from an external device you can record the event in the current time posi
332. t rnine to HD MIX CON 78 Chapter 9 Functions of a Pad iii dida Playing With pads siir a ea OO Orca E ROO CR ER CR OU AGO CLONE RC UC QC VR EA E E ER Win we UN VAN ORC we v C EUN W witch pdd DAHE S otetidiocet ttd tentat t O bote dee dul abe asd BU Feeds tutt rena ate ina tud aes ceu rest utes Heads 79 W Full level function FULL LEVEL DUO estad siii ia Fo deed boves Ends 79 W 16 leyels function 16 LEVEL DUO 0 tco rei o eret Ea e Pose p vex Ya tete decades deceat eas oa A but rient 79 Muting Sequence Tracks with Pads Track Mute ll OS rani eg sae eat ia eects e orn rn 80 B Solo Funo o Merenn coelestes aul taco E ecoute usn turi ae cee la tdt be conhevedaaie RE EEE ema ttuta Be ces ono in eddie cauto 80 a Selecting Instant Track Mutes ace aselenssio dada vedas A Rd arial 80 W setting the Track Mute in Solo Model oe outlast bere Ee peat da eka ba Sot acl AE ood se AA usa Se 81 EN Recordine Track MUIOSU abo ente aati iicet tcc tutos bt Que p dot alli E dE C iu uen 81 m Tenorio Track Mule Eve a iaa 81 E Track Mute ETS RET UU UU TT 81 Track Mute QUANtIZACI N rada di E TRACK MUTE OZ a 82 B Changing the Timing Correct for Track Mute Quantizati0N coooooooccnnnononoonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnccnannnss 82 Change Sequences in Track Mute Mode 22222 n nnn nn nuu uua aa
333. t after the PLAY or the PLAY START button is pressed right after the key is pressed or after a 1 bar count OFF DOWN FEA i Recording playback will start right after the key is Click Metronome pressed without a count REC ONLY Count In EINER Rate 1 4 There will be a count only for recording overdub In Plau OFF Playback will be started without a count In Record OW REC PLAY Sound METRO TICK There will be a count for both recording and Volume JB playback Qut Rate field CL US You can select the rhythm for the metronome sound The metronome will be played with 1 4 note if you set 1 4 and 1 8 note if you set 1 8 Range goes from 1 4 to 1 32 3 In play field You can select this if you want the metronome sound during playback If you select YES you will hear the metronome sound during playback In Record field You can select this if you want the metronome sound during recording overdub If you select NO you will not hear the metronome sound during the recording overdub 28 The Sequencer Ra RARI eer Sound field Here you can select what your metronome will sound like Seven different sounds are available to use MPC CLICK METRO TICK CLAP SHAKER TAMBOURINE SIDESTICK 1 SIDESTICK 2 Volume field Controls the overall level of the Metron
334. t before the end point will be included in the area 05 In the Erase field select the type of events to be deleted This will default to NOTE ONLY The following are also available ALL EVENTS EXCLUSIVE EXCEPT NOTE EFFECT PITCH BEND TEMPO CTRL CHANGE REAL TIME PRG CHANGE TRACK MUTE CH PRESS PAD MUTE POLY PRESS With CTRL CHANGE POLY PRESS and REAL TIME you can be even more specific selecting individual controller numbers or erasing poly pressure events associated only with a certain note 06 Select the Note Pad field This field will default to PADS or NOTES depending on the track type ALL is selected in the Value field as the default While Pads is selected on Parameter field you can select individual pads in the Value field by hitting the specific pads you would like to delete directly You can also select a pad with the DATA Wheel If the selected track is a MIDI type track instead of DRUM this field will display p XDUTS WT Notes as follows DRE I FEHO GR didis 0 C 2 127 G 8 Track pM Track 61 The field for Notes consists of two parts Low note and High note Low note left sets lower range of MIDI note and High note right sets high range of MIDI note In this page you can set note range with an external MIDI keyboard The range is updated whenever a MIDI note is received Time 66i 6i 000 043 61 Hag Erase HOTE ONLY For example when the MPC5000 receives only one note such as C 3 the
335. t how to handle the file when you already have the data with the same name as the loading file in the unit NO The MPC5000 will not save the file with the same name YES The MPC5000 will overwrite the data by with new file 06 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start saving the data 169 E About Input Thru IPT File If you use SAVE ENTIRE MEMORY to save the internal memory data the Input thru file will be saved with the Project file The Input Thru file contains the setting of the Input Thru in the MPC5000 When you load the Project file the Input Thru file will be loaded automatically with the Project file You can also load only the Input Thru file IPT File in the Load page E Renaming a File You can change the name of the file in the memory card 01 Select the desired file with the CURSOR You can move through directories with the left right CURSOR buttons Tyre SAVE A SAMPLE 02 Press and hold the F5 EDIT button Item 888 KICK B HUTOLORD The Function buttons will change as shown 03 While holding in the F5 EDIT button press the F3 RENAME button The NAME EDIT window will be displayed 04 Enter the new name and press the F5 ENTER button For more information about setting the name see the Setting Names section on page 20 Note If you change the file name the MPC5000 may not be able to load the file properly For example the samples used for a program are saved i
336. t is from both MIDI OUT A and B OMNI CD The MPC5000 will output the incoming MIDI data as it is from both MIDI OUT C and D OMNI ALL The MPC5000 will output the incoming MIDI data as it is from all of MIDI OUT A B C and D 189 Setting the MIDI Input Channel Normally the MPC5000 can receive the incoming MIDI data regardless of the MIDI channel so you do not have to worry about the MIDI channel of the connected MIDI devices You can change the setting to receive only the data on a specific MIDI channel 01 Select the MIDI SYNC mode by pressing the MODE button and hitting the PAD 8 MIDI SYNC 02 Press the F1 MIDI button The MIDI page will be displayed 03 vpn the Active track receive channel field and select the MIDI channel from which you wish to receive the ata If you set this field to ALL the MPC5000 will receive all channels If you select any channel from 1 to 16 the MPC5000 will receive only the selected channel Connecting the MPC5000 as a Multitimbral Sound Module In this section you will learn how to connect the MPC5000 to a MIDI sequencer as a multitimbral sound module so each incoming MIDI channel will play a different sound Up to 32 different sounds can be played in this manner The MPC can be played with a MIDI sequencer or a keyboard sending multiple MIDI channels This allows the MPC s internal Sample and Synth programs to be played by an external source with each MIDI channel playing a diff
337. tart end points are displayed in sample points The sample point is the minimum unit used for sample editing The MPC5000 has 44 100 sample points per second E About the waveform display The TRIM page displays the waveform of the sample selected in the Sample field It displays the waveform of the whole sample with the parts set by start end points highlighted E LEFT RIGHT BOTH Waveform View If you select a stereo sample you can select the channel LEFT RIGHT or BOTH to display in the View field E Adjusting the start point 01 Press MODE and PAD 5 TRIM Wiew LEFT LOOP SHAP AL CHOP EDIT Wiew BOTH End 162 530 TRIM LOOF SHBP al CHOP EDIT When you press the MODE button its LED will blink Pressing PAD 5 while the MODE button s LED is blinking will display the TRIM page 02 Select the Sample field and select a sample you wish to edit The Sample field is located in the upper left corner of the screen which displays the sample name This field chooses which sample s waveform is to be displayed 03 Select the St start field and adjust the start point You can change the start point value by turning the DATA wheel If you press the left or right CURSOR buttons while holding SHIFT you can move the cursor to higher points within the numeric display to allow for quicker value selection You can also enter the value directly with the numeric keypad Additionally the start
338. ternal synth keygroup programs and to external devices via MIDI Whether this aftertouch information is recorded or not can be selected by doing the following 07 Press the MODE button and then PAD 9 OTHER Master Level izdB Sus Pedal to Duration HO This switches the MPC5000 to OTHER mode Truncate Duration TOU SEG LENGTH 08 Select the Record Aftertouch field scene Ee i Ea uM ar Average 2 09 Use the DATA wheel to select yes or no to decide if the MPC Flash Tempo LED ALWAYS will record Aftertouch Hute Stor of One Shot ADAT Chan itz Program Audition Hote THROUGH MAIN OUT L amp R C 3c 6B OTHER Mae Master Level 1zdB Sus Pedal to Duration HO Truncate Duration TO SEG LENGTH Record Pad Aftertouch HO Tar Average R Flash Temro LED ALWAYS Mute Stor of One Shot THROUGH HDHT Chan 1 2 MAIN OUT L amp R Program Audition Hote C 3 B amp B OTHER igit ll Tap Average This parameter determines how many taps will be used to average the tempo when tapping on the TAP TEMPO button E Flash Tempo LED The Tap Tempo LED can be set to continuously flash or only flash when tap tempo is in use To adjust the Flash Tempo LED parameter do the following Master Level Sus Pedal to Duration NO Truncate Duration TO SER LENGTH 01 Press MODE and PAD 9 to enter OTHER mode Record Pad Aftertouch HO Tar Average 2 02 Select the Flash Tempo LED and select ALWAYS or WHEN Flash Temro LED
339. the New name field the recorded sample will have a new name automatically You can select the New name field with the cursor and change the sample name if needed For more information about setting the sample name see the Setting Names section on page 20 05 Select the Assign to Pad field with the cursor and select the pad to which you wish to assign the sample You can select the pad directly by hitting the pad when the cursor is in the Assign to Pad field If you just wish to keep the recorded sample in the MPC5000 s memory and not to assign to the pad select OFF with the DATA wheel 06 Select the Root note field to determine at what key the sample will play at its true pitch when assigned to a Keygroup program To set the Root Note you can scroll in this field with the DATA wheel or by pressing a note on your MIDI keyboard 07 Press the F5 KEEP button This closes the Keep or Retry windows and goes back to the SAMPLE page Note The recorded sample will be removed when you switch the unit off To keep the sample you need to save on a memory card or the internal Hard Disk For more information on saving see Saving and Loading DISK Mode on page 165 Sampling detailed information In this section you will learn about several features regarding the recording which were not described in the previous section Recording the digital signal Here you will learn how to record a digital signal Note
340. the Digital Outputs Mute Stor of One Shot THROUGH 01 Press the MODE button and then PAD 9 OTHER HE ceu de de This will switch you into the OTHER mode OTHER e 02 Select Master Level 03 Scroll with the DATA wheel to set the level This sets the digital signal level which will be sent out to the DA converter The MPC5000 can output up to 64 sounds simultaneously There is a great difference in the level when you are playing single sounds or playing all 64 sounds at once If you increase the value in the Master level field you can increase the entire level of the MPC5000 to create a more powerful audio output with less noise However if you playback many sounds at the same time the level may be overloaded which may cause distortion If you decrease the value in the Master level field you can prevent distortion when you play more complicated sequences You may find however that less complex sequences will benefit from increasing this value as this will allow for more headroom allowing for a punchier sound Set the appropriate value in the Master level field depending on the application ll Sustain Pedal to Duration In this section you will learn how to handle sustain pedal information when you are using an external MIDI keyboard with the MPC5000 as a sequencer Sustain pedal data is a MIDI event used to make the sound continue after a key on the keyboard is released Usually a foot switch controls this data The ke
341. the Pad Sensitivity by hitting Pad S ensitivits g _velocity 8 it Velocity Curve i Hftertouch a The selected Pad Number will be displayed in the Pad field The number of the current Pad sensitivity and the current Velocity curve will be displayed in Pad Sensitivity field and Velocity Curve field Velocity and Aftertouch will be displayed MM EST in meters on the right side of the screen 04 Select the Pad Sensitivity field and adjust the pad sensitivity number as you hit the Pad If the Pad sensitivity number is set to a low value it s harder to get a high velocity value even if you hit the Pad hard If the Pad sensitivity number is set to a high value it may become too easy to get high velocities even when hitting the Pad softly Velocity Curve maps 05 Select the Velocity curve field and adjust the Velocity curve while hitting the Pad The velocity curve maps the strength of hitting the Pad to MIDI velocity data If the Velocity response is not enough even with a range hard soft Pad hits try switching the velocity curve from A B C D E SYSTEM This page displays important system information about your MPC5000 To access this page press F4 SYSTEM while in OTHER mode Version The MPC 5000 s operating system is upgradeable and allows us make changes to existing features after it has left the factory floor To make Wersion 8 16 45 18 47 sure you have the latest version of the OS you can check the
342. the cursor to higher points within the numeric display to allow for quicker value selection You can also enter the value directly with the numeric keypad Additionally the end point can be edited by moving the Q2 Q LINK slider Hit the pad to check the end point When you hit the pad the MPC5000 plays the sample The playback method varies depending on the pad PAD 13 PLAY LOOP The MPC5000 will play the sample from the loop point to the end point repeatedly PAD 14 PLAY TO The MPC5000 will play the part before the loop point If the cursor is on the TRIM END parameter it will play from the sample start to the TRIM END If the cursor is on the LOOP START parameter it will play from the sample start to the LOOP START Any other case it will play from the sample start to the TRIM START PAD 15 PLAY FROM The MPC5000 will play the sample from the loop point If the cursor is on the TRIM END parameter it will play from the TRIM END to the sample end If the cursor is on the LOOP START parameter it will play from the LOOP START to the sample end Any other case it will play from the TRIM START to the sample end PAD 16 PLAY ALL The MPC5000 will play the whole sample PAD 1 to PAD 12 The MPC5000 will first play from the start point to the end point and then play from the loop point to the end point repeatedly ing to the Next Zero Crossing SNAP O For easier sample editing the MPC5000 can snap the start or endpoint
343. the frequency of VCO2 From vibrato like pitch variations to harsh clanging metallic noises to bell type sounds a broad range of sound is possible with cross modulation Wico nad H E VCF This page is where in depth controls for the filter can be edited To enter the VCF page do the following Fam EE Pros Bed WI 01 From the MAIN screen select a track that uses a synth Filter Filter LoPassH Fole ol program Cutoff iy Res n You can also create a new synth program as detailed in the previous section 198 02 Press MODE and PAD 6 PROGRAM kesk E jEnwi El LFO E Wel gt W CutoFF Gs Cutoff ga Cutor rio Cutoff in E E E E This will bring you into PROGRAM mode where you can edit different parameters Enwl Enui Enui of your program Attack Decay T Sust Rel l A ra A 31 Note you can also use the SYNTH button as a shortcut to jump to the last Synth program you edited 03 Press the F3 VCF button This will display the VCF page Here the filter can be edited Each parameter can be selected by using the CURSOR to select each field and turning the DATA wheel 138 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs 04 Edit the parameters of the VCF page as desired The following parameters are available to be edited Filter Cutoff Sets the frequency start point for the filter This field also appears on the Basic page See page 135 for more pee information Cutoff 168 Filter Res Sets the amount of e
344. the function buttons will change as follows i F5 SUDDEN If you press this button during the playback the MPC5000 will skip to the next step before it finishes the current sequence or when no next step has been choosen pressing the button will make the MPC5000 jump immediately to the start of the already playing sequence i F6 NEXT If you press this button during the play back the MPC5000 will skip to the next step after it finishes playing back the current sequence regardless of the number of repeats in the Reps field Tip If HOLD is selected for a step in the Reps field the MPC5000 will not go to the next step until you press the F5 SUDDEN button or the F6 NEXT button Other features in SONG Mode E Changing the song name 01 In the Song field of the SONG page select a song that you wish to change the name of 02 Press WINDOW The Song window will be displayed 03 In the Song name field enter the new name For more information for setting the name see the Setting Names section on Page 20 Press incz dec or 04 Press F4 CLOSE move dial to change name It closes the window and goes back to the SONG page ACELE T El A Ud m E Copying a song To copy a song to another song proceed as follows 01 In the Song field of the SONG mode select a song that you wish to copy 02 Press WINDOW The Song window will be displayed 03 Press F5 COPY The Copy Song window will
345. the removable media and drag and drop to the trash can When you drag the removal media to the Dock s recycle bin under Mac OS 10 x the icon will change to the eject icon 07 Remove the USB cable from the USB jacks of the MPC5000 and the computer Note Make sure that you do Step 06 before disconnecting the USB cable 08 Remove the USB cable from the USB jacks of the MPC5000 and the Mac Note You can transfer the data between the MPC5000 and the Mac only when the USB page is displayed You can not move to another page or mode from USB page unless you disconnect the USB cable Note As of this writing Macintosh computers do not support soft disconnect of Multiformat USB Devices In order to fully disconnect a Multiformat USB drive including the MPC5000 the USB cable must be physically unplugged Chapter 20 Other Settings In this section you will learn about the other features which were not mentioned in the other chapters E Adjusting the Master Level This attenuates the overall internal volume of the MPC5000 If you are Master Level playing sequences with a lot of different samples and notice clipping 94s Pedal to Duration adjust this parameter to a lower level When playing simpler sequences r sia eiiis ie SER LENGTH this parameter can be turned up to improve the MPC5000 s output level ARa eae REM a adding a perceptible punch to the sound This can also be used to adjust Flash Tempo LED ALMAS the level of
346. ticular track will blink The Square box indicates which track is currently active in the Track field Using the Track Status field you can find stray notes on tracks and visually see where each event is happening Also tracks set as Continuous Sample Tracks will be displayed as a symbol For more on Continuous Sample Tracks see page 37 Furthermore when you use the Mute or Solo button in Main mode on a track you will see this in the Track Status field s as well Muted tracks will have a small x on their respective dots in this Track Status field Recording the Performance In this section you will learn how to record the performance you made with pads to tracks in a sequence 01 To record your performance data to a sequence you need to load a program to the MPC5000 By default the MPC5000 automatically loads preset programs and demo sequences from the internal ROM Here we assume that you have already loaded a program to the MPC5000 If you have not done so do this now by loading a program from a memory card or by recording a sample and assigning it to a pad etc For more information on loading a program see the Saving and Loading DISK Mode section on page 165 For more information on recording a sample see the Sampling section on page 95 02 Press the MAIN button to open the MAIN page The MAIN button displays the MAIN page where you record your sequences 03 In the Sequence field select a sequenc
347. ting the LVL field and pressing the WINDOW Button rag nera Hmrlitude Envelore The selected pad will be displayed Fad Abi TOPRIM Delay field This field sets the amount of silence that will be played before triggering a sample the larger the value the longer the delay Rel Attack field elease You can set the sample s attack time in this field The larger MeAtts d VeStarti 8 USLvulilBB the value the longer it will take for the sound to start Fade EF CLOS in Decay field This field sets how long a sound will fade out before the sound enters the Sustain part of the envelope Sus LvI Sustain Level field 124 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs This parameter is the level that the sample reaches when the decay portion is finished This parameter has no effect on samples set to ONE SHOT Sus Dec Sustain Decay field This parameter determines the time it takes for the Sustain Decay stage to drop to zero If this parameter is set to 100 the envelope will sustain for as long as the key is held down This parameter has no effect on samples set to ONE SHOT Release field This sets the amount of time the envelope will take to get from its current level to zero after the note has been released The higher the number the longer it will take to fade out V Attack field You can control the sample s attack time by velocity The larger you set the value
348. tinuous Sample Tracks The MPC5000 plays samples assigned to pads when triggering the pad event So that if you have the sequence which has a long sample and start playing the sequence from a point which is past the actual pad event the sample may not be played because the pad event for the sample may be earlier than the sequence play start point A Continuous Sample Track allows samples assigned to the selected Pad in each track to be played from their current position whenever PLAY or PLAY START is pressed This way if you are working with say a four measure loop pressing start at bar two will start the loop playing from its correct location at bar two immediately without having to wait for a NOTE ON event Tip New to the MPC5000 is the ability to have up to 64 continuous sample tracks each assigned to a specific pad This allows you to have multiple loops assigned to multiple tracks usable with the TRACK MUTE function For more information on Track Mute see page 80 To enable Continuous Sample Track on a selected track do the hung BRI BU 115 following 01 In the MAIN mode select the Track field and press the Track Hame Track B1 WINDOW button Press 1incrdec or The TRACK NAME window will be displayed move dial to change name 02 Select the Continuous Sample Track field and select ON Default Hame Track B Continuous Sample Track DM The Pad field will be displayed below the Continuous Sample Tra
349. tion Replace same files This determines how to handle files when the destination location already has a sample with the same name 167 NO The MPC5000 will not save the file with the same name If you loaded the data from the memory card and edited only the program select NO YES The MPC5000 will overwrite the data with the new data which you are about to save If you have loaded the data from the memory card and edited the sample data select YES Program Format This allows you to choose whether to save the program in native MPC5000 format or legacy MPC1000 format for compatibility with the MPC1000 MPC2500 and MPC500 MPC5000 The Program will be saved in native MPC5000 format as a 50S file This file will retain MPC5000 specific formatting such as simultaneous pad settings random and cycle play modes and filter settings MPC1000 The program will be saved in legacy MPC1000 format as a PGM file This file will be able to be opened on an MPC1000 MPC2500 or MPC500 but will lose any MPC5000 specific formatting such as such as simultaneous pad settings random and cycle play modes and filter settings Tip the MPC1000 MPC2500 and MPC500 have a memory maximum of 128MB so be sure that the program you are saving totals less than 128MB if you wish to open it on a legacy MPC 06 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start to save the data Note If the destination folder already has the data with the sa
350. tion REPLACE The MPC5000 will overwrite the destination with the source data The data that is already in the destination will be removed MERGE The MPC5000 will merge the source data with the data that is already in the destination In the Start field set the start point of destination time The MPC5000 will start the copy to the time set here In the Copies field set the number of times to copy To copy the same phrase repeatedly enter the number of copies in the Copies field You can copy it repeatedly with one operation Press the F6 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start copying the data E Moving events MOVE You can move events within the selected region to another location Unlike the copy function this function will remove the source data from the original location 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Select the Edit field in the EVENT page of the SEQ EDIT mode and select MOVE Sa 1 Tor_ Gur The various fields necessary for moving will be displayed zia m l e peer iE In the Range field and the Pads Notes field select the region Bi Tor Gun that you wish to move i Hi Track ui In the From Sq field and the Tk field on the right select the gene Sagi source sequence and track In the to Sq and the Tk field on the right select the destination sequences and tracks In the Mode field specify how to move the data to the destination REPLACE The MPC5000 will overwrite the
351. tion the time displayed in the Now field You can add events to the desired time position one by one This is called Step Recording 01 In the GRID EDIT mode press the REC button or the OVERDUB button The LED of the OVERDUB button will be lit which indicates that you can now enter events by hitting a pad 02 Move the cursor to the time position you want to insert an event by pressing the right left cursor button You can also move the cursor by turning the DATA wheel or selecting the time position in the Now field 03 Hit a pad The Event will be recorded and the cursor will move to the next grid automatically If you select NO in Auto step increment field in the Step Edit Options in STEP EDIT mode the MPC5000 will stop the auto step increment See the Detailed setting for Step Recording in the next section for more information 04 Press the STOP button The LED of the OVERDUB button will be turned off and you can finish the Step Recording 59 Detailed Setting for Grid Edit Recording Pressing WINDOW when the NOW field is selected will bring up the STEP EDIT OPTIONS window Here you can make various settings for the step recording E Auto step increment field If you select YES the MPC5000 will automatically update the sequence according to the setting of the timing correct when it receives a pad event or a note event B Duration of recorded notes field You can determine how the lengt
352. tion on configuring outputs see page 195 48 DIGITAL IN OUT Jacks S PDIF These are the coaxial digital input output This IN is to connect digital outputs such as a CD player and a DAT This OUT sends out the same signal as the STEREO OUT 49 PHONO GROUND nut If your turntable requires it use this nut to connect the turntable ground wire 50 LINE PHONO Switch This switch determines whether the PHONO IN RCA jacks will be line or phono level When set to PHONO an RIAA Class phono preamp will be applied to the input Set this switch to the LINE position for sampling a line level source CD player DJ mixer Minidisk etc and to the PHONO position for recording with a turntable WARNING Incorrectly setting this switch to PHONO will yield distortion on devices not requiring amplification Make sure your turntable requires amplification BEFORE setting this switch 51 ASSIGNABLE MIX OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Jacks 1 4 These individual outputs can be used to output each pad sound separately allowing you to send individual sounds to external mixers or effects Using these outputs you can perform advanced mixing for your songs 52 USB Port This USB 2 0 port allows for connecting your MPC to you computer and allows you high speed access to you MPC s hard drive from your computer 53 MIDI Jacks 2 IN 4 OUT The MPC5000 can send and receive MIDI data through these jacks Connect one of the MPC s out
353. tions are available Standard The Arpeggiator will play the notes in order ascending or descending depending on the Arp Pattern As Played The Arpeggiator will play the notes in the order they were played 10 Adjust the Swing field as desired Like Timing Correct this will delay certain notes of the Arpeggiator pattern to create a shuffled feel Note Unlike Note Repeat this is independent of Timing Correct allowing for Note Repeat and the Arpeggiator to play different patterns independently 11 Adjust the Velocity parameter as desired This allows the velocity of each note played by the Arpeggiator to have their velocities set to anywhere from 1 127 or set to the velocity they were played Latching the Arpeggiator Latching is a method of letting your arpeggiator play without having to hold down any notes or trigger sources The Arpeggiator will keep playing until latch is turned off or the STOP button is pressed To use latching do the following 01 From the MAIN page select a track you wish to use the Arpeggiator with 02 Press the ARPEGGIATOR button 03 Press the F6 LATCH button This will turn on the Latch function of the Arpeggiator 04 Press and release a few pads or play some keys on your controller keyboard For example if you press and release the following keys C3 E3 G3 These notes will continue to play after they are released 05 Press and release another key o
354. to unused E Track Lock Individual tracks in a sequence can be locked for editing This will allow data on that track to be protected when performing global functions and protects from accidental adding deleting or changing the sequence data on the track All data including MIDI notes controller changes Q LINK events etc will be preserved Programs can be changed to allow you to audition different sounds on the locked track while preserving the data A Track 1 Track 61 from editing A Track s LOCK Status is indicated by the padlock icon to the left of the TRACK field as indicated on the right To lock or unlock a track do the following 01 Select the TRACK LOCK icon The TRACK LOCK icon appears as a padlock to the left of the TRACK field as shown on the right 02 Turn the DATA Wheel or press the button to lock the track Press to unlock the track The icon will indicate the track status as shown below E Track is unlocked ri I Track is locked B MIDI Receive Indicator When Incoming MIDI is detected at MIDI IN I or II the indicator will light as shown on the right mHMIDI Waa E Track Select with SHIFT Pad While on the MAIN Page press the SHIFT button and hit a pad to select the corresponding Track Tracks are selected by number as follows Pad Number Track Number Pads A01 A16 Tracks 1 16 Pads BO1 B16 Tracks 17 32 Pads CO1 C16 Tracks 33 48 Pads DO1 D16 Tracks 49 64 37 Con
355. to handle sustain pedal information when you are using an external MIDI keyboard with the MPC5000 as a sequencer Sustain pedal data is a MIDI event used to make the sound continue after a key on the keyboard is released Usually a foot switch controls this data The keyboard sends out Sustain pedal data as a separate event from a note event so normally the sequencer recognizes this data as separate data However when you are overdubbing on a short sequence loop it might be better to convert the sustain pedal s data to the recorded note s duration the length of the note For example if you record the sustain pedal s data as it is once you press the sustain pedal during the loop sustain will be applied to all the data after that If you convert the sustain pedal s data to note duration the movement of the sustain pedal will not affect the other notes Thus the MPC5000 is set to convert the sustain pedal s data to note duration by default but you can change the setting to record the data as sustain pedal data 12 Press the MODE button and then PAD 9 OTHER This switches the MPC5000 to OTHER mode Master Level 12dE Sus Pedal to Duration 13 Select the Sus Pedal to Duration field Truncate Duration TO SEQ LENGTH Record Pad Aftertouch HO 14 Use the DATA wheel to select one of the following choices for Tar Average 2 how the MPC5000 will interpret the sustain pedal s MIDI data T e IRR POLEN depending on th ir havior uLe SLoP
356. ton Tip When you select several tracks and change a parameter Level or Pan the parameter on each track will be changed relative to the current setting 04 Adjust the Level value in the LVL row The bottom row is labeled LVL Here is where the level setting of each track is set The dark line in each column represents the relative level of each track much like faders on a mixing board You can use the CURSOR buttons to move to each field in MIXER mode and you can adjust each level with the DATA wheel Tip You can also easily change the settings for tracks by using the Q LINK controls For more information on using the Q LINK with MIXER Mode see Using Q LINK Controls with MIXER Mode on page 91 05 Adjust the Pan value in the PAN row The row of knobs above the track level is labeled PAN Here is where the pan position of each track is set The knob position in each column represents the relative pan position of each track much like knobs on a mixing board You can use the CURSOR buttons to move to each field in MIXER mode and you can adjust each level with the DATA wheel Tip You can also easily change the settings for tracks by using the Q LINK controls For more information on using the Q LINK with MIXER Mode see Using Q LINK Controls with MIXER Mode on page 91 E Muting a Track Each track can be muted from MIXER mode To mute a track do the following 01 In the MIXER mode press F2 TrkMix The T
357. ton So you need to move the cursor manually 04 The next letter is a lower case letter a so press the DOWN cursor button Pressing the DOWN cursor button allows you to enter lower case letters 05 Hit 2 once A lower case letter a is entered 06 Hit 7 four times The cursor will move to the right automatically and a lower case s is entered 07 Press the RIGHT cursor button to move the cursor to the right and hit the 7 four more times This will enter a second s 08 Press the RIGHT cursor button to move the cursor to the right and press RIGHT cursor button holding the SHIFT button The SHIFT RIGHT cursor button inserts space 09 Press the right cursor button to move the cursor one step to the right and press the 0 button four times to insert a zero 10 Press the 1 button four times 11 Press the RIGHT cursor button to move the cursor to the right and press the LEFT cursor button four times holding the SHIFT button The SHIFT LEFT cursor buttons delete selected letters Now Bass 01 is entered instead of Sequence 01 12 Press F5 ENTER to confirm the entry and close the window Pressing F4 CANCEL cancels the entry and closes the window In this case the name does not change Chapter 3 The Sequencer The MPC5000 has a sequencer feature that allows you to record playback your performance With the sequencer feature you can record the performance you created wit
358. ttings E Truncate Duration This setting allows you to choose how note lengths are handled at the end of the sequence TO SEQ LENGTH The MPC5000 records a note as played up to sequence length In other words if the sequence is two measures long the longest note that would be recorded will be 2 measures as well This is useful when a note is intended to cross from the end of the sequence to the beginning and still continue playing TO SEQ END The MPC5000 cuts the note at the end of the sequence even if you hit the pad You cannot record beyond the loop This is useful for making sure all notes end exactly on the beat at the end of the Master Level Sus Pedal to Duration Truncate Duration Record Pad Aftertouch Tar Average Flash Temro LED Mute Stor of One Shots ADAT Chan 1 72 Prosram Audition Hate OTHER ized sequence and is useful for tightening up drum loops or long samples set to NOTE ON AS PLAYED The MPC5000 records your performance as it is played This is useful for when it s desirable to have a note play for a long time as a sequence loops E Record Aftertouch TO SEG LENGTH ALWAYS THROUGH MAIN OUT L amp R C 3C eB Aftertouch also called Channel Pressure is a specific controller event which is generated when a pad is triggered and then pressure is varied by pressing heavier or lighter The pads on the MPC5000 are capable of sending aftertouch messages to both the MPC5000 s in
359. ttom of the list respectively While in MAIN mode pressing SHIFT UP will always select the Sequence field and SHIFT DOWN will always select the Track field 13 TAP TEMPO Button You can set a sequence s tempo by tapping this button at the desired rate For more about setting tempos see The Sequencer on page 21 E ma e SHF T no aa oo Ha x i iuh iu ied dd EEIE naaa hh dh dd ES PI ER md AA TE KN Lo nang ae Ah dd a au ETT Er ada au Th ror al 14 MAIN Button This is the Main page of the MPC5000 and is displayed when the unit is powered on Pressing the MAIN button at any time will return you to this page See Operating Modes on page 16 for more about this button 15 MODE Button The MPC5000 has several different operating modes and each mode is assigned to its own pad To shift between these modes press the MODE button and then hit the pad corresponding to the mode you wish to enter See page 16 for more on this 16 SHIFT Button Many of the MPC5000 s buttons and pads serve more than one function Holding the SHIFT button while pressing these buttons and pads allows you to access the secondary functions 17 UNDO Button If you are unsatisfied with your last performance you can quickly delete the last take by pressing the UNDO You are also able to undo certain sample editing functions like Reverse Discard and Norma
360. u can create the shuffle groove E Shift Timing Shift Timing can be used to align notes ahead of the beat allowing for a rushed feel or behind the beat to create a more backbeat type feel Set this value to O for no timing shift E Strength Strength controls how rigidly the track will be quantized In other words a 0 setting will not quantize the track at all whereas a 100 setting will cause every note to snap perfectly into position within the beat Settings closer to 0 will allow note timing to be more relaxed and true to the original performance while settings closer to 100 will make the track more precise Experimentation with the Strength parameter can yield accurate tracks that still maintain a human feel B Window This parameter lets you set the width of the affected area surrounding each timing point At 100 all notes move toward the nearest timing correct point At lower percentages notes far from a quantization point may not be moved Using this parameter you can set how far away a note has to fall from an ideal Timing Correct position before the Timing Correct process ignores that note Click Metronome In this section you will learn about various settings for the metronome click sound 01 When a sequence is in stop mode Press F2 CLICK button in the MAIN page The Click Metronome window will be displayed as on the right Count In field You can set how soon the recording playback should star
361. uotes This is where you can make various settings or ime Sia 4 4 enter values To change the settings of a field select the field and turn the DATA wheel on the panel This operation selecting a field by using a cursor button and changing its settings with the DATA wheel is the most basic operation of MPC5000 Cursor While in MAIN Mode press and hold the SHIFT button and press the UP cursor button to quickly access the Sequence field from anywhere Press and hold the SHIFT button and press the DOWN cursor button to quickly access the Track Field E Function Buttons Six buttons F1 to F6 aligned under the LCD liquid crystal display are Function Buttons Those buttons correspond to each of the six functions that are LL ICE MUTE SOLO displayed on the bottom of the LCD Pressing each button activates its corresponding function The function F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 that each button represents depends on where you are When the LCD looks like this pressing a function MIDI button starts some processing or displays a window When the LCD looks like this you can switch pages using function buttons F1 to F3 The currently selected page is displayed with white letters on a blue background Pressing F4 F5 and F6 buttons does not make any changes Some pages display the page selection and processing function at the same time see below In this case F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 use F1 and
362. ure by correcting the timing in real time during the recording and by correcting the recorded event after the recording E Real time timing correction You can correct the timing in real time during the recording 01 When a sequence is playing press F1 T C button in the MAIN page 02 In the Note Value field set the value for timing correction For example if you set 1 16 each position of the performance data will be moved to the nearest 1 16 note You can set the Note values as follows 1 4 note 1 8 note 1 16 note 1 4 triplets 1 8 triplets 1 16 triplets 1 32 Note 1 32 triplets 1 64 note 1 64 triplets OFF Tip If you press F1 T C button during recording playback a small Timing Correct window will be displayed while you are holding the button You can use the Note value field of this window to change the value for timing correction It makes it easier to change the value during the recording ill Swing You can set the swing value in the Swing field With the swing feature the even numbered events set in the Note value field will be off the rhythm according to the value in the Swing field With this feature you can create the shuffle groove 01 Press F4 CLOSE button This closes the window Tip Thanks to an ultra high sequencer resolution of 960 pulses per quarter note the MPC5000 is the first MPC to be able to apply MPC Style SWING to triplets ill Correcting the timing of recorded events
363. urn the DATA wheel or use the or Numeric Keypad Pam Tune 0 0G to adjust the program tuning E Mute groups Normally when you hit a pad when another pad is played back the samples of these two pads will be played back overlapped With the mute group function you can stop the playback of the sample of a pad when you hit another pad Using this function you can simulate the open close hi hat You can use this function by setting two pads to the same mute group The pads set to the same mute group will not be played at the same time 01 In PROGRAM mode press the F1 SAMPLE button to select the Sample page 02 Select one of the pads to set the mute group by hitting the lam Amb Fm Kit pad Aii KUMA BDimf mz 03 In the Mute Group field select a number aie no samrle Patho samrle You can set any number except OFF 04 Select the other pad to set the mute group by hitting the pad Woice POLY Pam Tune 88 88 05 In the Mute Group field set the same number you set for the Mute Grour RMN You must set the same number to activate the mute group Hit one pad while playing back another The first sample will be stopped and only the sample of the pad you hit will by played Tip You can set the mute group to more than two pads Up to 32 different mute groups can be assigned Note If you set the Play field to MONO each pad sample cannot be played with Polyphony regardless of which mute group you
364. us region will be changed automatically 04 In the End field adjust the end point of the region You can change the end point the same way as the start point Note Each end point of a region is same as the start point of the next region If you change the end point of a region the start point of the next region will be changed automatically If you press the F6 EDIT button the Region Edit window will be displayed You can extract divide or combine regions in this page Refer to Editing a Patched Phrase If you wish to cancel the Chop Shop function press the F1 CANCEL button The TRIM page will be displayed B Zoom With the Chop Fine window you can zoom in to a Chop Point and edit it in detail While Chopping a sample select the region you would like to edit place the cursor in either in the St Start or End field and press the WINDOW button The Chop Fine window will be displayed In the Chop Fine window the waveform display varies depending on the location of the cursor When you select the St Start field with the cursor it displays the start point in the center of the window When you select the End field it displays the end point in the center If you press the F2 ZOOM button the waveform will be zoomed out if you press the F3 ZOOM button it will be zoomed in LINEAR and LOGARITHMIC displays The vertical axis indicates the sample s level Normally the waveform disp
365. ust sets the level at which the filter remains while the pad is being held after completion of decay phase Rel Sets how long a sound will decay when the pad is released The Basic page is used to quickly edit the most commonly edited parameters in a Synth Program More in depth editing will be detailed in the next sections E VCOs This page is where in depth controls for the oscillators can be edited To SauTri F E a ae Enwi gt enter the VCO page do the following share y i col Man 106 03 25 01 From the MAIN screen select a track that uses a synth Semi O eni E Semi O Lfo program Tune i Tune p Tune a cal 48 You can also create a new synth program as detailed in the previous section Mcobul shod P cad M This will bring you into PROGRAM mode where you can edit different parameters UCA of your program Note You can also use the SYNTH button as a shortcut to jump to the last Synth program you edited 03 Press the F2 VCOs button This will display the VCOs page Here the individual oscillators for a synth program can be edited Each parameter can be selected by using the CURSOR to select each field and turning the DATA wheel 04 Edit the parameters of the VCOs page as desired The following parameters are available to be edited f Pm SawTri Pulse n Pw n Wave field Share Width 5 Derth Er This selects the waveform for each of the three oscillators The following 188 B M shapes are availa
366. ut CANCEL This selection fades out the audio with a Logarithmic curve A logarithmic curve will quickly lower and then even out for the middle section lowering quickly again as it nears the end Exponential Fade Out This selection fades out the audio with an Exponential curve An exponential curve will slowly lower in the beginning and then quickly lower for the middle section and then slowing again as it nears the end F4 CANCEL F5 DO IT Press F4 CANCEL to abort the Fade In operation Press F5 DO IT to apply the change Dividing a Phrase Sample into Several Regions E Chop Shop ad EQUALLY Ir T The Chop Shop function will allow you to divide a phrase sample into 1 several regions The MPC5000 has two different ways to use the Chop Shop function AUTO which divides a sample into several regions automatically detecting the attack part of the phrase in the sample and EQUALLY which divides a sample to several regions of equal length ill SLICED SAMPLE PATCHED PHRASE i The divided sample whether AUTO or EQUALLY can be used the auto E MM M following two ways SLICED SAMPLES will assign each divided a region to a pad or as a PATCHED PHRASE which is one sample which has the divided regions and the sequence data for playing the divided regions in time You can change the tempo freely when playing the sequence Note Chop Shop works on both stereo and mono files Dividi
367. utote o B This field selects one of the various filter types For information on which 166 a filter types are available see page 137 Cutoff This represents the range of harmonics over which the filter operates Res This field determines how much boost is given to harmonics around the cutoff frequency Envi gt Cutoff This determines how much of an effect envelope 1 will have on the filter Q LINK AFTER 8 button toggles whether the effect of the envelope will be positive or negative Program Level Prosar aq Lengel Cp This parameter controls the overall volume of the program 1m Env Different aspects of the envelopes can be selected and changed here VcfEnv field LicFEn 1 Selects which envelope is being viewed The parameters Attack Decay 1 Sust Rel below will change to reflect the state of whichever envelope B 79 B is chosen in this field 31 136 Sample Keygroup and Synth Programs Attack This parameter determines how long an envelope will take to reach maximum level when a pad is struck Sounds ranging from a slow swelling violin to drum like attacks are possible by adjusting this parameter Decay This parameter determines how long the sound will take to go from the attack phase to the sustain portion of the envelope Sust For Envelope 2 VcaEnv Sust determines how long a sound will sustain after the decay portion of the envelope finishes For Envelope 1 VcfEnv S
368. ved See page 165 for more information on selecting destination folders 02 In the Type field select SAVE ALL SEQS AND SONGS 03 Press the F6 DO IT button The SAVE ALL SEQS amp SONGS window will be displayed 04 In the File name field select the file name to save 05 Press the F5 DO IT button The MPC5000 will start saving the data E Saving All Data In Memory You can save sample program ALL files at the same time When you save the data a project file will be saved as well as a sample program and ALL files The project file does not have actual sample or sequence data but it has the information about the sample program ALL files that are saved when you save the data When you load the project file the sample program ALL files saved with the project file will be loaded automatically and set the MPC5000 to the same status when you saved the data For example if you select SAVE ENTIRE MEMORY when you save the data after finish working on it for the day you can start the MPC5000 the next day from where you finished the previous day 01 Select the destination folder for the files to be saved See page 165 for more information on selecting destination folders 02 In the Type field select SAVE ENTIRE MEMORY 03 Press the F6 DO IT button The SAVE ENTIRE MEMORY window will be displayed 04 In the Project name field select the name of the project file to save 05 In the Replace same files field se
369. version of CPU Usase 3 Loices 5 the OS in Other mode Date ERT 18 2087 To confirm you have the latest operating system check the support iss 15 58 26 section of http www akaipro com Cal Meer ae HA i ery Usage Clock Settins Enabled This parameter displays how much system resources are being used Only disable for Prolonged storage i t FOOT Shi Voices OTHER JFOOTSwW This parameter displays how many voices are currently being used The MPC5000 can play up to 64 voices simultaneously Date This parameter sets the date for the internal clock Time This parameter sets the MPC5000 s internal clock Calibration This parameter is used if the clock drifts slightly over long periods of time For example over a month Clock Setting This enables or disables the internal clock The internal clock should not be disabled unless the MPC5000 is going to be stored over a long period of time 198 Other Settings ll Initialize To Factory Default The global settings found in the MPC5000 listed below are saved to the internal Flash Memory and stored when the MPC5000 is turned off You can re initialize the Factory Preset settings using the following procedure Turn the MPC5000 on while holding the ERASE button Release the ERASE button after the display shows MPC5000 X MB installed Now the MPC5000 is reset to the Factory Preset settings The following global settings are stored in the MPC5000 01 02 01 02 03
370. will begin writing the audio file to the CD Each audio file will be its own individual track You may repeat the above process until the disk is full or you ve added all the tracks you wish to have on your CD Once you are satisfied with the content of your CD the CD will need to be closed This will finish the CD and allow it to be played on any compact disk player See the section titled Close Session on page 176 for more information E Data CDs This function will allow you to create Data CDs which can hold any type of file This is perfect for backing up your work or making a copy of your work to share with other MPC5000 users To create a Data CD do the following 01 Press F3 UTILIT The UTILITY page will be displayed Function WRITE DATA CD Disk Status EMPTY DISC CR 02 Select WRITE DATA CD in the Function field When a disk is inserted into the CD drive you will see EMPTY DISC in the Disk ECF Card Status field as well as R or RW indicating whether the disk is a recordable R or or i rewritable RW type CD OCD Drive 03 Select the location of the file or folder you wish to write to the CD You can select RAM Hard Disk or Memory card as the source in the Directory List LOAD as well as which folder it resides in You also can preview audio files selected by pressing F5 PLAY Tip You can choose any type of file a folder or even an entire drive provided the CD R has enough free space to ho
371. wish to assign the sample by hitting the Pad If you just wish to keep the recorded sample in the MPC5000 s memory and not assign it to the Pad select OFF with the DATA wheel In the Keep or Retry window in Direct Recording mode if you select the pad in the Assign to pad field the new Record event field will be displayed If you select YES in the Record event field the recording start timing is written as track events in the sequence The recorded sample can be played back with the same timing that the sequence is playing back For this example select YES 10 Press the F5 KEEP button This closes the Keep or Retry windows and goes back to the MAIN page with Direct Recording waiting After the recording play the sequence You will hear the recorded sample is in the same timing as the sequence Chapter 12 Sample Editing TRIM Mode Setting the Start End Points The start end points set the part of the sample data which will be played The recorded sample may for example have silence at the beginning which may make it more difficult to place the sound in the correct spot when hitting the pad You can fix this by adjusting the start point You can also adjust both the start and end points to play only a part of the phrase If the sample has extra silence or unwanted sound at the end you can delete the empty parts by adjusting the end point and using the edit feature This is a good way to free up additional memory S
372. with the numeric keypad Additionally the start point can be edited by moving the Q1 Q LINK slider 06 Press the F6 EDIT button This will open the AUDIO EDIT page For information on the individual edit functions see page 70 E Fine Editing of a Single Track 01 Select the track you wish to edit 02 Press the F5 ZOOM button When editing from the Zoom page only the selected track will be edited 03 Using the St and End fields select the time range you wish to edit You can edit this field by scrolling with the DATA wheel If you press the left or right CURSOR buttons while holding SHIFT you can move the cursor to higher points within the numeric display to allow for quicker value selection You can also enter the value directly with the numeric keypad Additionally the start point can be edited by moving the Q1 Q LINK slider 04 Press the F6 EDIT button This will open the AUDIO EDIT page For information on the individual edit functions see page 70 Individual Edit Functions When the F6 EDIT button is pressed the AUDIO EDIT page is opened This page differs depending on the edit function selected The following parameters are shared among all the pages Mac pleregutT T Tracks pe e a Egit je This displays what tracks are to be edited This displays the tracks that were selected on the TKVIEW page Edit 1 01 AAA 001 01 000 This field selects the different edit functions The
373. yback Punch In You can also stop the recording in the middle of the sequence and resume the playback Punch Out This is useful when you re record part of the recorded sequence Punch In Press the PLAY or the PLAY START button to play back a sequence At the point where you wish to start the recording press the PLAY button while holding the REC button The MPC5000 will start recording If you press the PLAY button and the OVERDUB button instead the MPC5000 will start the overdubbing Punch Out If you press the REC or the OVERDUB button during the recording overdubbing the MPC5000 will stop the recording overdubbing and resume the playback Other Useful Features for Recording Sequences E Undo and Redo When overdubbing sequences you can cancel the last recording and reset to the setting before the recording To UNDO a sequence recording just press the UNDO button The LED of the UNDO button will be off and only the last added recording will be deleted To restore the last recording press the UNDO button again to light the LED Note You can use the UNDO button only for the last recording Tips The MPC5000 is the first MPC to be able to undo and redo sequence recordings while the sequence is playing This allows you to actively audition the recording while the sequence plays to decide if you wish to keep the last recording 25 Erase You can delete a certain pad performance by using
374. yboard sends out Sustain pedal data as a separate event from a note event so normally the sequencer recognizes this as separate data However when you are overdubbing on a short sequence loop it might be better to convert the sustain pedal s data to the recorded note s duration the length of the note For example if you record the sustain pedal s data as it is once you press the sustain pedal during the loop sustain will be applied to all the data after that If you convert the sustain pedal s data to note duration the movement of the sustain pedal will not affect the other notes Thus the MPC5000 is set to convert the sustain pedal s data to note duration by default but you can change the setting to record the data as sustain pedal data 04 Press the MODE button and then PAD 9 OTHER This switches the MPC5000 to OTHER mode Master Level 12dE Sus Pedal to Duration EME 05 Select the Sus Pedal to Duration field Truncate Duration TO SEG LEHGTH Record Pad Aftertouch HO 06 Use the DATA wheel to select one of the following choices for Tar Average 2 how the MPC5000 will interpret the sustain pedal s MIDI data Flash Temro LED ALWAYS Mute Stor of One Shot THROUGH ALAT Chan 1 2 MATH OUT L amp R YES Prosram Audition Hote C 3 687 OTHER Mumia depending on the desired behavior The MPC5000 is set to convert the sustain pedal data to note duration NO The MPC5000 records sustain pedal data as it is 194 Other Se

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PAL™/iPAL™ - Tivoli Audio  User Manual  Samsung SGH-X150 Manuel de l'utilisateur  N° 99-02 DAC/DSA CIRCULAIRE RELATIVE A L`APPROBATION  Dell Model PR09S Home Theater Server User Manual    INE - Académie d`Amiens  Stamina Products Magnetic Resistance Recumbent Bike 15-4760 User's Manual      

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file